JP6755907B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

For example, as a gaming machine that plays a game using a gaming ball, for example, a so-called pachinko gaming machine such as the one described in Patent Document 1 is known.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-40413

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in the production and improving the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve the above object, the game machine according to the present invention includes a game board (12) having a game area in which the game ball rolls, and a start area provided on the game board and capable of detecting the passage of the game ball. (For example, a second starting port 45 described later), a first state provided on the game board where the game ball is easily accepted (open state described later), and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable winning device (for example, the second large winning opening 54 described later) that is in one of the states (closed state described later) and the variable winning device when the starting area detects a game ball. A lottery means (for example, a lottery means) for drawing a lottery as to whether or not the player shifts to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state described later) that is advantageous to the player by repeating the first state and the second state. , The identification information (for example, a special symbol described later) corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the main control circuit 70) described later, and then the identification information is stopped. An identification information display means to be displayed (for example, a special symbol display device 61 described later) and an effect control means (for example, an effect control means) for controlling an effect operation performed during a variable display period of the identification information based on the result of a lottery by the lottery means. The sub-control circuit 200) described later, the effect display means (for example, the display device 13 described later) that displays the effect when the effect is executed, and the starting region passing through the game ball during the variable display period of the identification information. When the detection is detected, the effect control means is provided with a hold ball storage means (for example, a start port passage detection process described later) that stores the result of the lottery by the lottery means performed at the time of the detection as a hold ball. Prior to executing the variable display of the identification information based on the reserved ball, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-effect (for example, the look-ahead effect described later) based on the content of the predetermined hold ball. Means (for example, a look-ahead effect flag determination process described later), a first effect having a predetermined effect form (for example, a symbol effect described later) as the pre-effect, and a second effect having an effect form different from the first effect. At least one of the effects (for example, the background effect described later) is executed by using the effect display means (for example, the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone described later, at the start of the look-ahead special zone). (Effects, etc.) and the case where the first effect and the second effect of the same system are executed by the first pre-effect control means during the variable display period of the identification information based on the reserved ball in the pre-effect. , The first of the same system After the effect and the execution of the second effect, in the variable display period of the identification information based on the predetermined reserved ball, the third effect (for example, special effect A) whose production form is different from that of the first effect and the second effect. ) Is executed by using the effect display means (for example, the effect in the look-ahead special zone described later), and the special of the gaming state at the time of executing the third effect. When the expected degree of transition to the gaming state is higher than the expected degree of transition of the gaming state to the special gaming state at the time of executing the first effect or the second effect, and the third effect is not executed. When the variable display period is the first period (HN00), either the first effect or the second effect is performed without executing the effect in a manner in which both the first effect and the second effect are executed. Is provided, and a plurality of periods are provided as a period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period, and either the first effect or the second effect is executed in a part of the plurality of periods. It has a configuration in which the first effect and the second effect are executed without executing the effect in the manner described.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention further improves the degree of expectation of the player for the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in the pre-production (pre-reading effect), and the player's expectation for the pre-production (pre-reading effect). You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a decorative accessory (logo accessory 210) that can be moved from a standby position to an operating position by a driving means, and the decorative accessory is at least one decorative portion (right character portion 211A). , Middle character portion 211C and left character portion 211B), and the effect that the lens (right inner lens 213, left inner lens 214) guides the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED59k) provided behind the decorative portion. It has a decorative member (base lens 220) for displaying, and the decorative accessory is provided behind the decorative portion in a state where the decorative portion is moved when it is moved from the standby position to the operating position. The decorative member may be configured to be easily visible.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can perform an effect of moving the decorative portion and further perform an effect of displaying a decorative member that can be easily seen behind the decorative portion, thus improving the interest in the effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in the production and improving the interest in the game of the player.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a decorative member, a reflector, a lens member, and a left side of a pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the main part of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the lightning bolt accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the main part of the game board in which the lightning bolt accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. It is a rear view of the main part of the game board in which the lightning bolt accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the first position. It is a front view of the gaming board in which the lightning bolt accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the first position. It is a rear view of the main part of the game board in which the lightning bolt accessory of the game board of the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the second position. It is a front view of the gaming board in which the lightning bolt accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the second position. It is an exploded perspective view of the logo accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a main part of a logo accessory of a pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear perspective view which disassembled the main part of the logo accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the main part of the game board in which the logo accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. It is a front view of the main part of the game board in which the logo accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the falling position. It is a rear view of the main part of the game board in which the logo accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. It is a front view of the main part of the game board in which the logo accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the falling position. It is a front view of the game board in which the lightning bolt accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the first position, and the logo accessory is in the drop position. It is a rear view of the game board in which the lightning bolt accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the first position, and the logo accessory is in the drop position. It is an exploded perspective view of the shutter accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective front view of the main part of the shutter accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective rear view of the main part of the shutter accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the shutter accessory in which the gold shutter of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the open position and the silver shutter is in the closed position. It is a front view of the shutter accessory in which the silver shutter of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is in the open position and the gold shutter is in the closed position. It is a front view of the game board in which the gold shutter of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention is in a closed position. It is a front view of the game board in which the silver shutter of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention is a closed position. It is an exploded perspective view of the left silver shutter and the left silver door rack member of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) and (b) show the mounting procedure of the left silver shutter and the left silver door rack member in which the positions of the holes of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention are the same in the horizontal direction. It is a figure. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the attachment procedure of the left silver shutter and the left silver door rack member having another shape to be attached to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative member corresponding to the 4th symbol of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear perspective view which disassembled the decorative member corresponding to the 4th design of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of a main part of a game board having a pedestal of another shape of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (corresponding to a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 7). It is a cross-sectional view of a main part of a game board having a pedestal of another shape of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (corresponding to a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 7). It is a schematic block diagram of the payout unit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the production mode and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. This is an effect mode transition table summarizing the contents of the effect mode transition types in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the normal pseudo-continuous production in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time flow of the normal pseudo-continuous production and stock pseudo-continuous production in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation example 1 of the stock pseudo-continuous production in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation example 2 of the stock pseudo-continuous production in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the outline of the processing flow of the stock pseudo-continuous production in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the rank effect (latent expectation degree notification effect) performed in mode A and the latent number of times notification effect performed in mode B in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. .. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the time saving number-of-time notification effect performed in mode C in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the outline of the processing flow of the advance notice effect performed by the time saving number of times notification effect. It is a figure which shows the outline of the operation example of the advance notice effect performed by the time saving number of times notification effect. It is a figure which shows the outline of the processing flow of the continuous effect performed by the time saving number of times notification effect. It is a figure for demonstrating various operation examples of the look-ahead special zone effect performed in the special effect stage of a normal mode in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the production at the start of the look-ahead special zone performed by the look-ahead special zone production. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit random number determination table (at the time of the 1st start opening winning) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit random number determination table (at the time of the 2nd start opening winning) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit symbol random number determination table (at the time of the 1st start opening winning) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit symbol random number determination table (at the time of the 2nd start opening winning) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot type determination table in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning pattern determination table in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead effect flag table in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect table (without look-ahead) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect table (with look-ahead) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect table (before the start of the look-ahead special zone) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect table (in the read-ahead special zone) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect table (special effect stage) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-ream number determination table in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mascot appearance number determination table in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation time management process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot start interval management processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening passage detection processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main process executed by the sub-CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead effect flag determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stock pseudo-continuous production pattern determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control circuit interrupt process executed by the sub-CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the latent expectation degree notification processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the latent probability number notification processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving number-of-time notification processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow between a normal mode and mode B in a modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the latent probability number notification effect performed in mode B in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the latent probability number notification processing in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the time saving notification pattern table used in the modification 2. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation example of the look-ahead special zone effect in the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination processing in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the detection process with a collateral ball executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the detection process without a collateral ball executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counting switch detection process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start waiting process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start initial processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the excitation system of the payout motor in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart about the reception of the prize ball control data of the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart concerning the transmission of the payout error information data by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the communication form between the main control circuit and the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of error information transmission by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the method of synthesizing error information in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the error information in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart of origin adjustment control using the prize ball control process by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed using the prize ball control process by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart of the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the excitation data for each drop request number in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the payout state notification display device in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the overpayment error occurrence in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of occurrence of the payout ball clogging error in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the error occurrence of the lower plate full tank in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the payout motor abnormality occurrence in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart regarding the reception process of the payout control circuit at the time of power failure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counting switch detection process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor drive processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the origin adjustment excitation data setting process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counting switch detection process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start waiting process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start initial processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, the configuration and various operations of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

(First Embodiment)
First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 128.

[Function flow]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is easily performed. Become.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and one condition for the variable display of the normal symbol in the ordinary symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that is displayed in a variable manner. For example, a "variable display" that is actually displayed in a variable manner and a "stop display" that is actually stopped and displayed. , Etc. are possible.

Further, in the "variable display", for example, a "derivative display" in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of a special symbol game can be performed. That is, in the present specification, the operation from the start of the "variable display" to the "derived display" is referred to as one "variable display".

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.
(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, random numbers (big hit determination random value and symbol determination random value) are extracted and extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. Each random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process during the special symbol game shown in FIG. 1).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is memorized by the special symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is memorized, and the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. judge.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. Determine the effect pattern to be executed along with the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. , And an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that a "big hit" has occurred, a big hit game control process for performing a big hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, the game state at the normal time, which is different from the jackpot game state, is managed.

As the normal gaming state, for example, in the above-mentioned jackpot determination, a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a "big hit" increases (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation gaming state") and a special symbol start winning prize are easily obtained. A game state (hereinafter referred to as a "short-time game state") and the like can be mentioned. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts and wins during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (big hit determination random value, symbol determination random value) acquired at the time of the start winning. Etc.) are put on hold.

That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and after the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed is completed. The variable display of the reserved special symbol is started. In the following, the variable display of the special symbol on hold is also referred to as a "holding ball".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of 4 for each special symbol start prize. You can get the number of reserved balls. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines the winning of the reserved ball (whether or not the “big hit” is won) based on the above-mentioned information on the reserved ball, and further, the determination result. A function of performing a predetermined effect based on the above, that is, a look-ahead effect function may be provided.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random value value is stored (the normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 1). See processing flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. judge.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the random value extracted from the hit determination counter is referred to, and the hit determination as to whether or not to make a "hit" is performed. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the result is a "hit". In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "hit", a hit game control process for performing a hit game is executed.

In the winning game control process, the possibility of various winnings described above, particularly the possibility of winning a special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not "hit", the hit game control process is not executed. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed again, and then various processes of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball is determined by the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "hit". The ease with which processing is performed changes.

In the present embodiment, as various random number value extraction methods, a soft random number method that generates random number values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned random number values may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main body 2, a base door 3 that is openable and closable to the main body 2, and a glass door that is openable and closable to the base door 3. 4 and.

[Main body]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 3). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is arranged in front of the main body 2 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and by rotating the base door 3 around one side end of the main body 2, the main body 2 The opening 2a is opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base door 3 is provided with a square opening 3a. The opening 3a is formed from a substantially central portion of the base door 3 to an upper region, and is formed in a size that occupies most of the region.

Further, the base door 3 includes a speaker 11, a game board 12, a liquid crystal display device 13 (effect notification means, effect display means), a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a payout unit 16, and a board unit 17. The lightning bolt accessory 80, the logo accessory 210, and the door accessory 420, which will be described later, are attached to the game board 12, respectively. Here, the logo accessory 210 of the present embodiment constitutes the decorative accessory of the present invention.

The speaker 11 is arranged at the upper part (near the upper end portion) of the base door 3. The game board 12 is arranged in front of the base door 3 (front side of the pachinko game machine 1) and is arranged so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

The game board 12 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member having light transmission. As the light-transmitting resin, for example, acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin and the like can be used.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko game machine 1), a game area 12a on which the game balls launched from the launching device 15 roll is formed. The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail (specifically, an outer rail (not shown) surrounding the opening 4a of the glass door 4 described later), and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially circular.

Further, a plurality of game nails (not shown) are driven into the game area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 5 described later.

The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13a is set so as to occupy all or a part of the surface of the game board 12.

In the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as an identification symbol for effect, an effect image, and a decorative image (decorative pattern) are displayed. The player can visually recognize various images displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 via the game board 12.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device 13 includes, for example, a plasma display, a rear projection display, and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). A display device such as a display may be applied.

Further, a spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1) and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 13 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko game machine 1), and is provided on the game board 12. It forms a space that serves as a flow path for a gaming ball that rolls in the gaming area 12a.

The spacer 19 is made of a light-transmitting material. The present invention is not limited to this, and the spacer 19 may be, for example, partially formed of a light-transmitting material or a non-light-transmitting material. ..

The plate unit 14 is arranged below the game board 12. The plate unit 14 has an upper plate 21 and a lower plate 22 arranged below the upper plate 21. As shown in FIG. 2, the upper plate and the lower plate 22 are formed with a payout outlet 21a and a payout outlet 22a for lending the game ball and paying out the game ball (prize ball), respectively.

When the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout port 21a and the payout port 22a, and are stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. Further, the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 is launched into the game area 12a by the launching device 15.

Further, the plate unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. The effect button 23 is mounted on the upper plate 21. Further, a dial operation unit (jog dial) 24 is rotatably attached to the peripheral edge of the effect button 23 with respect to the effect button 23.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed by using at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24, and when performing a predetermined effect, the liquid crystal display device 13 In the display area 13a, an image prompting the operation of at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24 is displayed.

The launcher 15 is arranged in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launching device 15 includes a launching handle 25 that can be operated by the player, and a panel body 26 that engages with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14. The launch handle 25 is arranged on the front surface side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a solenoid actuator (driving device) for controlling the firing operation of the game ball is provided on the back surface side of the panel body 26. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a touch sensor is provided on the peripheral edge of the launch handle 25, and a launch volume is provided inside the launch handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the electric power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player's hand comes into contact with the touch sensor of the firing handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. As a result, it is detected that the player holds the launch handle 25, and the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator.

Then, when the player grasps the launch handle 25 and rotates it clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the launch volume changes according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 25. , The power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially launched, and the launched game balls are guided by the guide rail and discharged to the game area 12a of the game board 12.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a launch stop button is provided on the side portion of the launch handle 25. The launch stop button is a button provided to stop the launch of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. When the player presses the launch stop button, the launch of the game ball is stopped even in the state where the launch handle 25 is gripped and rotated.

The payout unit 16 and the substrate unit 17 are arranged on the back side of the base door 3. A game ball is supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on the establishment of the payout condition.

The board unit 17 has various control boards. The various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub control circuit 200, a payout control circuit 300, and the like, which will be described later (see FIG. 41 described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially square surface. Further, the glass door 4 is arranged on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size of covering the game board 12. A speaker cover 29 is provided on the front surface of the glass door 4 in an upper region facing the speaker 11.

Further, in the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening 4a having a size that exposes at least the game area 12a is formed in the area of the game board 12 facing the game area 12a. A protective glass 28 having light transmission is attached to the opening 4a of the glass door 4, whereby the opening 4a is closed.

Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is arranged so as to face at least the game area 12a of the game board 12. As shown in FIG. 2, decorative members 58A to 58D are provided at the four corners around the opening 4a of the glass door 4, and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) 59a to 59d are provided on the rear surface of the decorative members 58A to 58D (FIG. 2). 41) is provided. The decorative members 58A to 58D perform an effect display related to the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86, which will be described later, by lighting the LEDs 59a to 59d. The glass door 4 constitutes the frame body of the present invention, and the decorative members 58A to 58D constitute the frame body side decorative member of the present invention.

In FIG. 2, the decorative member 58C located at the lower left of the opening 4a is provided in front of the metallic left frame 111 provided in the glass door 4, as shown in FIG. The left frame 111 is grounded, and the left frame 111 has a function as a ground. A lens member 112, a reflector 113, and an illumination board 109 are interposed between the left frame 111 and the decorative member 58C.

An LED 59c (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided on the illuminated substrate 109, and the light emitted from the LED 59c is guided to the lens member 112 by the reflector 113, so that the decorative member 58C is provided by the lens member 112. Display the effect. The back surface of the decorative members 58A, 58B, 58D is also provided with an illuminated substrate (not shown) having LEDs 59a, 59b, 59d as in FIG. 2.

The lens member 112 is subjected to aluminum vapor deposition treatment. Therefore, as a result of being charged with static electricity on the lens member 112, static electricity may flow to the illuminated substrate of the decorative member 58A and the illuminated substrate 109, which may damage the illuminated substrate of the decorative member 58A and the illuminated substrate 109. .. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the surface of the reflector 113 is plated to bring the reflector 113 into contact with the lens member 112, and further, the lens member 112 and the illuminated substrate 109 are placed on the left frame. It was fixed at 111. As a result, the static electricity charged on the lens member 112 can be released from the reflector 113 to the left frame 111.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 7 to 38. FIG. 5 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 12.

On the front surface of the game board 12, as shown in FIG. 5, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first starting port 44, a second starting port 45 (starting area), and an ordinary electric accessory 46 And are provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, general winning openings 51 and 52, a first large winning opening 53 (variable winning device), a second large winning opening 54 (variable winning device), and an out opening 55 are shown. There are multiple game nails that do not.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, a bulging portion 57 is provided on the front surface of the game board 12, and the bulging portion 57 bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 12. Hereinafter, the front side of the game board 12 represents the player side with respect to the game board 12, and the rear side of the game board 12 represents the side opposite to the player side with respect to the game board 12. Further, the right side and the left side with respect to the game board 12 represent the right side and the left side when viewed from the player. Therefore, when the game board 12 is viewed from the rear, the right side of the game board 12 is the left side and the left side of the game board 12 is the right side on the paper.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, below the special symbol display device 61 (identification information display means, special symbol display means), the ordinary symbol display device 62, the ordinary symbol hold display device 63, and the first special A symbol hold display device 64 and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are provided.

In this embodiment, a notification LED that lights up when the result of the stop display of the special symbol is "big hit", a round number display LED that displays the number of rounds during the big hit game, and the like may be provided.

[Various components of the game area]
The guide rail 41 extends in an arc shape so as to partition the game area 12a, and includes an outer rail 41a (shown by a virtual line in FIG. 5) surrounding the opening 4a of the glass door 4 and an inner side of the outer rail 41a. It is composed of an inner rail 41b arranged on the (inner peripheral side) and extending in an arc shape.

The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are arranged so as to face each other in the vicinity of the left end portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, whereby the launching device is located between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b. A guide path 41c that guides the game ball launched by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

Further, at the tip of the inner rail 41b located on the upper left side of the game area 12a, a ball discharge port 41d is formed by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing the tip of the inner rail 41b. Then, at the tip of the inner rail 41b, a ball return prevention piece 42 is provided so as to close the ball discharge port 41d.

The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d into the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

The game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as a plurality of game nails, the first start port 44, and the second start port 45, and changes the traveling direction of the upper part of the game area 12a. It flows down from to the bottom.

A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided at substantially the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over the area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

The ball passage detector 43 is arranged near the right end of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passage detector 43 is provided with a passing ball sensor 43a (see FIG. 41 described later) for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passage detector 43. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery for whether or not it is a "hit" is performed, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

The first starting port 44 is arranged below the display area 13a, and the second starting port 45 is arranged below the first starting port 44. The first starting port 44 and the second starting port 45 are made of members capable of accepting game balls.

Hereinafter, the entry or passage of the game ball into or passing through the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 is referred to as "winning". Then, when the game balls win the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45, the first predetermined number (three in the present embodiment) of the game balls is paid out.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting port 44, a lottery is performed to determine whether the ball is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and the special symbol is changed based on the result of the lottery. The display starts. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 45, a lottery for whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed, and the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

The first starting port 44 is provided with a first starting port winning ball sensor 44a (see FIG. 41 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 44. Further, the second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a (see FIG. 41 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 45. The game balls that have won the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 are conveyed to the game ball collection section (not shown) through the collection port (not shown) provided on the game board 12. ..

The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided at the second starting port 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 includes a pair of blade members rotatably attached to both sides of the second starting port 45 and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a (see FIG. 41 described later) for driving the pair of blade members. Have.

The ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, and is in an open state in which a pair of blade members are expanded to facilitate winning a game ball in the second starting port 45, and the pair of blade members are closed. The second starting port 45 is generated in one of the closed states that makes it impossible for the game ball to win a prize.

In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. You may.

The general winning opening 51 is arranged near the lower left portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. Further, the general winning opening 52 is arranged below the ball passage detector 43, and is arranged near the lower right portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side.

The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are made of members capable of accepting a game ball. In the following, entering or passing a game ball into or passing through the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a second predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of game balls is paid out.

The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 51a (see FIG. 41 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 51. Further, the general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 52a (see FIG. 41 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 52.

The first prize opening 53 and the second prize opening 54 are arranged below the ball passage detector 43 and between the first start opening 44 and the general winning opening 52. The first large winning opening 53 and the second large winning opening 54 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the first large winning opening 53 is arranged above the second large winning opening 54. To.

The first prize opening 53 and the second prize opening 54 are both so-called attacker type opening / closing devices, and the opening / closing shutters 53a and 54a and the solenoid actuator for driving the shutter (the first in FIG. 41 described later). It has a large winning opening solenoid 53b and a second winning opening solenoid 54b).

Each of the first prize opening 53 and the second prize opening 54 accepts the game ball when the corresponding shutter is open (open state: first state), and the shutter is closed (closed). In the state (second state), the game ball is not accepted.

In the following, the entry or passage of a game ball into or passing through the first prize opening 53 or the second prize opening 54 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the first large winning opening 53, a third predetermined number of balls (10 in the present embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second large winning opening 54, a fourth predetermined number of balls (15 in the present embodiment) are paid out.

Further, the first large winning opening 53 is provided with a count sensor 53c (see FIG. 41 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the first large winning opening 53. Further, the second special winning opening 54 is provided with a count sensor 54c (see FIG. 41 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the second large winning opening 54.

The out port 55 is provided at the bottom of the game area 12a. The out port 55 is a game in which none of the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the general winning opening 51, the general winning opening 52, the first major winning opening 53, and the second major winning opening 54 wins. Accept the ball.

When the arrangement of the various constituent members in the game area 12a of the present embodiment is as shown in FIG. 5, when the game ball is driven into the area on the right side of the game area 12a by the player (when the game ball is hit right). , The game ball is guided to the second starting port 45 by a game nail or the like.

In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first starting port 44. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the person who wins the second starting port 45 is more likely to receive the lottery of the "big hit" which is advantageous for the player than the case where the first starting port 44 is won.

Therefore, in the "short-time game state" described later, where it is relatively easy to win a prize in the second starting port 45, there is a possibility of winning a prize in the first starting port 44 by hitting right (which is disadvantageous for the player). The possibility of being in a gaming state) can be reduced.

In FIG. 7, the bulging portion 57 is provided below the first large winning opening 53, and an inclined surface 57A is formed on the upper surface of the bulging portion 57. The inclined surface 57A is inclined from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the player side, and the second large winning opening 54 is provided on the inclined surface 57A on the left side with respect to the first large winning opening 53. ..

Ribs 57a and 57b are formed on the portion of the inclined surface 57A located to the right of the second large winning opening 54 with the inclined surface 57A in the front-rear direction, and the ribs 57a and 57b are formed on the inclined surface 57A. It is separated in the front-back direction along the inclination direction.

The inclined surface 57A guides a game ball flowing down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a to the second large winning opening 54, and the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 57A collides with the ribs 57a and 57b. Then, the speed of the game ball decreases, and the game ball can easily win a prize in the second large winning opening 54 in which the shutter 54a is in the open state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, decorative members 58E to 58H are provided around the display area 13a of the game board 12, and LEDs 59e to 59h (see FIG. 41) are provided on the rear surface of the decorative members 58E to 58H. Has been done. The decorative members 58E to 58H perform an effect display related to the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86, which will be described later, by lighting the LEDs 59e to 59h. The decorative members 58E to 58H constitute the game board side decorative member of the present invention.

[Outline composition of lightning bolts]
Next, the lightning bolt accessory 80 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the lightning bolt and the moving mechanism for moving the lightning bolt. In FIG. 8, the lightning bolt accessory 80 includes a right lightning bolt accessory 81 and a left lightning bolt accessory 86. Here, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 of the present embodiment constitutes the first accessory and the accessory of the present invention, and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 constitutes the second accessory and the accessory of the present invention. To do.

The right lightning accessory 81 has a lightning lens 82, a lightning inner lens 83 provided behind the lightning lens 82, and an LED 59i (see FIG. 41) as a light emitting element provided behind the lightning inner lens 83. It includes a lightning lens substrate 84 to be provided, and a lightning lens cover 85 provided behind the lightning lens substrate 84. Further, the LED 59i emits light toward the lightning lens 82 in front.

The lightning lens 82, the lightning inner lens 83, the lightning lens substrate 84, and the lightning lens cover 85 are integrated, and the right lightning accessory 81 uses the lightning inner lens 83 when the LED 59i of the lightning lens substrate 84 is turned on. By lighting and displaying the lightning bolt lens 82 through the lightning bolt, an effect display expressing the lightning bolt is performed. Further, the lightning lens cover 85 constitutes a pedestal for mounting the lightning lens substrate 84 and also has a function as a reflector.

The left lightning accessory 86 includes a lightning lens 87, a lightning inner lens 88 provided behind the lightning lens 87, and an LED 59j (see FIG. 41) as a light emitting element provided behind the lightning inner lens 88. It includes a lightning lens substrate 89 to be provided, and a lightning lens cover 90 provided behind the lightning lens substrate 89. Further, the LED 59j emits light toward the lightning lens 87 in front. Further, the lightning lens cover 90 constitutes a pedestal for installing the lightning lens substrate 89 and also has a function as a reflector.

The lightning lens 87, the lightning inner lens 88, the lightning lens substrate 89, and the lightning lens cover 90 are integrated, and the left lightning accessory 86 uses the lightning inner lens 88 when the LED 59j of the lightning lens substrate 84 is turned on. By lighting and displaying the lightning bolt lens 87 through the lightning bolt, an effect display expressing the lightning bolt is performed.

The tip of the right lightning accessory arm 91 is connected to the base end of the lightning lens cover 85 via a pin 91A. As shown in FIG. 9, the base end portion of the right lightning accessory arm 91 is attached to the base plate 93 via the pin 91B, and the right lightning accessory arm 91 is attached to the base plate 93 with the pin 91B as a fulcrum. Swing. As a result, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the right lightning bolt accessory arm 91 can be moved relative to each other. Here, the base plate 93 of the present embodiment constitutes the support plate of the present invention, and the right lightning bolt accessory arm 91 constitutes the third swing member of the present invention. Here, the number of support plates may be one or a plurality. In addition, "the accessory swings" means that the accessory directly or indirectly means that the accessory swings by a motor (driving force or means for generating or transmitting power, or driving means, means for moving an object). It indicates a mode, event, or phenomenon of movement (driving, moving, rotating, etc.).

The left lightning accessory arm 92 is connected to the base end of the lightning lens cover 90 via a pin 92A. As shown in FIG. 9, the base end portion of the left lightning accessory arm 92 is swingably attached to the base plate 93 via the pin 92B, and the left lightning accessory arm 92 uses the pin 92B as a fulcrum. It swings with respect to the base plate 93. As a result, the left lightning bolt accessory 86 and the left lightning bolt accessory arm 92 can be moved relative to each other. Here, the left lightning accessory arm 92 constitutes the fourth swing member of the present invention.

In FIGS. 8 and 9, a tooth portion 91C is formed at the base end portion of the right lightning bolt accessory arm 91, and the tooth portion 91C meshes (engages) with the gear 94. A tooth portion 92C is formed at the base end portion of the left lightning accessory arm 92, and the tooth portion 92C meshes (engages) with the tooth portion 91C of the right lightning accessory arm 91. The gear 94 is rotatably attached to the base plate 93, and the gear 95 of the motor 60A is meshed (engaged) with the gear 94. Further, a torsion spring 97A is provided around the pin 91B of the right lightning accessory arm 91, and the torsion spring 97A is fixed to the base plate 93 so that the right lightning accessory arm 91 is in the initial position of standby. It is urging the position.

In FIG. 9, guide grooves 93A and 93B extending in the vertical direction so as to sandwich the base end of the right lightning accessory arm 91 and the base end of the left lightning accessory arm 92 are formed in the base plate 93. Guide grooves 93C and 93D extending in the left-right direction on both the left and right sides of the base plate 93, and slits 93E and 93F notched in the vertical direction between the guide grooves 93A and 93B and the guide grooves 93C and 93D in the left-right direction. Is formed.

Here, the guide groove 93C constitutes the first support plate side guide portion of the present invention, and the guide groove 93D constitutes the second support plate side guide portion of the present invention. Further, the guide groove 93A constitutes the third support plate side guide portion of the present invention, and the guide groove 93B constitutes the fourth support plate side guide portion of the present invention.

The right lightning accessory arm 91 and the pins 91A and 92A of the left lightning accessory arm 92 are engaged with the slits 93E and 93F, and the right lightning accessory arm 91 and the left lightning accessory arm 92 are the slits 93E and 93F. It is movable along.

A protrusion 91D is formed on the right lightning accessory arm 91, and the protrusion 91D projects from the right lightning accessory arm 91 toward the base plate 93 and engages with the guide groove 93A. A protrusion 92D is formed on the left lightning accessory arm 92, and the protrusion 92D projects from the left lightning accessory arm 92 toward the base plate 93 and engages with the guide groove 93B.

In FIG. 8, a right lightning accessory arm 96 is provided behind the lightning lens cover 85 of the right lightning accessory 81, and the right lightning accessory arm 96 is a right lightning accessory arm in the front-rear direction of the game board 12. It is installed between 91 and the right lightning bolt 81.

The right lightning accessory arm 96 is attached to the base plate 93 via the pin 96A, and the right lightning accessory arm 96 is swingable with respect to the base plate 93 around the pin 96A.

A torsion spring 97B is provided around the pin 96A of the right lightning accessory arm 96, and the torsion spring 97B is fixed to the base plate 93 to move the right lightning accessory arm 96 to the standby position which is the initial position. I'm urging.

Guide grooves 96B and 96C are formed in the right lightning accessory arm 96, the guide groove 96B extends along the extending direction of the right lightning accessory arm 96, and the guide groove 96C is the right lightning accessory. It is formed at the lower part of the arm 96 to be shorter than the guide groove 96B. A protrusion 85A is formed on the lightning lens cover 85 of the right lightning accessory 81, and the protrusion 85A projects from the lightning lens cover 85 toward the right lightning accessory arm 96 and guides the right lightning accessory arm 96. Engages in groove 96B.

A protrusion 96D is formed on the right lightning accessory arm 96, and the protrusion 96D projects from the right lightning accessory arm 96 toward the base plate 93 and engages with the guide groove 93C of the base plate 93. A pin 98A of the cam gear 98 is engaged with the guide groove 96C of the right lightning bolt accessory arm 96, and the cam gear 98 is rotatably supported by the base plate 93. A gear 99 meshes with the cam gear 98, and the gear 99 is rotatably supported by the base plate 93.

The gear 100 of the motor 60B meshes with the gear 99, and the motor 60B is fixed to the base plate 93. A left lightning bolt arm 101 is provided behind the lightning lens cover 90 of the left lightning bolt 86. The left lightning accessory arm 101 is attached to the base plate 93 via the pin 101A, and the left lightning accessory arm 101 is swingable with respect to the base plate 93 around the pin 101A. Here, the right lightning accessory arm 96 of the present embodiment constitutes a first swing member, and the left lightning accessory arm 101 constitutes a second swing member. Further, the pin 96A of the present embodiment constitutes the first swing shaft of the present invention, and the pin 101A constitutes the second swing shaft of the present invention.

A torsion spring 97C is provided around the pin 101A of the left lightning accessory arm 101, and the torsion spring 97C is fixed to the base plate 93 to move the left lightning accessory arm 101 to the standby position which is the initial position. I'm urging.

Guide grooves 101B and 101C are formed in the left lightning accessory arm 101, and the guide groove 101B extends in a substantially L shape along the extending direction of the left lightning accessory arm 101, and the guide groove 101C , It is formed shorter than the guide groove 101B at the lower part of the left lightning accessory arm 101.

A protrusion 90A is formed on the lightning lens cover 90 of the left lightning accessory 86, and the protrusion 90A projects from the lightning lens cover 90 toward the left lightning accessory arm 101 to guide the left lightning accessory arm 101. It is engaged with the groove 101B.

A protrusion 101D is formed on the left lightning accessory arm 101, and the protrusion 101D projects from the left lightning accessory arm 101 toward the base plate 93 and engages with the guide groove 93D of the base plate 93. The pin 102A of the cam gear 102 is engaged with the guide groove 101C of the left lightning accessory arm 101, and the cam gear 102 is rotatably supported by the base plate 93. A gear 103 meshes with the cam gear 102, and the gear 103 is rotatably supported by the base plate 93. The gear 103 of the motor 60C meshes with the cam gear 102, and the motor 60C is fixed to the base plate 93.

Here, the motor 60B of the present embodiment constitutes the first driving means and the driving means of the present invention, the motor 60C constitutes the second driving means and the driving means of the present invention, and the motor 60A constitutes the second driving means and the driving means. It constitutes the third driving means of this invention. Further, the guide groove 96B of the right lightning accessory arm 96 constitutes the first swing member side guide portion of the present invention, and the guide groove 101B of the left lightning accessory arm 101 is the second swing of the present invention. It constitutes a member side guide portion.

Further, the protruding portion 85A of the right lightning bolt accessory 81 constitutes the first accessory side engaging portion of the present invention, and the protruding portion 90A of the left lightning accessory 86 constitutes the second accessory side engaging portion of the present invention. Make up the joint. Further, the protruding portion 96D of the right lightning accessory arm 96 constitutes the first swinging member side engaging portion of the present invention, and the protruding portion 101D of the left lightning accessory arm 101 is the second swinging portion of the present invention. It constitutes an engaging portion on the moving member side.

Further, the protruding portion 91D of the right lightning accessory arm 91 constitutes the third swing member side engaging portion of the present invention, and the protruding portion 92D of the left lightning accessory arm 92 constitutes the fourth swinging member side engaging portion of the present invention. It constitutes an engaging portion on the moving member side. Further, the tooth portion 91C of the right lightning accessory arm 91 constitutes the first proximal end engaging portion of the present invention, and the tooth portion 92C of the left lightning accessory arm 92 constitutes the second proximal end engagement portion of the present invention. Make up the joint.

Further, the cam gear 98, the gear 99 and the gear 100 can be defined as the first power transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first arm, and the cam gear 102 and the gear 103 can be defined. Can be defined as a second power transmission means that transmits the driving force of the second driving means to the second arm. Further, the gear 94 and the gear 95 can be defined as a third power transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the third driving means to the first arm and the second arm.

A motor 60B, a cam gear 98, a gear 99, a gear 100, and a right lightning bolt accessory arm 96 constitute the first moving mechanism 106 and the moving mechanism of the present invention, and the motor 60C, the cam gear 102, and the gear. The one including 103 and the left lightning accessory arm 101 constitutes the second moving mechanism 107 and the moving mechanism of the present invention, and comprises the motor 60A, the gear 94, the gear 95, the right lightning accessory arm 91 and the left lightning accessory arm 91. The one including the arm 92 constitutes the third moving mechanism 108 of the present invention.

A projecting piece 91E is formed on the right lightning accessory arm 91, and the projecting piece 91E is detected by a sensor such as a photo sensor (not shown) with the right lightning accessory 81 in the standby position (see FIG. 9). To. A protruding piece 96E is formed on the right lightning accessory arm 96, and the protruding piece 96E is detected by a sensor such as a photo sensor (not shown) with the right lightning accessory 81 in the standby position (see FIG. 9). To. A protruding piece 101E is formed on the left lightning accessory arm 101, and the protruding piece 101E is detected by a sensor (not shown) in a state where the left lightning accessory 86 is located in the standby position (see FIG. 9). The detection information of these three sensors is output to the main control circuit 70 (see FIG. 41), and the main control circuit 70 has the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt based on the information of the sensor. Recognize that the accessory 86 is in the standby position. In addition, each photo sensor blocks the light from the light emitting element to the light receiving element in the state where the protruding pieces 91E, 96E and 101E are detected, and when the protruding pieces 91E, 96E and 101E are not detected, the light receiving element is the light emitting element. It is configured to receive light from.

As shown in FIG. 9, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 having such a configuration has a standby position in which the extending direction is located horizontally outside the display area 13a, and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 has the display area 13a. The standby position is when the extension direction is inclined outside. FIG. 9 is a view of the right lightning bolt character 81 and the left lightning bolt character 86 from the rear of the game board 12, and the right lightning bolt character 81 and the left lightning bolt character 86 are below and to the left of the display area 13a, respectively. Is located in. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, when the game board 12 is viewed from the player side, the player cannot visually recognize the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86.

Next, in FIGS. 9 and 10, the operations of the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 will be described based on the state in which the game board 12 is viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the motor 60B is driven while the right lightning bolt accessory 81 is in the standby position, the rotation of the gear 100 of the motor 60B is transmitted from the gear 99 to the cam gear 98. At this time, since the pin 98A of the cam gear 98 moves along the guide groove 96C of the right lightning accessory arm 96, the right lightning accessory arm 96 swings in the counterclockwise rotation direction with the pin 96A as a fulcrum. When the right lightning accessory arm 96 swings in the counterclockwise rotation direction, the protruding portion 96D of the right lightning accessory arm 96 moves along the guide groove 93C from the right end to the left end of the guide groove 93C of the base plate 93. , The right lightning bolt accessory arm 96 is guided and moves along the guide groove 93C. At this time, the right lightning accessory 81 having the protrusion 85A engaged with the guide groove 96B of the right lightning accessory arm 96 is lifted by the right lightning accessory arm 96 and counterclockwise from the horizontal direction with the pin 91A as a fulcrum. It swings in the direction of rotation.

Here, the term "counterclockwise rotation direction" in the present embodiment means the counterclockwise rotation direction on each drawing. For example, in the case of a drawing viewed from the rear of the game board 12 or the rear of the game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 9, the "counterclockwise rotation direction" is the rear of the game board 12 or the game machine 1. It means the counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from the rear of. The same applies to the "clockwise rotation direction".

When the protruding portion 96D of the right lightning accessory arm 96 moves to a position where it abuts on the left end of the guide groove 93C of the base plate 93, the drive of the motor 60B is stopped, and the right lightning accessory arm 96 is shown in FIGS. 10 and 11. As such, it moves from the outside of the display area 13a to the first position in the display area 13a.

When the right lightning accessory arm 96 is in the standby position, the pin 98A of the cam gear 98 is in contact with the right end of the guide groove 96C of the right lightning accessory arm 96 (see FIG. 9). During the time when the right lightning bolt accessory arm 96 moves to the first position and the pin 98A comes into contact with the right end of the guide groove 96C (see FIG. 11), the pin 98A is moved as the cam gear 98 rotates. After abuting on the left end of the guide groove 96C, it abuts on the right end of the guide groove 96C as shown in FIG. That is, the pin 98A reciprocates once along the guide groove 96C while the right lightning bolt accessory arm 96 moves from the standby position to the first position.

Further, when the left lightning accessory arm 101 is in the standby position, the pin 102A of the cam gear 102 is in contact with the left end of the guide groove 101C of the left lightning accessory arm 101 (see FIG. 9), and from this state. During the time when the left lightning accessory arm 101 moves to the first position and the pin 102A comes into contact with the left end of the guide groove 101C (see FIG. 11), the pin 102A moves with the rotation of the cam gear 102. After abuting on the right end of the guide groove 101C, it abuts on the left end of the guide groove 101C as shown in FIG. That is, the pin 102A reciprocates once along the guide groove 101C while the left lightning bolt accessory arm 101 moves from the standby position to the first position.

Here, the motor 60B is driven by the motor control circuit 60 provided in the sub-control circuit 200 described later. Specifically, the motor control circuit 60 sets the number of steps of the motor 60B until the right lightning accessory 81 moves from the standby position to the first position, and the photo sensor moves the right lightning accessory 81 at the standby position. After detecting the protruding piece 96E of the arm 96, the motor 60B is stopped when the number of steps for the motor 60B to move to the first position is reached.

On the other hand, when the motor 60C is driven while the left lightning bolt 86 is in the standby position, the rotation of the gear 103 of the motor 60C is transmitted to the cam gear 102. At this time, since the pin 102A of the cam gear 102 moves along the guide groove 101C of the left lightning accessory arm 101, the left lightning accessory arm 101 swings in the counterclockwise rotation direction with the pin 101A as a fulcrum.

When the left lightning accessory arm 101 swings in the counterclockwise rotation direction, the protruding portion 101D of the left lightning accessory arm 101 moves along the guide groove 93D from the right end to the left end of the guide groove 93D of the base plate 93. The left lightning accessory arm 101 moves guided by the guide groove 93D. At this time, the left lightning accessory 86 having the protruding portion 90A engaged with the guide groove 101B of the left lightning accessory arm 101 is pushed by the left lightning accessory arm 101 and rotates counterclockwise from the standby position with the pin 92A as a fulcrum. Swing in the direction.

When the protruding portion 101D of the left lightning accessory arm 101 moves to a position where it abuts on the left end of the guide groove 93D of the base plate 93, the drive of the motor 60C is stopped, and the left lightning accessory arm 101 is shown in FIGS. 10 and 11. It moves to the first position in the display area 13a as described above. Here, the motor control circuit 60 sets the number of steps of the motor 60C until the left lightning accessory 86 moves from the standby position to the first position, and the photo sensor sets the left lightning accessory arm 101 at the standby position. When the number of steps for the motor 60C to move to the first position is reached after detecting the protruding piece 101E of the above, the motor 60C is stopped. As a result, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are tilted in a V shape and move to the first positions facing each other in the left-right direction. Here, the first position in the present embodiment corresponds to the drive position.

Regarding the effect of moving the right lightning bolt character 81 and the left lightning bolt character 86 from the standby position to the first position, after moving the right lightning bolt character 81 from the standby position to the first position, the left lightning bolt role. The object 86 may be moved from the standby position to the first position, or the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 may be moved from the standby position to the first position at the same time. However, the effect of moving the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 from the standby position to the first position is not particularly limited. Further, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 of the present embodiment are located outside the display area 13a in the standby position, but in the standby position, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 A part may be located.

When the motor 60A is driven in a state where the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 are moved to the first position, the rotation of the gear 95 of the motor 60A passes through the gear 94 of the right lightning accessory arm 91. It is transmitted to the tooth portion 91C.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 12, the right lightning bolt accessory arm 91 swings in the clockwise rotation direction with the pin 91B as a fulcrum. When the right lightning accessory arm 91 swings in the clockwise direction, the protruding portion 91D of the right lightning accessory arm 91 moves upward from the lower end of the guide groove 93A of the base plate 93 along the guide groove 93A, whereby the right lightning bolt. The accessory arm 91 is guided by the guide groove 93A and moves.

At this time, the right lightning bolt accessory arm 96 is restricted from swinging in the counterclockwise rotation direction when the protruding portion 96D abuts on the left end of the guide groove 93C. As a result, as the right lightning accessory arm 91 swings in the clockwise direction, the protruding portion 85A of the right lightning accessory 81 moves upward along the guide groove 96B of the right lightning accessory arm 96. , The right lightning bolt 81 moves upward along the guide groove 96B.

Since the right lightning accessory 81 is connected to the right lightning accessory arm 91 via the pin 91A so as to be relatively movable, the right lightning accessory 81 and the right lightning accessory arm 91 are respectively guided grooves in the display area 13a. It moves upward along the 96B and the guide groove 93A, and the right lightning bolt accessory 81 moves above the first position and tilts diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the front of the game board 12 (FIG. 13). reference).

On the other hand, since the tooth portion 92C of the left lightning accessory arm 92 meshes with the tooth portion 91C of the right lightning accessory arm 91, the left lightning accessory arm 92 is counterclockwise from the first position with the pin 92B as the fulcrum. It swings in the clockwise direction. When the left lightning accessory arm 92 swings in the counterclockwise rotation direction, the protruding portion 92D of the left lightning accessory arm 92 moves upward from the lower end of the guide groove 93B of the base plate 93 along the guide groove 93B to the left. The lightning bolt accessory arm 92 moves guided by the guide groove 93B.

At this time, the protrusion 101D of the left lightning accessory arm 101 comes into contact with the left end of the guide groove 93D, and the swing in the counterclockwise rotation direction is restricted. As a result, as the left lightning accessory arm 92 swings in the counterclockwise rotation direction, the protruding portion 90A of the left lightning accessory 86 moves upward along the guide groove 101B of the left lightning accessory arm 101. As a result, the left lightning bolt accessory 86 moves upward along the guide groove 101B. Since the left lightning accessory 86 is connected to the left lightning accessory arm 92 via the pin 92A so as to be relatively movable, the left lightning accessory 86 and the left lightning accessory arm 92 are respectively guided grooves in the display area 13a. Moving upward along 101B and the guide groove 93B, the left lightning accessory 86 is above the first position and tilts diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the front of the game board 12, and the right lightning accessory 81. Move so that they are approximately parallel.

Here, "substantially parallel" means that, in the present embodiment, when the right lightning bolt character 81 and the left lightning bolt character 86 are viewed as shown in FIG. 13, the right lightning bolt character 81 and the left lightning bolt character 86 are used. Is shown to be substantially parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this, and also in the case where the longitudinal axes of the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are calculated exactly. Can not be asserted that they are parallel, but maintain a substantially parallel state as a design, or become substantially parallel when at least one of the right lightning bolt character 81 and the left lightning bolt character 86 is driven. I just need something. More specifically, two points are set around when the right lightning bolt character 81 is visually recognized from a predetermined direction, and a straight line that can be connected between these two points and the left lightning bolt character 86 from a predetermined direction. Two points should be set around the area when visually recognized, and the straight line that can be connected between these two points should be parallel. In particular, one straight line can be drawn by the right lightning bolt 81 and the left lightning bolt 86. Instead, it is possible to draw multiple straight lines according to the shape of the accessory. In addition, it does not have to be visible to the player, it is not limited to the longitudinal direction, it may be in the lateral direction, and it is substantially parallel because it changes depending on the shape of the accessory whether or not it can be defined as parallel. Describe.

Further, when the protruding portion 85A of the right lightning accessory 81 and the protruding portion 90A of the left lightning accessory 86 come into contact with the upper ends of the guide grooves 96B and 101B, the driving of the motor 60A is stopped. Specifically, the motor control circuit 60 sets the number of steps of the motor 60A until the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 move from the first position to the second position, and the standby position. After the sensor detects the protruding piece 91E of the right lightning bolt accessory arm 91, the motor 60A is stopped when the number of steps for the motor 60A to move to the second position is reached.

Further, by rotating the motors 60A to 60C in the reverse direction and performing the operation opposite to the above-described operation, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 can be returned from the second position to the standby position. Since the right lightning role arm 96, the left lightning role arm 101, and the right lightning role arm 91 are urged to return to the initial position by the torsion springs 97A to 97C, the right lightning role role 81 and the left lightning role role 86 When returning from the second position to the standby position, the right lightning accessory arm 96, the left lightning accessory arm 101, and the right lightning accessory arm 91 can obtain an assist force in the return direction.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it has a motor 60B for driving the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and a motor 60C for driving the left lightning bolt accessory 86, and has the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 81. The first moving mechanism 106 and the second moving mechanism 107 that move the object 86 from the standby position to the first position (driving position) according to the effect, and the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 are the first. It has a third moving mechanism 108 including a motor 60A capable of moving from the position 1 to a second position where the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 are substantially parallel.

As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are moved from the standby position to the first position by the first moving mechanism 106 and the second moving mechanism 107. After that, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 can be moved from the first position to the second position which is substantially parallel in the display area 13a by the third moving mechanism 108.

Therefore, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are moved by the third moving mechanism 108 common to the second position that cannot be moved by the first moving mechanism 106 and the second moving mechanism 107. Can be done. Therefore, the production at the first position and the production at the second position can be continuously performed, and the interest in the production can be improved as compared with the production of the conventional monotonous character, and the player can play the effect. You can improve your interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base plate 93 is engaged with the guide groove 93C that engages with the protruding portion 96D of the right lightning accessory arm 96 and the protruding portion 101D of the left lightning accessory arm 101. A right lightning bolt having a matching guide groove 93D, the first moving mechanism 106 and the second moving mechanism 107 are oscillatingly provided around a pin 96A and a pin 101A, and having a guide groove 96B and a guide groove 101B. It has an accessory arm 96 and a left lightning accessory arm 101, and when the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 move from the standby position to the first position, the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 The 86 can be moved along the guide groove 96B of the right lightning accessory arm 96, the guide groove 101B of the left lightning accessory arm 101, the guide groove 93C of the base plate 93, and the guide groove 93D.

Therefore, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 can be moved in a direction having a higher effect than simply moving in the rotation direction (driving direction) of the motors 60B and 60C. As a result, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the production as compared with the conventional production of a monotonous character, and it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the game of the player.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are provided by the first moving mechanism 106 having the motor 60B and the second moving mechanism 107 having the motor 60C. After moving from the standby position to the first position, the protruding portion 85A of the right lightning accessory 81 is moved along the guide groove 96B of the right lightning accessory arm 96 by the third moving mechanism 108 having the motor 60A. , The protruding portion 91D of the right lightning accessory arm 91 moves along the guide groove 93A of the base plate 93, and the protruding portion 90A of the left lightning accessory 86 moves along the guide groove 101B of the left lightning accessory arm 101. , The protruding portion 92D of the left lightning accessory arm 92 moves along the guide groove 93B of the base plate 93, thereby moving the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 from the first position to the second position. It was configured as follows.

As a result, the guide grooves 93A to 93D formed in the base plate 93, the guide grooves 96B formed in the right lightning accessory arm 96, and the guide grooves 101B formed in the left lightning accessory arm 101 are used to the right. The lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 can be moved stepwise from the standby position to the second position via the first position.

Therefore, a combination of the guide grooves 93A to 93D formed in the base plate 93 and the guide grooves 96B formed in the right lightning accessory arm 96 and the guide grooves 101B formed in the left lightning accessory arm 101 is appropriately set. As a result, it is possible to make various production expressions from the standby position to the movement of the left lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 from the standby position to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the production as compared with the conventional production of a monotonous character, and it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the game of the player.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first accessory is composed of the right lightning accessory 81 and the second accessory is composed of the left lightning accessory 86, but the first accessory is The left lightning bolt accessory 86 may be composed, and the second accessory may be composed of the right lightning bolt accessory 81.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first base end engaging portion is formed on the right lightning bolt accessory arm 91, and the second proximal end engaging portion is formed on the left lightning bolt accessory arm 92. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the first base end engaging portion is formed on the left lightning bolt accessory arm 92 and the second proximal end engaging portion is formed on the right lightning bolt accessory arm 91. Good.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are moved from the standby position to the second position based on the number of steps of the motors 60A to 60C. The sensor may directly detect that the lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 have moved to the standby position, the first position, and the second position.

[Outline composition of logo accessory]
Next, the logo accessory 210 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20.
FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the logo accessory 210. In FIG. 14, the logo accessory 210 includes a right character portion 211A, a middle character portion 211C, a left character portion 211B, a finger portion 212, a right inner lens 213, a left inner lens 214, a right logo substrate 215, a left logo substrate 216, and a right. It includes a logo back cover 217, a left logo back cover 218, a middle logo inner lens 219, a base lens 220, a right inner lens 221 and a left inner lens 222, a middle logo substrate 223, and a middle logo back cover 224.

The right character part 211A, the middle character part 211C and the left character part 211B are divided, and the right character part 211A, the middle character part 211C and the left character part 211B are alphabets, numbers, kanji, hiragana, katakana, symbols, etc. It may be composed of characters, a picture constituting a character, or another liquid crystal display device different from the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided, and when there are a plurality of other liquid crystal display devices, the plurality of other liquid crystal display devices may be used. Characters or pictures may be displayed one by one, and the display contents of a plurality of other liquid crystal display devices may be combined to form one meaning. Further, when the other liquid crystal display device is single, the effect may be performed by displaying a single character or a plurality of characters or pictures.

In addition, by expressing the expression corresponding to each character or picture (expressing a similar character or picture, or an effect display that can be associated with each character or picture) on the liquid crystal display device 13, the holding ball The number of characters is increased, the probability of a big hit when each effect is executed (expectation of big hit or reliability of each effect) is notified and a demo is displayed, and the frame (outer frame, front door) of the game machine is displayed. Each character or picture-corresponding expressible member (similarly, each character or picture-like decorative member, each character, or picture-related decorative member, or liquid crystal display device) Probability of being a big hit when each effect executed by the game machine is executed by providing an effect that the expressible member executes at least one of light emission, movable, driving, display, etc. (each effect) The jackpot expectation or reliability) may be notified, or it may be driven according to the demo display.

Here, the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B of the present embodiment constitute the decorative portion of the present invention. The finger portion 212 has a thumb 212A and an index finger 212B attached to the left character portion 211B, a middle finger 212C and a ring finger 212D attached to the middle character portion 211C, and a little finger 212E attached to the right character portion 211A.

The right inner lens 213 and the left inner lens 214 are provided behind the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B, and emit light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 59k provided on the right logo substrate 215 and the left logo substrate 216. The right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B are guided to light or blink the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B.

The probability that the thumb 212A, index finger 212B, middle finger 212C, ring finger 212D, and little finger 212E are the number of reserved balls or the jackpot when each effect executed by the game machine is executed (expected degree of jackpot for each effect). , Or reliability), lighting and blinking may be selectable.

Further, in such a case, it is conceivable that the thumb 212A blinks in response to the fluctuating effect, and the index finger 212B lights up when the first reserved ball wins. Further, the thumb 212A, index finger 212B, middle finger 212C, ring finger 212D and little finger 212E as described above can be driven according to the number of reserved balls or the probability of being a big hit when each effect executed by the game machine is executed. (For example, the thumb 212A, the index finger 212B, the middle finger 212C, the ring finger 212D, and the little finger 212E move so as to grasp the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B).

The right logo back cover 217 and the left logo back cover 218 fix the right inner lens 213, the left inner lens 214, the right logo substrate 215, and the left logo substrate 216 to the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B, respectively.

The base lens 220 is provided behind the right logo back cover 217, the left logo back cover 218, and the middle logo inner lens 219, and emits light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 59l provided in the center of the middle logo substrate 223. , The middle logo inner lens 219 guides the middle character portion 211C to light or blink the middle character portion 211C.

The right side of the base lens 220 constitutes a right display unit 220A, and when the right character portion 211A moves to the right with respect to the middle character portion 211C as described later, the middle character portion 211C and the right character portion 211A The right display unit 220A provided behind the lens is easy to see.

In this state, the right inner lens 221 provided behind the right display unit 220A guides the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 59m provided on the middle logo substrate 223 to the right display unit 220A to display the right display. Part 220A performs an effect display representing a lightning bolt.

The left side of the base lens 220 constitutes the left display unit 220B, and when the left character portion 211B moves to the left with respect to the middle character portion 211C as described later, the middle character portion 211C and the left character portion 211B The left display unit 220B provided behind the lens is easy to see. Here, the right character portion 211A of the present embodiment constitutes the first decorative portion of the present invention, and the left character portion 211B constitutes the second decorative portion of the present invention.

The right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B, which are decorative members, are easy to see when the decorative member is difficult to see by the decorative unit (for example, a player cannot see a part or all of the decorative member, or It is also possible to judge that it is easy to see if the player can see a part or all of the decorative member simply by showing the mode (a state in which the decorative part is installed so as to block the line of sight). Therefore, it is not always necessary to provide all the decorative members so that they can be visually recognized. As the expression "partly or all" means, the display is initially visible from the state where a part of the decorative members is visible. If the visible range of the decorative member is wider than a part of the member, it can be recognized that the decorative member is easy to see.

In this state, the left inner lens 222 provided behind the left display unit 220B guides the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 59m provided on the middle logo substrate 223 to the left display unit 220B to display the left side. Part 220B performs an effect display representing a lightning bolt.

The middle logo back cover 224 fixes the middle logo substrate 223, the right inner lens 221 and the left inner lens 222 to the base lens 220. Here, the base lens 220 of the present embodiment constitutes the decorative member of the present invention. Further, the logo accessory 210 includes a base plate 225, a motor 60D, a moving mechanism 226, and a support member 227. Here, the base plate 225 of the present embodiment constitutes the holding plate of the present invention, and the motor 60D constitutes the decorative accessory driving means of the present invention. Further, the number of holding plates is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 19, the base plate 225 is provided on the upper part of the game board 12, and as shown in FIG. 15, the base plate 225 has a guide groove 225A curved in the vertical direction and a guide groove 225A. Also, a long guide groove 225B that curves in the vertical direction is formed, and the base plate 225 is provided with guide pins 225C and 225D that project forward from the base plate 225. Here, the guide groove 225A of the present embodiment constitutes the first holding plate side guide portion of the present invention, and the guide groove 225B constitutes the second holding plate side guide portion of the present invention.

A motor 60D is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 225. A cam gear 228 having a pin 228A is provided on the output shaft of the motor 60D. The moving mechanism 226 includes a cam gear 228, a main arm 229, a logo link 231 and a compression spring 232 and a sub arm 233.

The main arm 229 is provided in front of the base plate 225. An engaging hole 229A is formed in the main arm 229, and the engaging hole 229A is engaged with the guide pin 225C of the base plate 225. The main arm 229 is provided with an engaging protrusion 229B, and the engaging protrusion 229B is engaged with the guide groove 225A via the bush 230A.

One end of the logo link 231 is connected to the main arm 229, and the other end of the logo link 231 is connected to the pin 228A of the cam gear 228. The main arm 229 is provided with a spring engaging portion 229C, and one end of the compression spring 232 is engaged with the spring engaging portion 229C. The other end of the compression spring 232 is engaged with the spring engaging portion 225E of the base plate 225. When the game board 12 is viewed from the front in FIG. 15, the compression spring 232 urges the main arm 229 in the counterclockwise rotation direction with the guide pin 225C as a fulcrum.

Guide grooves 229D and 229E are formed at the tip of the main arm 229, and the guide grooves 229D and 229E are curved in the circumferential direction at the tip of the main arm 229. An opening 229F is formed at the tip of the main arm 229, and the opening 229F is formed between the guide grooves 229D and 229E.

The main arm 229 swings with the guide pin 225C as a fulcrum, and the engaging projection 229B is guided along the guide groove 225A during swinging, so that the main arm 229 is in a standby position described later. Swings between and the drop position. The drop position of the present embodiment is the operating position of the present invention. Here, the guide pin 225C of the present embodiment constitutes the first swing fulcrum of the present invention. Further, the guide groove 229D constitutes the first main swing member side guide portion of the present invention, and the guide groove 229E constitutes the second main swing member side guide portion of the present invention.

The sub-arm 233 has an engaging hole 233A formed at one end and an engaging hole 233B formed at the other end, and the guide pin 225D is engaged with the engaging hole 233A. In FIG. 16, an engaging protrusion 233C is formed on the back surface of the sub-arm 233, and the engaging protrusion 233C engages with the guide groove 225B through the bush 230B. Therefore, the sub arm 233 swings around the guide pin 225D as a fulcrum, and is guided along the guide groove 225B at the time of swinging. Here, the guide pin 225D of the present embodiment constitutes a second swing fulcrum. Further, the main arm 229 of the present embodiment constitutes the main swing member of the present invention, and the sub arm 233 constitutes the sub swing member of the present invention.

In FIGS. 15 and 16, the support member 227 includes a support plate 234, a right gear 235, a left gear 236, a middle gear 237, a right rack member 238, and a left rack member 239. Here, the middle gear 237 of the present embodiment constitutes the first power transmission member of the present invention, the right gear 235 constitutes the second power transmission member of the present invention, and the left gear 236 constitutes the present invention. It constitutes the third power transmission member of the invention. Further, the support plate 234 constitutes the support of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 16, engaging projections 234A, 234B, and 234C are formed on the rear surface of the support plate 234. The engaging protrusion 234A is engaged with the guide groove 229D of the main arm 229 via the bush 230C, and the engaging protrusion 234B is engaged with the guide groove 229E of the main arm 229 via the bush 230D. Further, the engaging projection 234C is engaged with the engaging hole 233B of the sub arm 233. Here, the engaging projection 234A of the present embodiment constitutes the first engaging projection of the present invention, and the engaging projection 234B constitutes the second engaging projection of the present invention, and the engaging projection 234C Consists of the third engaging projection of the present invention.

A middle logo back cover 224 is attached to the support plate 234, and as shown in FIG. 16, guide pins 224A and 224B are formed on the surface of the middle logo back cover 224 facing the support plate 234, and guide pins 224A are formed. , 224B rotatably support the right gear 235 and the left gear 236, respectively.

The right gear 235 coaxially includes a large gear 235A and a small gear 235B, and the left gear 236 coaxially includes a large gear 236A and 236B. The right rack member 238 is formed with rack teeth 238A extending in the left-right direction, and the large gear 235A of the right gear 235 meshes (engages) with the rack teeth 238A.

The left rack member 239 is formed with rack teeth 239A extending in the left-right direction, and the large gear 236A of the left gear 236 meshes (engages) with the rack teeth 239A. Further, the middle gear 237 meshes (engages) with the small gear 235B of the right gear 235 and the small gear 236B of the left gear 236, and when the middle gear 237 rotates, it is right with the rotation of the small gears 235B and 237B. The rack member 238 and the left rack member 239 move in the left-right direction. Here, the right rack member 238 of the present embodiment constitutes the first engaging member of the present invention, and the rack tooth 238A constitutes the engaging portion of the first engaging member of the present invention. Further, the left rack member 239 of the present embodiment constitutes the second engaging member of the present invention, and the rack teeth 239A constitutes the engaging portion of the second engaging member of the present invention.

The right character portion 211A, the right inner lens 213, the right logo substrate 215 and the right logo back cover 217 are fixed to the right rack member 238, and the left character portion 211B, the left inner lens 214, and the left rack member 239 are fixed. The left logo board 216 and the left logo back cover 218 are fixed. As a result, when the right rack member 238 and the left rack member 239 move in the left-right direction, the right character portion 211A, the right inner lens 213, the right logo substrate 215 and the right logo back cover 217, the left character portion 211B, and the left inner lens 214 , The left logo substrate 216 and the left logo back cover 218 are integrally moved in the left-right direction.

Then, when the right rack member 238 and the left rack member 239 move to the maximum outward in the left-right direction, the right display portion 220A provided behind the middle character portion 211C and the right character portion 211A becomes easy to see, and the middle character The left display unit 220B provided behind the unit 211C and the left character unit 211B becomes easy to see.

The middle gear 237 is fitted in a fitting portion 229G formed around the opening 229F of the main arm 229, and the middle gear 237 cannot rotate relative to the main arm 229. Further, the middle gear 237 is rotatably supported by the shaft 237A, and the shaft 237A is supported by the middle logo back cover 224 and the opening 229F of the main arm 229. Therefore, the middle gear 237 rotates relative to the support plate 234.

In the logo accessory 210 having such a configuration, the engagement projection 229B of the main arm 229 is in contact with the upper end of the guide groove 225A via the bush 230A, that is, the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left. The character portion 211B is a standby position located at an initial position outside the display area 13a.

When the cam gear 228 rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. 17 by driving the motor 60D in a state where the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B are located in the standby positions, the cam gear 228 rotates. Then, the pin 228A pulls the logo link 231 to the left, so that the main arm 229 swings in the clockwise rotation direction with the guide pin 225C as a fulcrum. At this time, as shown in FIG. 15, in the main arm 229, the engaging projection 229B is guided downward along the guide groove 225A, and the tip portion where the opening 229F is formed moves downward.

Further, since the sub-arm 233 is connected to the main arm 229 via the support plate 234, the sub-arm 233 moves downward as the tip of the main arm 229 moves downward, and the sub-arm 233 uses the guide pin 225D as a fulcrum to guide the groove 225B. By swinging in the clockwise rotation direction along the above, the tip portion of the sub-arm 233 moves downward. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, the support member 227, the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B move from the standby position to the drop position in the display area 13a.

Further, in the support plate 234 of the present embodiment, the engaging protrusions 234A, 234B and 234C engage with the guide groove 229D and the guide groove 229E of the main arm 229 via the bushes 230C and 230D, and the sub-arm 233 is engaged. Since it is engaged with the joint hole 233B, the distance between the bushes 230C and 230D and the engagement hole 233B is invariant when the main arm 229 swings from the standby position to the drop position. That is, the triangular shape formed by connecting the bushes 230C and 230D and the engagement hole 233B has the same shape when the main arm 229 swings from the standby position to the drop position.

Therefore, when the main arm 229 swings from the standby position to the drop position, the support plate 234 moves from the standby position to the drop position while maintaining the horizontal posture, so that the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the middle character portion 211C The left character portion 211B also moves from the standby position to the falling position while maintaining the horizontal posture.

Further, when the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B swing from the standby position to the drop position, the main arm 229 swings in the clockwise rotation direction with the guide pin 225C as a fulcrum, so that the main arm swings. The tip of the 229 tilts downward. As a result, the middle gear 237 rotates in the clockwise rotation direction, and the small gear 235B of the right gear 235 and the small gear 236B of the left gear 236 rotate in the counterclockwise rotation direction, respectively, thereby causing the large gear 235A and the left of the right gear 235. The right rack member 238 and the left rack member 239 are moved outward in the left-right direction via the large gear 236A of the gear 236.

As a result, the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B move outward in the left-right direction, and as shown in FIG. 18, the right display portion 220A provided behind the middle character portion 211C and the right character portion 211A can be visually recognized. The left display unit 220B provided behind the middle character unit 211C and the left character unit 211B becomes easy to see.

That is, in the logo accessory 210 of the present embodiment, the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B move from the standby position to the drop position by the moving mechanism 226, while the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B Moves outward in the left-right direction.

Then, when the engaging projection 229B of the main arm 229 swings to a position where it comes into contact with the lower end of the guide groove 225A of the base plate 225, the driving of the motor 60D is stopped. The motor 60D is driven by a motor control circuit 60 (see FIG. 41), and the motor control circuit 60 abuts at a position where the engagement protrusion 229B of the main arm 229 abuts on the upper end and the lower end of the guide groove 225A of the base plate 225. By controlling the number of steps between the positions, the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B are moved between the standby position and the drop position.

Further, the main arm 229 of the present embodiment has guide grooves 229D and 229E, and the engagement protrusions 234A and 234B of the support plate 234 are engaged with the guide grooves 229D and 229E, so that the main arm 229 guides the guide. When the engagement projections 234A and 234B swing along the guide grooves 229D and 229E when swinging in the clockwise direction with the pin 225C as a fulcrum (see FIG. 20), the support plate 234 swings the main arm 229. Is not disturbed.

On the other hand, when the cam gear 228 is rotated in the counterclockwise rotation direction in FIG. 15 by driving the motor 60D, the pin 228A pushes the logo link 231 to the right as the cam gear 228 rotates, thereby pushing the guide pin 225C. The main arm 229 swings in the counterclockwise rotation direction as a fulcrum. At this time, in the main arm 229, the engaging projection 229B is guided upward along the guide groove 225A, and the tip portion where the opening 229F is formed moves upward.

Further, as the tip of the main arm 229 moves upward, the sub arm 233 swings in the clockwise direction along the guide groove 225B with the guide pin 225D as a fulcrum, so that the tip of the sub arm 233 moves upward. Move to. As a result, the support member 227, the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B move from the drop position to the standby position outside the display area 13a.

Further, as described above, when the main arm 229 swings from the drop position to the standby position, the triangular shapes forming the bushes 230C and 230D and the engagement hole 233B have the same shape. As a result, the support plate 234 moves from the falling position to the standby position while maintaining the horizontal posture, so that the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B also stand by from the falling position while maintaining the horizontal posture. Move to position.

Further, when the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B swing from the drop position to the standby position, the main arm 229 swings in the counterclockwise rotation direction with the guide pin 225C as a fulcrum. The tip of the arm 229 tilts upward. As a result, the middle gear 237 rotates in the counterclockwise rotation direction to rotate the small gear 235B of the right gear 235 and the small gear 236B of the left gear 236 in the clockwise rotation direction, respectively, thereby rotating the large gear 235A and the left of the right gear 235. The right rack member 238 and the left rack member 239 are moved inward in the left-right direction via the large gear 236A of the gear 236.

As a result, the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B move inward in the left-right direction, and the gap between the middle character portion 211C and the right character portion 211A and the gap between the middle character portion 211C and the left character portion 211B are created. It disappears, and the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B become invisible. That is, in the logo accessory 210 of the present embodiment, the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B move from the drop position to the standby position by the moving mechanism 226, while the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B Moves inward in the left-right direction.

Then, when the engaging projection 229B of the main arm 229 swings to a position where it comes into contact with the upper end of the guide groove 225A of the base plate 225, the motor control circuit 60 stops driving the motor 60D.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B are moved in the left-right direction while moving the support member 227 from the standby position to the falling position by being driven by the motor 60D. A moving mechanism 226 for moving outward is provided, and is provided behind the middle character portion 211C, the right character portion 211A, and the left character portion 211B when the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B move outward in the left-right direction. The right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B are easily visible.

As a result, not only the middle character portion 211C, the right character portion 211A, and the left character portion 211B are dropped, but also the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B are moved outward in the left-right direction, and further, the right character portion 211A is performed. And the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B provided behind the left character unit 211B can be displayed. Therefore, the interest in the production can be improved, and the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the support plate 234 supporting the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B engages with the guide grooves 229D and 229E of the main arm 229. A support plate 234 having an engaging protrusion 234A and 234B and an engaging protrusion 234C that engages with the engaging hole 233B of the sub-arm 233 is provided.

As a result, when the main arm 229 and the sub arm 233 swing due to the drive of the motor 60D, the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B are kept horizontal through the support plate 234 while maintaining the right character. The unit 211A, the middle character unit 211C, and the left character unit 211B can be moved from the standby position to the drop position.

Further, the support member 227 is rotatably supported by the support plate 234 and supports the right gear 235 and the left gear 236 that mesh with the middle gear 237 and the right character portion 211A, and the rack teeth 238A that mesh with the right gear 235. The right rack member 238, which is movable in the left-right direction with respect to the support plate 234, and the rack tooth 239A, which supports the left character portion 211B and meshes with the left gear 236, are provided with respect to the support plate 234. It has a left rack member 239 that can move in the left-right direction.

As a result, when the main arm 229 and the sub arm 233 swing, the postures of the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B are kept horizontal via the support plate 234, and the main arm 229 is tilted. Along with this, the middle gear 237 is rotated to move the right gear 235 and the left gear 236 in the left-right direction, so that the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B can be moved in the left-right direction.

As a result, the moving mechanism 226 that effectively moves the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B can improve the interest in the production, and can improve the interest in the game of the player.

Further, the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C and the left character portion 211B are moved to the standby position and the drop position by a single motor 60D, and the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C and the left character portion 211B are dropped. Since the right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B can be moved in the left-right direction as they move to the position, the number of motors can be reduced and the number of parts of the logo accessory 210 can be reduced. The logo accessory 210 of the embodiment is provided with a standby position, which is an initial position, above the game board 12 so as to move from the standby position above the game board 12 to the drop position below. It is not limited to this. For example, the logo accessory 210 may be provided on the right or left side of the game board 12 so as to move into the display area 13a from the right or left side of the game board 12. For example, the logo accessory 210 may be provided in the diagonal direction of the game board 12 so as to move into the display area 13a from the diagonal direction of the game board 12.

[Composite production of lightning and logo characters]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a combined effect of the lightning bolt accessory 80 and the logo accessory 210 of the present embodiment will be described.

In FIGS. 21 and 22, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are moved from the standby position to the first position by the drive of the first moving mechanism 106 and the second moving mechanism 107, and The right character portion 211A and the left character portion 211B are opened in the left-right direction of the game board 12, and the right display portion 220A and the left display portion 220B provided behind the middle character portion 211C, the right character portion 211A, and the left character portion 211B are provided. The tips of the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 overlap with the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B in the front-rear direction behind the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B.

At this time, the LEDs 59h and 59i are turned on to light the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86, and the LED 59 m is turned on to display the lightning bolt by the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B of the base lens 220. I do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the decorative members 58A and 58D provided on the extension line of the right lightning bolt accessory 81 at the first position around the opening 4a of the glass door 4 are lit by the LEDs 59a and 59d. By lighting the decorative members 58B and 58C provided on the extension line of the left lightning bolt accessory 86 at the first position around the opening 4a of the glass door 4 by the LEDs 59b and 59c, an effect display representing the lightning bolt is displayed. Do.

In addition to this, the decorative members 58F and 58H provided on the extension line of the right lightning bolt accessory 81 at the first position around the display area 13a of the game board 12 are lit by the LEDs 59f and 59h, and the display area is lit. By lighting the decorative member 58G provided on the extension line of the left lightning bolt accessory 86 at the first position around 13a by the LED 59g, an effect display representing the lightning bolt is performed.

As a result, the decorative members 58B, 58F, the right display unit 220A, the right lightning accessory 81, the decorative members 58H, 58D, and the decorative member 58A, the left display unit 220B, the left lightning accessory 86, the decorative members 58G, 58C, respectively. Through this, it is possible to produce the pachinko game machine 1 as if lightning had fallen from heaven.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are moved to the second position, the right lightning bolt accessory in the second position around the opening 4a of the glass door 4. The decorative members 58A and 58D provided on the extension lines of the object 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 are lit by the LEDs 59a and 59d, and the right lightning accessory is located at a second position around the display area 13a of the game board 12. The decorative members 58E and 58H provided on the extension lines of the 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are lit by the LEDs 59e and 59h.

As a result, through the decorative members 58A and 58E, the right lightning bolt accessory 81, the left lightning bolt accessory 86, and the decorative members 58H and 58D, it is possible to produce the pachinko gaming machine 1 as if lightning had fallen from heaven. ..

In addition, as the order of movement of the right lightning bolt character 81 and the left lightning bolt character 86 and the logo character 210, after the right lightning bolt character 81 and the left lightning bolt character 86 move from the standby position to the first position, the logo The accessory 210 may be moved from the standby position to the falling position.

Further, after moving the logo accessory 210 from the standby position to the drop position, the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 may be moved from the standby position to the first position. Alternatively, the logo accessory 210 may be moved from the standby position to the drop position at the same time as the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 move from the standby position to the first position. However, the order of movement of the right lightning bolt 81, the left lightning bolt 86, and the logo 210 is not particularly limited.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 move to the first position (drive position), and the right character portion 211A and the left character portion In a state where the 211B is opened in the left-right direction of the game board 12 and the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B provided behind the right character unit 211A, the middle character unit 211C, and the left character unit 211B are easily visible, the right side is displayed. The tips of the lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are configured to overlap a part of the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B in the front-rear direction.

As a result, it is possible to execute an effect in which the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B are related to the right lightning bolt character 81 and the left lightning bolt character 86, and the logo character 210, the right lightning bolt character 81, and the left lightning bolt character 86 Compared to the case where each of the productions is performed alone, the player's interest in the game can be synergistically improved.

Further, by overlapping the tips of the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 with the right display portion 220A and the left display portion 220B in the front-rear direction, the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 are related. The base lens 220 of the logo accessory 210 can be recognized by the player from the shapes and positions of the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the form of the right lightning bolt character 81 and the left lightning bolt character 86, that is, the production according to the lightning bolt, and the player's game. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to improve the interest in the situation.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 move to the first position, and the right character portion 211A, the middle character portion 211C, and the left character portion 211B In the state of being moved to the falling position, the decorative members 58A to 58D of the glass door 4 and the decorative members 58E to 58H of the game board 12 located on the extension line of the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 are the right lightning accessory. The production is linked to the forms of 81 and the left lightning bolt 86.

As a result, the decorative members 58A to 58H and the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 can perform related effects, and the decorative members 58A to 58H and the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 can be produced. Compared to the case where each is performed alone, the player's interest in the game can be synergistically improved. Further, the decorative members 58A to 58H can be made to be recognized by the player from the shapes and positions of the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the decorative members 58A to 58H perform the effects according to the forms of the decorative members 58A to 58H, the right lightning accessory 81, and the left lightning accessory 86, and the game It is possible to prevent a situation in which a person's game cannot be improved.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the tips of the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are overlapped with a part of the right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B in the front-rear direction. The tips of the lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 may overlap with the entire right display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B in the front-rear direction, and the tips of the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 may be overlapped on the right. It is not necessary to overlap the display unit 220A and the left display unit 220B.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative portion is composed of three right character portions 211A, a middle character portion 211C, and a left character portion 211B, but two or more decorative portions may be used.

[Outline structure of door accessories]
Next, the door accessory 420 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door accessory 420 and the moving mechanism for moving the door accessory 420. In FIG. 23, the door accessory 420 includes a pair of right gold doors 421 and a left gold door 422, and a pair of right silver doors 423 and a left silver door provided behind the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422. It is equipped with 424. The right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 of the present embodiment constitute a pair of first door members of the present invention, and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 form a pair of second door members of the present invention. It constitutes a member. Here, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment has a pair of right gold doors 421 and a left gold door 422, and a pair of right silver doors 423 and a left silver door 424. The left gold door 422 may have either one, and the pair of right silver doors 423 and the left silver door 424 may also have either one.

A lower guide rail 425 is provided below the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door 424, and the lower guide rail 425 extends in the left-right direction of the game board 12. doing. Protrusions 421A, 422A, 423A, and 424A are formed below the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door 424. Here, the lower guide rail 425 of the present embodiment constitutes the guide member of the present invention.

The protrusions 421A, 422A, 423A, and 424A are movably fitted to the lower guide rail 425, and the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are on the lower side. Supports movement of the game board 12 in the left-right direction so as to be located at an open position outside the display area 13a (see FIG. 5) and a closed position inside the display area 13a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) along the guide rail 425. To do. Further, when the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 are moved to the closed position and when the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are moved to the closed position, the identification symbol for the production, the production image, and the decoration are used. Various images such as images (decorative patterns) become invisible.

As shown in FIG. 28, a right lightning bolt accessory 81 and a left lightning bolt accessory 86 are provided behind the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, and the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, and the right silver door are provided. With the 423 and the left silver door 424 in the closed position, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, and the right lightning bolt 81 and the left lightning bolt 86. Face each other through a gap in the front-rear direction of the game board 12.

In addition, in FIGS. 28 and 29, in order to show that the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 are located behind the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left The lightning bolt 86 is shown in a state of being moved to the second position. Here, the right lightning accessory 81 and the left lightning accessory 86 of the present embodiment are made of a lightning accessory having a form different from that of the door, and constitute the second moving member of the present invention. The second moving member may be composed of a structure, a movable object, a decorative member, or the like, and is not particularly limited.

In FIGS. 23 to 25, an upper guide shaft 426 and a lower guide shaft 427 are provided above the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, and the upper guide shaft 426 is provided. The lower guide shaft 427 and the lower guide shaft 427 are provided in parallel in the vertical direction. That is, the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 are provided on the opposite side of the lower guide rail 425 with the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 sandwiching the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424. Here, the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 of the present embodiment constitute a pair of long members of the present invention.

The right gold door 421 is attached to the right gold door rack member 428. The right metal door rack member 428 is a rack that is integrally provided with a guide plate 428A and a guide plate 428A that are movably fitted to the upper guide shaft 426 while the right metal door 421 is attached to the right metal door rack member 428 and extends in the left-right direction. It has a shaft 428B and rack teeth 428a and 428b formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the rack shaft 428B and formed in the axial direction of the rack shaft 428B.

The left metal door 422 is attached to the left metal door rack member 429. The left metal door rack member 429 is integrally provided with the guide plate 429A to which the left metal door 422 is attached and is movably fitted to the lower guide shaft 427, and the guide plate 429A, and the rack shaft extends in the left-right direction. It has a 429B and a rack tooth 429a formed on the upper surface of the rack shaft 429B and formed in the axial direction of the rack shaft 429B.

The right silver door 423 is attached to the right silver door rack member 430. The right silver door rack member 430 is a rack that is integrally provided with a guide plate 430A to which the right silver door 423 is attached and is movably fitted to the lower guide shaft 427 and a guide plate 430A, and extends in the left-right direction. It has a shaft 430B and rack teeth 430a formed on the upper surface of the rack shaft 430B and formed in the axial direction of the rack shaft 430B.

The left silver door 424 is attached to the left silver door rack member 431. The left silver door rack member 431 is a rack that is integrally provided on the guide plate 431A and the guide plate 431A to which the left silver door 424 is attached and is movably fitted to the upper guide shaft 426, and extends in the left-right direction. It has a shaft 431B and rack teeth 431a and 431b formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the rack shaft 431B and formed in the axial direction of the rack shaft 431B.

In FIG. 30, the right silver door 423 is provided with a pair of bosses 423A and 423B having threaded grooves, and the bosses 423A and 423B are formed at the same height in the horizontal direction. A pair of boss holes 431d and 431e are formed in the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430, and the boss holes 431d and 431e are formed at the same height in the horizontal direction.

The bosses 423A and 423B are fitted into the boss holes 431d and 431e, and in this state, the countersunk screws 433A and 433B are fastened or screwed into the thread grooves of the bosses 423A and 423B through the boss holes 431d and 431e. As a result, the right silver door 423 is fixed to the guide plate 430A. The right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, and the left silver door 424 have the same configuration as the right silver door 423, and are fixed to the guide plates 428A, 229A, and 431A by countersunk screws 433A and 433B.

In FIGS. 23 to 27, a gold door drive motor 60E is provided on the left side of the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 in the extending direction (corresponding to one side in the extending direction of the present invention). The gold door drive motor 60E has a motor shaft 60e extending in the front-rear direction and having a gear 435 attached to the tip in the extending direction, and the gear 435 is on the front side in the front-rear direction (corresponding to one side in the front-rear direction of the present invention). ) Is installed above the upper guide shaft 426.

The gear 435 meshes with the gear 438 via the gear 436 and the gear 437, and the gold door drive motor 60E and the gear 435 to the gear 438 extend in the extending direction of the upper guide shaft 426, that is, the right metal door 421 and the left. It is installed in the opening / closing direction of the gold door 422.

The gear 438 meshes with the rack teeth 428a of the right metal door rack member 428, and the gear 439 meshes between the rack teeth 428b of the right metal door rack member 428 and the rack teeth 249a of the left metal door rack member 429. doing.

Therefore, when the gear 435 is rotated in the forward and reverse directions by the drive of the gold door drive motor 60E, the gear 438 is rotated via the gear 436 and the gear 437, so that the right metal door rack member 428 moves in the left-right direction. Then, as the right gold door rack member 428 moves in the left-right direction, the left gold door rack member 429 moves in the left-right direction via the gear 439, so that the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 are opened and closed. Move to and from the position.

Here, the right metal door rack member 428 of the present embodiment constitutes the first mounting portion of the present invention, and the left gold door rack member 429 constitutes the second mounting portion of the present invention. Further, the right silver door rack member 430 of the present embodiment constitutes a third mounting portion of the present invention, and the left silver door rack member 431 constitutes a fourth mounting portion of the present invention. Further, the gold door drive motor 60E of the present embodiment constitutes the first movable member driving means of the present invention, and the gears 435 to 439 and the rack teeth 428a, 428b, 249a are the first movable member of the present invention. It constitutes a moving mechanism 451.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a right gold door rack member 428 and a right gold door 421, a left gold door rack member 429 and a left gold door 422, a right silver door rack member 430 and a right silver door 423. The left silver door rack member 431 and the left silver door 424 are configured by integrating separate members, but the left silver door rack member 431 and the left silver door 424 may be integrally molded. Further, a member including the right gold door rack member 428, the left gold door rack member 429, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 constitutes the first moving member and the first movable member of the present invention. Further, a member including the right silver door rack member 430, the left silver door rack member 431, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 constitutes the first moving member and the second movable member of the present invention.

A silver door drive motor 60F is provided on the right side of the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 in the extending direction (corresponding to the other side in the extending direction of the present invention). The silver door drive motor 60F has a motor shaft 60f extending in the front-rear direction and having a gear 441 attached to the tip in the extending direction, and the gear 441 is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (corresponding to the other side in the front-rear direction of the present invention). ) Is installed above the upper guide shaft 426. Here, the motor shafts 60e and 60f of the present embodiment constitute the output shaft of the present invention.

The gear 441 meshes with the gear 444 via the gear 442 and the gear 443, and the silver door drive motor 60F and the gears 441 to the gear 444 extend in the extending direction of the upper guide shaft 426, that is, the right silver door 423 and the left. It is installed in the opening / closing direction of the silver door 424. Further, the gears 441 to 444 are installed apart from the gears 435 to 438 in the front-rear direction.

The gear 444 meshes with the rack teeth 431a of the left silver door rack member 431, and the gear 445 meshes between the rack teeth 431b of the left silver door rack member 431 and the rack teeth 430a of the right silver door rack member 430. doing.

Therefore, when the gear 441 is rotated in the forward and reverse directions by driving the silver door drive motor 60F, the gear 444 is rotated via the gear 442 and the gear 443, so that the left silver door rack member 431 moves in the left-right direction. Then, as the left silver door rack member 431 moves in the left-right direction, the right silver door rack member 430 moves in the left-right direction via the gear 445, so that the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are opened and closed. Move to and from the position.

The open positions of the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 of the present embodiment correspond to the first position of the present invention, and the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 421 and the left gold door. The closed positions of 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 correspond to the second position of the present invention.

Here, the silver door drive motor 60F of the present embodiment constitutes the second movable member driving means of the present invention, and the gears 441 to 445 and the rack teeth 430a, 431a, 431b are the second movable member of the present invention. The member moving mechanism 452 is configured. Further, the gear 435 of the present embodiment constitutes the first power output member of the present invention, and the gear 441 constitutes the second power output member of the present invention.

A gold door sensor 446A is provided on the outer right side of the silver door drive motor 60F. The gold door sensor 446A is composed of a photo sensor, and the gold door sensor 446A detects a protruding piece 428C provided so as to project upward from the guide plate 428A of the right gold door rack member 428. In the right gold door rack member 428, the gold door sensor 446A detects the protruding piece 428C when the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 are located at an open position outside the display area 13a.

The detection information of the gold door sensor 446A is input to the main CPU 71 (see FIG. 41) of the main control circuit 70. The main CPU 71 transmits a motor drive command to the motor control circuit 60 based on the detection information of the gold door sensor 446A. The motor control circuit 60 moves the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 to the closed position by controlling the number of steps of the gold door drive motor 60E from the open position based on the motor drive command.

A silver door sensor 446B is provided on the left outer side of the gold door drive motor 60E. The silver door sensor 446B is composed of a photo sensor, and the silver door sensor 446B detects a protruding piece 431C provided so as to project upward from the rack shaft 431B of the left silver door rack member 431. In the left silver door rack member 431, the silver door sensor 446B detects the protruding piece 431C when the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are located at open positions outside the display area 13a.

The detection information of the silver door sensor 446B is input to the main CPU 71 (see FIG. 41) of the main control circuit 70. The main CPU 71 transmits a motor drive command to the motor control circuit 60 based on the detection information of the silver door sensor 446B. The motor control circuit 60 moves the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 to the open position by controlling the number of steps of the silver door drive motor 60F from the open position by a motor drive command.

Here, the "open position" and the "closed position" in the present invention may be the same as the mode in which the first moving member moves from the "standby position" to the "driving position". That is, it is assumed that the "open position" is the "standby position" and the "closed position" functions as the "drive position".

In FIG. 23, a pair of left and right LED substrates 448 and 449 having LEDs 59g and 59h are provided on the front surface of the lower guide rail 425, and the LED substrates 448 and 449 have openings 448a formed in the LED substrates 448 and 449. The 449a is fitted to the bosses 425a and 425b of the lower guide rail 425. A thread groove is formed in the bosses 425a and 425b, and a bolt (not shown) is screwed into the thread groove.

A lower panel base 450 fixedly installed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in front of the lower guide rail 425, and the lower panel base 450 is located below the display area 13a (FIG. 6). 5), fixed to the lower guide rail 425. The lower panel base 450 includes decorative members 58G and 58H, and the decorative members 58G and 58H perform an effect display including lightning when the LEDs 59g and 59h are turned on. Here, the lower panel base 450 of the present embodiment constitutes the fixing member of the present invention. That is, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower guide rail 425 is fixed to the lower panel base 450, and the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 Has a predetermined distance between the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86. Further, the lower guide rail 425 is provided between the lower panel base 450 and the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86.

Here, having a "predetermined distance" between the first moving member and the second moving member means that the first moving member is in the open position and the second moving member is in the standby position. When there is a predetermined interval, the first moving member is in the closed position, and when the second moving member is in the standby position, when there is a predetermined interval, the first moving member is in the open position. It is assumed that the second moving member has a predetermined interval when it is in the drive position, the first moving member is in the closed position, and the second moving member has a predetermined interval when it is in the driving position. However, any of them may be used, and all of them may have a "predetermined interval".

Further, the fact that the guide member is provided "between" the fixing member and the second moving member means that the fixing member and the second moving member are driven within the driving range of the second moving member (driving from the standby position). (Within the range to the position), at least a part of them overlap when visually recognized from any direction, and points and points are provided on the fixing member and the second moving member in a visually overlapping state, and each point is passed. It is assumed that at least a part of the guide member exists on the straight line, but in addition to this, when the drive range of the second moving member is extended in the movable direction, the fixing member and the second moving member It is also assumed that and will overlap when viewed from either direction.

A plurality of fitting holes 450a to 450f are formed in the lower panel base 450. A plurality of bosses 425c to 425f are formed on the front surface of the lower guide rail 425, and among the bosses 425c to 425f, the bosses 425c and 425f are formed with screw grooves into which screws (not shown) are screwed.

In the lower panel base 450, the fitting holes 450a and 450f on both the left and right sides are fitted into the bosses 425c and 425f of the lower guide rail 425, and the screws are screwed into the bosses 425c and 425f through the fitting holes 450a and 450f. As a result, both the left and right sides are fixed to the lower guide rail 425.

Further, in the lower panel base 450, the fitting holes 450b and 450e are fitted into the bosses 425d and 425e of the lower guide rail 425, and the openings 448a and 449a of the LED substrates 448 and 449 are fitted to the lower side. With the fitting holes 450c and 450e fitted to the bosses 425a and 425b of the guide rail 425, the screws are screwed into the bosses 425a and 425b through the fitting holes 450c and 450e to lower the LED substrates 448 and 449. It is fixed to the side guide rail 425.

Therefore, the lower guide rail 425 is pulled toward the lower panel base 450 by the fastening force of the screw and is fixed to the lower panel base 450, so that the rigidity of the lower guide rail 425 is increased.

According to the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, the lower guide rail 425 is fixed to the lower panel base 450, and the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are fixed. Has a predetermined distance between the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86. In addition to this, a lower guide rail 425 is provided between the lower panel base 450 and the right lightning bolt 81 and the left lightning bolt 86.

As a result, the lower guide rail 425 can be fixed so as to be attracted to the lower panel base 450 side, and the rigidity of the lower guide rail 425 can be increased. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the lower guide rail 425, the lower guide rail 425 can be prevented from bending in the front-rear direction, and the right gold door 421, the left gold door 422, and the right silver door 423 can be prevented from bending. The gap between the left silver door 424 and the right lightning bolt 81 and the left lightning bolt 86 in the front-rear direction can be kept constant. Therefore, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, and the right lightning bolt accessory 81 and the left lightning bolt accessory 86 can be smoothly moved.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right gold door 421 is attached to the upper guide shaft 426 via the guide plate 428A of the right gold door rack member 428, and the left gold door 422 is attached to the left gold door rack. The right silver door 423 is attached to the lower guide shaft 427 via the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430, and the left silver door 424 is attached to the other of the lower guide shaft 427 via the guide plate 429A of the member 429. The gold door drive motor 60E, which is movably attached to the upper guide shaft 426 via the left silver door rack member 431 and is provided on the left side in the extending direction of the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427, and the upper guide shaft 426 and It has a silver door drive motor 60F provided on the right side of the lower guide shaft 427 in the extending direction.

As a result, the gold door drive motor 60E and the silver door drive motor 60F can be installed so as to reduce the gap between the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 in the front-rear direction. An effective effect can be realized by using the door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424.

Further, since the gap between the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, for example, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 can be moved from the closed position to the open position. When the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 move from the open position to the closed position, that is, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 When the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 move so as to switch the open / closed states (see FIGS. 26 and 27), the right gold door 421 and the left gold As the gap between the door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 can be reduced, a visually effective effect can be produced for the player.

Therefore, the visual effect of the production of the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 can be improved to improve the interest in the production, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. Can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gap between the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, so that the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 421 and the left gold The space for installing the door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver door 424 can be reduced, and as a result, the length of the pachinko game machine 1 in the front-rear direction can be shortened. As a result, the installation space of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gold door drive motor 60E and the silver door drive motor 60F extend in the front-rear direction, respectively, and gears 435 and 441 are attached to the tip portions in the extension direction. The gold door drive motor 60E has motor shafts 60e and 60f, and the gold door drive motor 60E is installed above the upper guide shaft 426 so that the gear 435 is located on the front side in the front-rear direction, and the silver door drive motor 60F is attached to the gear 435. The gear 441 is installed above the upper guide shaft 426 so as to be located on the other side in the front-rear direction.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the gold door drive motor 60E and the silver door drive motor 60F from being significantly displaced from the upper guide shaft 426 in the front-rear direction above the upper guide shaft 426. Therefore, the first movable member moving mechanism 451 and the second movable member moving mechanism 452 can be installed close to each other in the front-rear direction, and the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423, and the left silver can be installed. The space for installing the door 424 can be reduced. Therefore, for example, a decorative member or the like can be installed in an empty space in front of the first movable member moving mechanism 451 and the second movable member moving mechanism 452, and the effect can be more effectively improved.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 are provided above the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424. However, the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 may be provided below the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424. In this case, the gold door drive motor 60E is installed below the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 so that the gear 435 is located on the front side in the front-rear direction, and the silver door drive motor 60F is attached to the gear 435. The gear 441 is installed below the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 so as to be located on the other side in the front-rear direction.

Further, when the upper guide shaft 426 and the lower guide shaft 427 are provided below the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 in this way, the lower guide rail 425 Corresponding guide members may be installed below the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are provided, and the upper guide shaft 426, the lower guide shaft 427 and the lower guide rail 425 are provided. The right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction. It may be well supported or may be supported in an oblique direction.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the right silver door 423 is provided with a pair of bosses 423A and 432B having screw grooves, and the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430 is provided with a pair of bosses. Holes 431d and 431e are formed, but it is not necessary to limit this.

For example, a thread groove is formed in the guide plate 428A of the right gold door rack member 428, the guide plate 429A of the left gold door rack member 429, the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430, and the guide plate 431A of the left silver door rack member 431. Then, a plurality of screw holes are formed in each of the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, and the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver are formed. By screwing a screw into the screw groove through each screw hole with the door 424, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are connected to the guide plates 428A to 431A. May be good. However, in this configuration, the plurality of screw holes formed in the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, respectively, may be displaced in the vertical direction. preferable.

Here, as shown in FIG. 31A, a plurality of screw grooves 461A and 461B are formed in the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430, and a plurality of screw holes 462A and 462B are formed in the right silver door 423. A case where the screw holes 462A and 462B are formed horizontally in the vertical direction will be described. Here, the screw grooves 461A and 461B of the present embodiment constitute the groove of the present invention, and the screw holes 462A and 462B form the hole of the present invention. The hole may be any hole other than the screw hole as long as it is a hole through which all or part of the fastening member penetrates.

When the right silver door 423 in which the screw holes 462A and 462B are formed horizontally in the vertical direction is attached to the guide plate 430A using the pan head screw 463 (the pan head screw 463 is indicated by a virtual line), the pan head screw 463 is on the right side. It is fastened to the screw groove 461B on the right side through the screw hole 462B, that is, screwed and rotated in the clockwise rotation direction R. Here, the pan head screw 463 of the present embodiment constitutes the fastening member of the present invention.

Here, "the fastening member is fastened" means that, in the present embodiment, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are connected to the guide plates 428A and 249A by screws. It is fastened (screwed) to 430A and 431A, but it is not limited to this, and may be fastened using bolts and nuts, and is limited if it can be fastened or fixed. Although it is not a thing, it is preferable that at least one fastening member is a fastening member that is fastened by a rotary motion, taking a spiral shape as an example, even if it is composed of a plurality of fastening members.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 31B, due to the friction between the pan head screw 463 and the right silver door 423, the central shaft 465 of the right silver door 423 is increased by the amount of play in the radial direction between the screw hole 462B and the screw groove 461B. Tilt to the right with respect to the vertical axis.

On the other hand, in the right silver door 423 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the screw holes 464A and 464B are provided so that the screw holes 464A are located above the screw holes 464B by a distance T. It was formed by shifting it in the vertical direction.

When the right silver door 423 is attached to the guide plate 430A of the right silver door rack member 430, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the radial direction of the screw hole 464A and the screw groove 461A and the screw hole 464B and the screw groove 461B. The screw hole 464A and the screw groove 461A and the screw hole 464B and the screw groove 461B are positioned with the central shaft 465 of the right silver door 423 tilted to the left by the amount of backlash.

In this state, when the pan head screw 463 (indicated by a virtual line) is screwed into the thread groove 461B of the guide plate 430A through the screw hole 464A on the right side and the pan head screw is rotated in the clockwise rotation direction R, FIG. 32 (b) shows. As shown, the right silver door 423 is tilted by the gap between the screw groove 461B and the upper part of the screw hole 464B due to the frictional force between the pan head screw 463 and the right silver door 423.

When the gap between the screw groove 461B and the upper part of the screw hole 461B disappears, the upper end of the screw hole 464B comes into contact with the bolt shaft of the pan head screw (corresponding to the screw hole 461b in FIG. 32B) on which the screw is formed. Therefore, the right silver door 423 does not tilt any more in a state where the central shaft 465 is coaxial with the vertical shaft. Further, the gap between the screw groove 461A and the lower part of the screw hole 464A disappears in a state where the central shaft 465 of the right silver door 423 is coaxial with the vertical shaft.

Therefore, when the pan head screw is screwed into the thread groove 461B of the guide plate 430A through the screw hole 464A on the left side, the lower end of the screw hole 464A comes into contact with the bolt shaft of the pan head screw (corresponding to the screw groove 461A). The silver door 423 does not tilt any further in a state where the central shaft 465 is coaxial with the vertical shaft.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the screw holes 464A and 464B of the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are shifted in the vertical direction. The right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are respectively tilted in advance with the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 tilted. A female screw is screwed into the thread grooves 461A and 461B of the guide plates 428A, 429A, 430A and 431A through the screw holes 464A and 464B, and the frictional force in the rotation direction R of the pan screw is applied from the pan screw to the right metal door 421 and the left metal door. By adding the 422 to the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 can be rotated to the proper positions.

Therefore, when the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are fastened to the guide plates 428A, 249A, 430A, and 431A, respectively, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right It is possible to correct the inclination of the silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 to prevent the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 from tilting and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 from tilting. Therefore, when the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are moved in the left-right direction along the lower guide rail 425, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation from occurring.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are provided behind the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, but the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are provided. A right gold door 421 and a left gold door 422 may be provided behind the above. In this case, the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 form a pair of first door members, and the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 form a pair of second door members.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are open positions outside the display area 13a along the lower guide rail 425. It is supported to move in the left-right direction of the game board 12 so as to be located at the closed position (see FIGS. 28 and 29) in the display area 13a (see FIG. 5), but with the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422. A part of the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 may be located (exposed) in the display area 13a at the closed position.

[Structure of the fourth symbol]
Next, the fourth symbol of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth symbol.

In FIGS. 5 and 7, on the right side of the game board 12, a decorative member 470 is provided on the right side of the display area 13a, and a decorative member 471 is provided on the lower right side of the display area 13a. In FIG. 33, a panel base 472, a diffusion sheet 473, a reflector 474 and a panel substrate 475 are provided behind the decorative member 470, and the diffusion sheet 473, the reflector 474 and the panel substrate 475 are attached to the panel base 472. There is.

A plurality of LEDs 59n are provided on the panel substrate 475, and the light emitted from the LEDs 59n is guided to the diffusion sheet 473 by the reflector 474 and diffused by the diffusion sheet 473, so that the decorative member 470 lights up or blinks. By doing so, a display effect related to the game is performed.

A display member 476 constituting the fourth design is provided behind the decorative member 471, and the display member 476 includes a pair of lenses 478, 479, a front reflector 480 provided behind the lenses 478, and 479. It includes a back reflector 481 provided behind the front reflector 480, and a pair of LEDs 59p and 59q provided below the panel substrate 475 behind the back reflector 481.

Here, the LEDs 59p and 59q of the present embodiment constitute the light emitting element of the present invention. Further, the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 constitute the light guide member of the present invention, the front reflector 480 constitutes the first light guide member of the present invention, and the back reflector 481 constitutes the second light guide member of the present invention. It constitutes a light guide member. Further, the panel substrate 475 constitutes the substrate of the present invention.

The game board 12 includes a pedestal 477 forming a frame surrounding the display area 13a, and a pair of openings 477A and 477B are formed below the pedestal 477, and openings 477A and 477B are formed below the pedestal 477. A support frame 477C is formed around the pedestal 477 so as to project rearward from the back surface (see FIG. 34).

In FIGS. 33 and 34, bosses 480A and 480B are formed on the front reflector 480, and the bosses 480A and 480B have through holes 480C and 480D extending in the front-rear direction of the game board 12.

In FIGS. 35 and 36, the front reflector 480 is fitted to the support frame 477C of the pedestal 477, and the tip of the boss 480A and 480B has an opening 477A in a state where the front reflector 480 is fitted to the support frame 477C. It is fitted to 477B. Here, the support frame 477C of the present embodiment constitutes the mounting portion of the present invention. The "mounting portion" refers to a shape and member capable of installing or fitting a light guide member such as a through hole, a depression, an unevenness, etc. provided in the pedestal 477, or an installation position using the pedestal 477 itself. , Assisting the installation of the light guide member, or when installing the light guide member as a fulcrum, indirectly or directly enhancing the effect of the light guide member, or simply installing the light guide member on the pedestal 477. It is also assumed that it has been done.

In FIG. 34, a pair of bosses 471A and 471B are provided on the back surface of the decorative member 471 so as to extend in the front-rear direction of the game board 12, and lenses 478 and 479 are fitted to the bosses 471A and 471B. .. In FIGS. 35 and 36, when the lenses 478 and 479 are fitted to the bosses 471A and 471B, the rear ends of the lenses 478 and 479 are in contact with the front end surfaces of the bosses 480A and 480B of the front reflector 480.

In FIGS. 33 and 34, bosses 481A and 481B are formed on the back reflector 481 so as to extend in the front-rear direction of the game board 12, and the bosses 481A and 481B extend in the front-rear direction of the game board 12. It has through holes 481C and 481D, and the through holes 481C and 481D communicate with the through holes 480C and 480D of the bosses 480A and 480B of the front reflector 480. In FIGS. 35 and 36, the inner diameters of the through holes 481C and 481D of the back reflector 481 facing the front reflector 480 and the opening ends 481c and 481d are formed to be smaller than the inner diameters of the through holes 480C and 480D.

Here, the bosses 480A of the front reflector 480A, the through holes 480C and 480D of the 480B form the first through hole of the present invention, and the bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflector 481 and the through holes 481C and 481D of the present invention are It constitutes a second through hole.

In FIG. 33, a support portion 472A is formed in the lower portion of the panel base 472, and the bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflector 481 are supported by the support portion 472A. In the back reflector 481, the front end surfaces 481a and 481b of the bosses 481A and 481B are the bosses 480A and 480B of the front reflector 480 in a state where the diffusion sheet 473, the reflector 474 and the panel board 475 are attached to the panel base 472. It is supported by the panel base 472 between the panel substrate 475 and the front reflector 480 so as to be separated from the 480b through a constant gap (see FIGS. 35 and 36).

As a result, the back reflector 481 is provided between the front reflector 480 and the LEDs 59p and 59q. Further, the pedestal 477 is more than the facing surfaces of the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481, that is, the front end surfaces 480a and 480b of the front reflector 480 and the front end surfaces 481a and 481b of the bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflector 481. It is installed on the decorative member 471 side.

The LEDs 59p and 59q are installed on the panel board 475 so as to be located behind the bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflector 481. Here, the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 of the present embodiment are composed of black resin parts having a high light-shielding property.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the light emitted from the LEDs 59p and 59q passes through the bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflectors 481 and the through holes 481C and 481D of the front reflectors 480 and the bosses 480A and 480B of the front reflectors. After the light is guided to the 480D, the light is guided to the decorative member 471 through the lenses 478 and 479, and the decorative member 471 is turned on or blinks. As a result, the light guided from the LEDs 59p and 59q to the lenses 478 and 479 is guided to the decorative member 471 without being blocked by the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 and interfering with each other.

Here, in the display member 476 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol is the first symbol, the normal symbol is the second symbol, and the effect identification symbol (decorative symbol) is the third symbol, the third symbol is used. It constitutes 4 symbols, and this 4th symbol is a kind of decorative symbols. For example, when the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 are in the closed state, the display area 13a is blocked by the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422, and the player visually observes the effect identification symbol of the display area 13a. Can not.

In such a case, the player is notified that the effect identification symbol is changing in the display area 13a by the display effect by the fourth symbol. As the display member 476, a 7-segment display may be used to perform an effect display such that the same effect identification symbol as the effect identification symbol that fluctuates in the display area 13a is displayed in a variable manner.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having such a configuration, the reflector is provided separately from the front reflector 480 and the front reflector 480, which are fitted to the pedestal 477 so as to be located behind the decorative member 471. A back reflector 481 provided between the front reflector 480 and the LEDs 59p and 59q is provided, and the pedestal 477 is installed on the decorative member 471 side of the facing surface of the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481.

As a result, when the distance from the LEDs 59n, 59q to the decorative member 471 is long, only the front reflector 480, which is shorter than the distance from the LEDs 59n, 59q to the decorative member 471, is fitted to the support frame 477C of the pedestal 477. When assembling the reflector 480 to the pedestal 477, it is possible to prevent the front reflector 480 from tilting with respect to the pedestal 477, and it is possible to improve the assembling property of the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the adjacent LEDs 59p and 59q from interfering with each other by the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 and efficiently guide the light from the LEDs 59p and 59q to the decorative member 471.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the reflector is divided into a front reflector 480 and a back reflector 481 instead of a single elongated reflector as in the conventional case, the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 are installed. When the area is small, it is possible to prevent the rigidity of each of the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 from decreasing, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the rigidity of the entire reflector from decreasing.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the inner diameters of the through holes 481C and 481D of the back reflector 481 facing the front reflector 480 and the opening ends 481c and 481d of the front reflector 480 are set to the through holes 480C and 480D of the front reflector 480. It was formed smaller than the inner diameter of.

As a result, when there is a gap between the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481, the light is focused by the through holes 481C of the back reflector 481 and the opening ends 481c and 481d of 481D to guide the light to the through holes 480C and 480D of the front reflector 480. Can be done.

As a result, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap between the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481. Therefore, the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 more effectively prevent the light emitted from the adjacent LEDs 59p and 59q from interfering with each other, and efficiently guide the light from the LEDs 59p and 59q to the decorative member 471. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front end surfaces 480a and 480b of the front reflector 480 are brought into contact with the bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflector 481 and the front end surfaces 481a and 481b of the back reflector 481. The gap between the 480 and the back reflector 481 may be eliminated.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the tip 477c of the support frame 477C of the pedestal 477 is used with the bosses 480A and 480B of the front reflector 480 and the rear end faces 480a and 480b of the back reflector 481 and the tip faces 481a of the bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflector 481. , 481b and may be extended so as to cover.

In this way, the tip 477c of the support frame 477C can cover the bosses 480A and 480b of the front reflector 480 and the rear end faces 480a and 480b of the back reflector 481 and the bosses 481A and 481B of the back reflector 481a and 481b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap between the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively prevent the light emitted from the adjacent LEDs 59p and 59q from interfering with the front reflector 480 and the back reflector 481 and efficiently guide the light to the LEDs 59p and 59q.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the cam gear 98, the gear 99 and the gear 100, the cam gear 102 and the gear 103, the gear 94 and the gear 95 are used as the first to third power transmission means, respectively. However, the first to third power transmission means are not limited to this. For example, a crank, a solenoid, a lever, or the like may be used to use the power of the rotary motion as the power of the member performing the reciprocating motion, or the power of the reciprocating motion may be transmitted to the power of the rotary motion. If it is possible to transmit (energy, torque), it is not limited to gears.

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 5, the special symbol display device 61 is arranged at the lower right portion of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the special symbol in the special symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the special symbol display device 61 is configured by a device that displays a special symbol as a symbol composed of numbers, symbols, or the like.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display device 61 may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display device 61 performs variable display of the special symbol (identification information) when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 (special symbol start prize). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the special symbol.

In the following, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is referred to as the first special symbol. Further, a special symbol that is variablely displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the second starting port 45 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to the jackpot game state which is the state.

That is, in the special symbol display device 61, it is "big hit" that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the big hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the special symbol display device 61, the first big prize is won. The mouth 53 is in the open state.

On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 45 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the special symbol display device 61, the second large winning opening 54 is opened.

The open state of each large winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when the elapsed period of the open state of each large winning opening satisfies any of these conditions, the large winning opening that was in the open state is closed.

In the following, a game in which the first major winning opening 53 or the second major winning opening 54 is in a state in which it is easy to accept a game ball (open state) is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the big prize opening will be closed.

In addition, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

In the special symbol display device 61, when the stop-displayed special symbol is in a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of "loss"), the gaming state does not shift unless the fall lottery is won.

That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 44 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the prize is used. The variable display (holding ball) is held.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called "holding number (number of holding balls)") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. ) Is put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbol to be held (number of holds) is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of pending special symbols for variable display is eight in total.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the other special symbol. To do. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the reserved order.

[Normal symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 5, the ordinary symbol display device 62 is arranged at the lower right portion of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Then, in the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol display device 62 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

The ordinary symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) ordinary symbols in a normal symbol game, and the ordinary symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs). .. Then, in the ordinary symbol display device 62, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of each ordinary symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display device 62 alternately turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the normal symbol.

In the ordinary symbol display device 62, when the stopped-displayed ordinary symbol is in a predetermined mode (“hit” mode), the ordinary electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "loss"), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the ordinary symbol display device 62, then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved normal symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of ordinary symbols to be held (that is, the "number of holds") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Ordinary symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of holds for variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hold display device 63 includes a plurality of normal symbol hold display LEDs, and the normal symbol hold display device 63 includes the normal symbol hold display device 63. , Each normal symbol hold display LED is turned on / off to display the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Specifically, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays the normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hold display LED corresponds to the hold number of the variable display of the normal symbol. Up to 4 lights are turned on.

[1st special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 5, the first special symbol holding display device 64 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The first special symbol hold display device 64 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol (holding ball of the first special symbol) that is being held. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display device 64 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

Specifically, the first special symbol hold display device 64 displays the first special symbol hold display LED according to the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first special. A maximum of four lights are lit according to the number of pending symbols in the variable display.

[Second special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 5, the second special symbol holding display device 65 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The second special symbol hold display device 65 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol) that is being held, and the second special symbol hold display device 65 is a plurality of devices. The second special symbol holding display LED of is provided.

Specifically, the second special symbol hold display device 65 displays the second special symbol hold display LED according to the number of holds for the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold display LED is the second. A maximum of 4 lights are lit according to the number of holdings of the variable display of the special symbol.

[Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 13 is composed of a liquid crystal as described above, and performs various effect displays in the display area 13a.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of identification symbols (decoration) composed of, for example, numbers 1 to 8 and various characters, etc., are excluded except for specific cases. The symbol) is variablely displayed in the display area 13a.

Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol (such as the liquid crystal symbol alignment stitch described later) are stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61 has a specific mode (the result of the stop display is a "big hit"), the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a.

As an effect for making the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of stop-displayed decorative symbols are arranged in a specific mode (for example, the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), And then an effect such as displaying an image notifying the "big hit" can be mentioned.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65 is displayed. For example, in the display area 13a, hold information (for example, the same number of hold symbols as the hold number) for notifying the hold number of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, and the advance notice at this time is also displayed in the display area 13a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display device 62 is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for causing the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. A function to display may be further provided.

[Outline configuration of payout unit]
Next, the payout unit 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the payout unit 16, and is a view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the rear side. Further, FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration of a prize ball case unit 170 as a payout device described later.

As shown in FIG. 39, the payout unit 16 has a ball tank 161 as a ball storage tank in which game balls are supplied from a storage unit (not shown) on the upper part of the game machine and the supplied game balls are stored, and a ball tank. It is possible to manage the payout of game balls, such as the ball tank lower passage 162 connected to the ball tank 161 so as to communicate with 161 and the game ball to be paid out to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22. It is equipped with a prize ball case unit 170.

Further, a board unit 17 in which various control boards including a payout control circuit 300 are incorporated is arranged below the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162 in parallel with the prize ball case unit 170. ..

Here, the storage unit (not shown) described above is, for example, a replenishment device as ancillary equipment of a hall (game hall) installed for supplying game balls to the ball tank 161 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the payout unit 16, the game balls supplied from the storage unit are guided to the prize ball case unit 170 through the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162, and are stored.

As shown in FIG. 41, the prize ball case unit 170 has a first starting port 44, a second starting port 45, and a general winning port 51 as a plurality of winning openings provided in the game area 12a (see FIG. 5) described above. , The game ball is paid out from the ball tank 161 to the payout passage 180, which will be described later, on the condition that the game ball is won in any of the general winning opening 52, the first large winning opening 53, and the second large winning opening 54. is there. The payout passage 180 is arranged at the bottom of the prize ball case unit 170.

The prize ball case unit 170 includes a first ball supply passage 171A, a first 15-ball collateral switch 172A as a supply detecting means, and a first sprocket 173A as a moving means. Here, the prize ball case unit 170 is the same as the first ball supply passage 171A, the first 15 ball collateral switch 172A, and the first sprocket 173A described above, although they are omitted in FIG. 41 except for a part. The second ball supply passage 171B, the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B, and the second sprocket 173B as a means of transportation are arranged behind the paper surface direction (front-back direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1) of FIG. There is.

That is, the prize ball case unit 170 has a structure including two rows of ball supply passages 171 and 15 ball collateral switches 172 and sprockets 173.

However, the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are arranged so as to be out of phase with each other by 60 °. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the first ball supply passage 171A and the second ball supply passage 171B are collectively referred to as "ball supply passage 171", and the first 15-ball sprocket switch 172A and the first ball supply passage 171B. The 15-ball collateral switch 172B of 2 is collectively referred to as "15-ball collateral switch 172", and the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are collectively referred to as "sprocket 173".

Further, the payout passage 180 is actually a two-row structure having a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B. However, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B are collectively referred to as “payout passage 180”.

The ball supply passage 171 communicates with the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162, and the game balls are replenished from the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162. The ball supply passage 171 can store up to a specified number (15 in the present embodiment) of game balls replenished from the ball tank 161. Actually, since it has a two-row structure of the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B, a total of 30 game balls can be accumulated in these passages.

The 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects a game ball replenished in the ball supply passage 171. Specifically, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects that the game ball is being replenished by detecting the ball detection shielding plate 172a by the detection sensor 172b each time the game ball is replenished (passed). To do.

Therefore, when the number of game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 is insufficient, that is, less than 15, the ball detection shielding plate 172a operates and deviates from the detection area of the detection sensor 172b, so that the inside of the ball supply passage 171 It is detected that the specified number (15 in the present embodiment) is not accumulated in.

Further, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is turned on while detecting that the game ball is being replenished. Note that FIG. 41 shows a state in which the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is detecting the replenished game ball.

Further, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is turned on while it is detected that the game ball replenished in the ball supply passage 171 is passing over the 15-ball collateral switch 172. "The game ball is replenished" means that the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects that the game ball passes through the ball supply passage 171 and that the game ball exists in the ball supply passage 171. Therefore, on the premise that the game balls are connected, it is included that it is guaranteed that a predetermined number of game balls exist in the ball supply passage 171.

The sprocket 173 is connected to a payout motor 174 as a drive means composed of a stepping motor, and rotates in the clockwise direction in the drawing according to the drive of the payout motor 174. The sprocket 173 receives the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 one by one, rotates by driving the payout motor 174 by a predetermined number of steps, and moves the game balls one by one to the payout passage 180, that is, pays out. It has become.

In addition to the above, the sprocket 173 rotates by driving the payout motor 174 by a predetermined number of steps, and as a result, the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 become a rotation that can be accepted one by one. It can also include a form that depends on the rotation of the payout motor 174.

That is, it can be expressed that the sprocket 173 rotates one ball at a time and is paid out one ball at a time by the payout motor 174, and as a result of the payout motor 174 performing a predetermined rotation, the sprocket 173 eventually rotates one ball at a time. It can also be expressed as accepting and paying out one ball at a time.

Further, the sprocket 173 is premised on rotating, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sprocket 173 is a plate-shaped slide type that can be moved or driven in parallel or perpendicular to the payout passage 180. The shape of the sprocket 173 may be any shape as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be received and paid out.

As the payout motor 174, the one common to the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B is used. The sprocket 173 and the payout motor 174 in the present embodiment constitute a game ball control means and a payout means capable of moving the game ball passing through the ball supply passage 171.

Further, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B are provided with a first counting switch 181A and a second counting switch 181B, respectively. However, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B are collectively referred to as "counting switch 181".

The counting switch 181 detects the game ball paid out to the payout passage 180 by the sprocket 173. The counting switch 181 in the present embodiment constitutes a payout detecting means.

Further, a ball removal shutter 175 is provided near the uppermost portion of the ball supply passage 171. When the ball removal shutter 175 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the drawing, the ball supply passage 171 is opened so that the game balls accumulated in the upper part of the ball supply passage 171 are discharged through the ball removal passage 176. It has become. The ball removal shutter 175 is normally in a locked state, and is used, for example, when discharging a game ball stored in the ball tank 161.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko machines]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the configurations of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 41, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 70 that mainly controls game movements, a sub-control circuit 200 that controls production movements according to the progress of the game, and mainly game balls. It has a payout control circuit 300 that controls payouts.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 73. Further, the main control circuit 70 includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery process of the special symbol is performed at the time of winning the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, and this process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

A main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, and the like are connected to the main CPU 71. The main ROM 72 stores various programs (see FIGS. 72 to 84) for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables (see FIGS. 56 to 62), and the like. The main ROM 72 may store all the various data tables (see FIGS. 56 to 71).

The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to the program stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and the values of various flags and variables required for the main CPU 71 for the various processes are stored.

In the present embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 71, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium may be used as the temporary storage area. Good.

The reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute the system timer interrupt process described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC 76 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, various devices that operate in response to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

Specifically, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected to the main control circuit 70. Will be done.

Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 controls the operation of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

Further, the main control circuit 70 is connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, the first special winning opening solenoid 53b, and the second special winning opening solenoid 54b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state.

Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first special winning opening solenoid 53b and the second special winning opening solenoid 54b, respectively, to open or close the first special winning opening 53 and the second special winning opening 54. To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various sensors and receives output signals of the various sensors. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes count sensors 53c, 54c, general winning ball sensors 51a, 52a, passing ball sensor 43a, first starting port winning ball sensor 44a, second starting port winning ball sensor 45a, and backup. The clear switch 121, the gold door sensor 446A, the silver door sensor 446B, and the like are connected.

The count sensor 53c counts the game balls that have won in the first large winning opening 53, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count sensor 54c counts the game balls that have won in the second large winning opening 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 51, the general winning ball sensor 51a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70, and the general winning ball sensor 52a wins the game ball in the general winning opening 52. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70.

Further, the passing ball sensor 43a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 43. The first starting port winning ball sensor 44a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the first starting port 44.

The second starting port winning ball sensor 45a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the second starting port 45. Further, the backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared according to the operation of the manager of the game store or the like at the time of power failure or the like. ..

Further, although not shown in FIG. 41, an external terminal board and a calling device are connected to the main control circuit 70. The external terminal board is used to transmit data to the hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game store). The calling device has a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits.

The gold door sensor 446A and the silver door sensor 446B detect that the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 and the right silver door 423 and the left silver door 424 are located at open positions outside the game area 13a, and the main CPU 71. The detection signal is output to.

Further, a payout control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 70. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via the prize ball case unit 170, which will be described later, on condition that the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied.

The main control circuit 70 that determines the number of prize balls constitutes a payout amount determining means. The predetermined payout condition is that the game ball has won a prize in the various starting ports and various winning openings described above.

Further, the main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of prize balls determined as described above to the payout control circuit 300 as a prize ball control command. Therefore, the main control circuit 70 constitutes a signal transmission means.

[Payout control circuit]
The payout control circuit 300 includes a payout CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. In the ROM 302, for example, various programs (see FIGS. 103 to 110) for controlling the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170 and the like are stored.

The payout CPU 301 executes various processes according to the program stored in the ROM 302. The RAM 303 acts as a temporary storage area when the payout CPU 301 executes various processes, and the values of various flags and variables required for the payout CPU 301 for the various processes are stored.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 303 is used as the temporary storage area of the payout CPU 301, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium may be used as the temporary storage area. ..

A prize ball case unit 170 for paying out game balls is connected to the payout control circuit 300. Specifically, the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B, the payout motor 174, and the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B are connected to the payout control circuit 300, respectively.

The first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect the game balls supplied in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, and output a predetermined output signal indicating the result of the payout control circuit. Output to 300.

The payout motor 174 is driven in response to a control signal from the payout CPU 301. The first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect game balls paid out to the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, respectively, and show the results. A predetermined output signal is output to the payout control circuit 300.

Further, a payout status notification display device 178 and a lower plate full tank switch 179 are connected to the payout control circuit 300. The payout status notification display device 178, which will be described in detail later, is a display device for notifying the type of the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the payout of the game ball, and constitutes a notification means.

As shown in FIG. 123, the payout status notification display device 178 is composed of a 7-segment display, and is provided at a predetermined position on the back surface of, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that only the manager of the hall can see it.

The lower plate full tank switch 179 detects when the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 are full, and outputs the result to the payout control circuit 300. When a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is input from the lower plate full tank switch 179, the payout control circuit 300 notifies the main control circuit 70 through the payout status notification display device 178 and lower plate 70. Outputs a signal indicating that the tank is full.

As a result, the main control circuit 70 transmits an effect control command to the sub control circuit 200, and the sub control circuit 200 fills the lower plate 22 through the speaker 11, the lamp 18, the LED, and the liquid crystal display device 13. To notify.

Further, a launching device 15, an external terminal plate 140, and a card unit 150 for launching a game ball are connected to the payout control circuit 300. Further, a data display 141 is connected to the external terminal plate 140, and a rental operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of loaned balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via the request case unit 170, which will be described later, on condition that the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied. The card unit 150 that determines the number of balls to be rented constitutes a payout amount determining means. The predetermined payout condition is that the above-mentioned rental operation unit 151 has been operated.

The payout control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the solenoid actuator of the launching device 15 according to the rotation angle when the firing handle 25 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. As a result, the launching device 15 controls to launch the game ball.

The external terminal plate 140 is used for transmitting data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed, for example, on the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as ancillary equipment of the hall, and has a function of calling a hall staff member and a function of displaying the number of hits.

When operated by the player, the rental operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting the card unit 150 to rent the game ball. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting the rental of a game ball from the rental operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a rental ball control signal including information on the determined number of rental balls to the payout control circuit 300. Therefore, the card unit 150 constitutes a signal transmission means.

The payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the prize ball case unit 170.

As a result, the prize ball case unit 170 pays out the game ball. As described above, the payout control circuit 300 that receives the prize ball control command and the rental ball control signal constitutes the signal receiving means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the payout CPU 301 has first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, and first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B. The first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, and the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B are provided as functions of the payout CPU 301.

The first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B are set from the initial values (“1950 times” in the present embodiment) set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (see S409 and S412 in FIG. 103), which will be described later, respectively. , 1st and 2nd 15-ball collateral switches 172A, 172B are counters that are deducted by "1" every time a predetermined time ("1ms" in the present embodiment) elapses while detecting a game ball. ..

In the present embodiment, the countdown counter is used as the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, but a countup counter may also be used.

Therefore, the payout CPU 301 is conditioned on the condition that the payout of the game ball is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, and that the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect the game ball. In addition, every time a predetermined time (“1 ms” in the present embodiment) elapses from the initial value (“1950 times” in the present embodiment), that is, every time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) described later is performed. "1" is subtracted from, that is, updated.

The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a second update means. The value updated by the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B can be set to a value in a narrower range than the value updated by the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B described later. At the same time, it corresponds to the time when the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B are detecting the game ball, and constitutes the second value.

The first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B are set from the initial values (“2000 ms” in the present embodiment) set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (see S409 and S412 in FIG. 103), which will be described later, respectively. It is a timer in which "1" is subtracted every time a predetermined time ("1 ms" in the present embodiment) elapses. In the present embodiment, the countdown timer is used as the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B, but a countup timer may also be used.

Therefore, the payout CPU 301 sets the initial value (“2000 ms” in the present embodiment) for a predetermined time (the present embodiment) on the condition that the payout of the game ball is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B. Then, every time “1 ms”) elapses, that is, every time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) described later is performed, “1” is subtracted, that is, updated.

Here, the initial value (“2000 ms” in the present embodiment) set in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B described above is the time when it is assumed that the collateral of 15 game balls is completed. That is, the time is set to be sufficient to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (15 in the present embodiment) from the ball tank 161. The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a first update means. The values updated by the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B constitute the first value.

[Sub-control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. Then, the sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 13, control related to the sound generated from the speaker 11, control of the lamp 18, and the like in response to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

That is, the sub control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game based on the command from the main control circuit 70. In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 200 cannot supply a signal to the main control circuit 70, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-control circuit 200 transmits a signal to the main control circuit 70. It may have a possible configuration.

As shown in FIG. 41, the sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, a voice control circuit 206, a lamp control circuit 207, and a motor control circuit 60. .. The program ROM 202, the work RAM 203, the display control circuit 205, the voice control circuit 206, the lamp control circuit 207, and the motor control circuit 60 are connected to the sub CPU 201.

The program ROM 202 stores various programs (see FIGS. 85 to 95) for controlling the effect operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, and various data tables (see FIGS. 63 to 71). Then, the sub CPU 201 executes various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as storage means for storing programs, various tables, and the like, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a storage medium that can be read by a computer provided with a control means, for example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM and a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, or the like. Storage medium may be applied.

Moreover, each of the programs may be recorded in a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in advance on a recording medium, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the main RAM 73, the work RAM 203, or the like.

The work RAM 203 acts as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and the values of various flags and variables required for the sub CPU 201 for the various processes are stored. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium. ..

The display control circuit 205 controls the liquid crystal display device 13 to display an image related to the effect. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

The image data ROM stores data for generating various image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. Further, the D / A converter converts image data (digital electric signal) into an image signal (analog electric signal).

The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the display control circuit 205 temporarily sets image data such as decorative symbol image data, background image data, and effect image data indicating a decorative symbol (effect identification symbol) based on an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Is stored in the frame buffer.

Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The voice control circuit 206 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying a voice signal (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM based on the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

Then, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the read voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the read voice data to the AMP. Further, the AMP amplifies the voice signal and generates the voice from the speaker 11.

The lamp control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a lamp data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp lighting patterns are stored, and the like. The drive circuit selects one lamp lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the lamp data ROM based on the lamp lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

As a result, the effect display including the effect display of the lightning accessory 80, the logo accessory 210, and the door accessory 210 is performed.

The motor control circuit 60 drives the motors 60A to 60F based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201.

Then, the selected lamp lighting pattern is read from the lamp data ROM, the read voice data is converted into a predetermined lamp control signal, and the lamp 18 including the LEDs 59a to 59m and 59p, 59q and the like is turned on and off.

<Game flow>
Next, the contents of the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

Note that FIG. 42 is a diagram mainly showing a flow of an effect mode controlled by the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, FIG. 42 also shows a gaming state controlled (managed) by the main CPU 71 (main control circuit 70) as appropriate during the flow of the effect mode.

Further, FIG. 43 is an effect mode transition table summarizing the contents of the effect mode transition types [1] to [5] (transition form at the end of the big hit game).

The effect mode transition table of FIG. 43 shows the types (types) of "big hits" defined for each game state of the effect mode before the transition, the effect mode transition types [1] to [5], and the liquid crystal showing them. It is a table showing the relationship with the pattern alignment. In addition, the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43 also shows the winning probability, the number of round games to be given, and the number of time-saving games (number of time-saving) that can be performed at the transition destination for each type of "big hit".

In addition, the "liquid crystal symbol alignment stitch" referred to in this specification is an alignment mode of decorative symbols composed of three numbers and / or characters displayed in the display area 13a.

Further, here, the liquid crystal pattern alignment in which the three numbers and / or the characters do not have regularity (even number alignment, odd number alignment, same number (character) alignment, etc.) is referred to as "separate stitch".

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the effect modes managed and transition-controlled by the sub CPU 201 are "normal mode", "mode A", "mode B", "mode C" and "mode D". There are five types.

Then, in each effect mode, the gaming state controlled (managed) by the main CPU 71 (main control circuit 70) also changes.

[Type of game state]
First, before explaining the contents of various effect modes controlled by the sub CPU 201, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 will be described.

In the present embodiment, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 include a "big hit gaming state" (special gaming state) and a "small hit gaming state" (specific gaming states) in which the expectations of prize balls are different from each other. ).

The "big hit game state" is a game in which a round game occurs in which the shutter opening period (that is, the period of one round) of the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54 is long (30 seconds in the present embodiment). It is a state, and it is a game state in which a player can expect a big prize ball. That is, in the "big hit game state", the repeated mode of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the big winning opening becomes advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, the "small hit game state" is a game state in which a round game occurs in which the period of one round is shorter (1.8 seconds in this embodiment) than in the "big hit game state", which is a big prize for the player. It is a game state in which the ball cannot be expected. That is, in the "small hit game state", the repeated mode of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the big winning opening is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71, "probability changing gaming states" (high probability gaming states) and "normal gaming states" (high probability gaming states) in which the winning probabilities of "big hits" are different from each other. There is a low probability game state).

The "probability variation game state" is a game state in which the winning probability of the "big hit" (1 / 131.86 in the present embodiment) is high. On the other hand, the "normal game state" is a game state in which the winning probability of the "big hit" (1 / 392.43 in the present embodiment) is lower than that in the "probability variation game state".

In the present embodiment, after the "big hit game" is completed, the "probability change game state" is always started. Then, the "probability variation game state" is maintained from the end of the "big hit game" until a predetermined number of lottery (variation display of special symbols) up to 200 times is performed.

On the other hand, when the "small hit game" is completed, basically, the game state does not shift and the game state at the time of winning the "small hit" is maintained. That is, if the game state at the time of winning the "small hit" is the "probability changing game state", the game state is maintained at the "probability changing game state" even after the end of the "small hit game", and the game at the time of winning the "small hit". If the state is the "normal game state", the game state is maintained in the "normal game state" even after the end of the "small hit game".

However, in the present embodiment, for example, when the "small hit" is won in the final variation display (for example, the 200th variation display described later) of the "probability variation game state" (or "time saving game state"), the next time. In the variable display, the game state is changed from the "probability variable game state" to the "normal game state" (or from the "time-saving game state" to the "non-time-saving game state"). That is, in such a case, as an exception, the game state shifts before and after the "small hit game".

Further, in the present embodiment, as the type of the gaming state controlled and managed by the main CPU 71, the "time saving gaming state" (probability that the normal symbol is in the "hit" mode) is different from each other. There are high-winning gaming states) and "non-time-saving gaming states" (low-winning gaming states).

The "time saving game state" referred to in the present specification is a game state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is high. That is, the "time saving game state" is a game state in which the ordinary electric accessory 46 (blade member) provided in the second start port 45 is likely to be in an open state (a game state in which a second start port winning is likely to occur). , It is an advantageous gaming state for the player. The "time saving game state" ends when the "big hit" is determined, or when the variable display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of time saving times described later is executed.

On the other hand, the "non-time saving (no time saving) gaming state" is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is lower than that of the "time saving gaming state". Therefore, the "non-time saving game state" is a game state in which the normal electric accessory 46 (blade member) is unlikely to be in the open state (a game state in which the second start opening winning is unlikely to occur), which is disadvantageous to the player. It is in a state.

Then, in the present embodiment, the combination of the above-mentioned gaming states other than the "big hit gaming state" and the "small hit gaming state" changes according to the effect mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the gaming state in which the "probability variation gaming state" and the "time saving game state" occur at the same time (the state of "high probability time saving" in FIG. 60) is determined according to the effect mode. Provided.

Further, depending on the effect mode, a game state (a state of "high probability no time reduction" in FIG. 60) in which a "probability variation game state" and a "non-time reduction game state" occur at the same time is provided. Further, a gaming state (a state of "low probability no time saving" in FIG. 60) in which a "non-time saving game state" and a "normal game state" occur at the same time is provided according to the effect mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state (the state of "low probability time reduction") in which the "normal game state" and the "time reduction game state" occur at the same time is not provided. In addition, in a gaming state in which a "probability changing gaming state" and a "non-time saving gaming state" occur at the same time (a state of "high probability no time saving"), the player determines whether or not the gaming state is the "probability changing gaming state". Since it is difficult to distinguish, such a gaming state is also referred to as a "latent game state" here.

The transition operation between the various gaming states described above is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means (first game state control means, second game state control means, third game state control means) for controlling the transition operation between various game states.

[Normal mode]
The normal mode is, for example, an effect mode set at the start of the game.
In the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 42, the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 71 is "no low probability time saving"("normal game state" and "non-time saving gaming state") or "high probability no time saving". (A state of "probability variation game state" and "non-time saving game state").

When the "big hit" is won in the normal mode, the big hit game is performed as shown in FIG. 42, and after the big hit game is completed, the effect mode shifts to any of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode D. ..

At this time, the game state at the time of winning the big hit and the type of "big hit" ("hit 1" to "hit 17" and the first of the first special symbols (special figure 1) in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43). 2 The production mode of the transition destination differs depending on which of the special symbols "per 1").

Further, in the normal mode, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "high probability no time reduction", the effect mode does not shift to the mode A as shown in FIG. 43 (the effect mode of the transition type [4]). No migration will occur).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode, the gaming state at the time of winning a big hit is "low probability no time reduction" and the type of "big hit" is "hit 15" to "hit" in FIG. In the case of any of 17 ”, that is, in the normal mode, the“ loose stitch ”corresponding to the transition type [4] as the liquid crystal symbol alignment stitch (“low probability time reduction no time” column in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43). (See) is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13, the effect mode shifts to the mode A after the jackpot game ends.

Further, for example, in the normal mode, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "low probability no time reduction" and the type of "big hit" is any of "hit 8" to "hit 14" in FIG. Or, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "high probability no time reduction" and the type of "big hit" is "hit 14" in Special Figure 1, that is, in the normal mode, the transition type [ 3] When the "even number alignment" (see the "low probability no time reduction" and "high probability no time reduction" columns in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43) is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13. After the jackpot game is over, the production mode shifts to mode B.

Further, for example, in the normal mode, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "low probability no time reduction" and the type of "big hit" is any of "hit 3" to "hit 7" in FIG. Alternatively, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "high probability no time reduction", and the type of "big hit" is any one of "hit 3" to "hit 7" and "hit 9" to "hit 13" in Special Figure 1. That is, in the normal mode, "odd number alignment" or "even number alignment" corresponding to the transition type [2] as the liquid crystal symbol alignment ("low probability no time reduction time" in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43 and When "when there is no high probability time reduction" column) is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13, the effect mode shifts to the mode C after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, for example, in the normal mode, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "no low probability time reduction" and the type of "big hit" is "hit 1" or "hit 2" in the special figure 1, at the time of winning the big hit. When the game state of is "low probability no time reduction" and the type of "big hit" is "hit 1" in Special Figure 2, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "high probability no time reduction" and "big hit". When the type is any of "1 hit", "2 hits", "8 hits" and "15 hits" to "17 hits" in Special Figure 1, or the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "high probability". When there is no time reduction and the type of "big hit" is "hit 1" in Special Figure 2, that is, in the normal mode, the "blank eyes" and "VVV" corresponding to the transition type [1] as the liquid crystal pattern alignment. "Alignment", "odd number alignment", "even number alignment" or "777 alignment" (see the "low probability no time reduction" and "high probability no time reduction" columns in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43) are displayed on the display device 13. When it is displayed in the display area 13a, the effect mode shifts to mode D after the jackpot game is completed.

In the present embodiment, after the big hit game is completed, the game state always shifts to the "probability change game state".

Therefore, when the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to any of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode D via the jackpot game, the shift is made regardless of the game state of the normal mode at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state in the previous production mode becomes the "probability change game state", and the "probability change game state" is maintained from the end of the "big hit game" until a predetermined number of lottery up to 200 times is performed. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, even when the "small hit" is won in the normal mode and the small hit game is subsequently digested, the effect mode shifts to the mode A. In this case, the transition modes include a mode in which the effect mode shifts to mode A immediately after the end of the small hit game (a form in which the mode directly shifts from the small hit game state), and a predetermined mode in which the mode returns to the normal mode again after the small hit game ends. There is a mode in which the effect mode shifts to mode A after the variable display of the number of special symbols is performed (a mode in which the mode is indirectly shifted from the small hit game state).

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the game state does not shift before and after the start and end of the small hit game. Therefore, at the time of winning a small hit, the game state does not shift regardless of the mode A transition mode. That is, when shifting from the normal mode to mode A via the small hit game state, if the game state at the time of winning the small hit in the normal mode is "no low probability time reduction", even in mode A after the transition, " The game state of "low probability no time reduction" is continued. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning a small hit in the normal mode is "no high probability time reduction", the gaming state of "no high probability time reduction" is continued even in mode A after the transition.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal symbol alignments displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13 at the time of winning the small hit are defined as "separate stitches", and the liquid crystal symbol alignments displayed at the time of winning the small hit are at the time of winning the big hit. It is set so as not to be distinguished from the displayed liquid crystal pattern alignment.

In particular, by making it impossible to distinguish between "small hit" and "big hit" when "high probability no time reduction", when "small hit" is won in "normal game state", "low probability no time reduction" It is possible to make it impossible for the player to distinguish at first glance whether the gaming state of "" is maintained or whether the gaming state shifts to "high probability no time reduction". As a result, in the present embodiment, the playability can be further improved.

Also, in the normal mode, when the special symbol variation display is performed 200 times during the game state of "high probability no time reduction", but the "big hit" is not won (when the "probability change game state" ends). However, the production mode does not shift, but the game state shifts from "high probability no time reduction" to "low probability no time reduction".

[Mode A]
In mode A, the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 71 is "no low probability time reduction"("normal game state" and "non-time reduction game state") or "high probability no time reduction"("probability variation game state"). And it is a state of "non-time saving game state"). When the production mode shifts from the normal mode to the mode A via the small hit game, the game state of the mode A is the game state of the normal mode (“no low probability time reduction” or “high probability time reduction”). Will be continued. Further, when the effect mode shifts to the mode A via the big hit game, the game state of the mode A becomes "high probability no time reduction".

In the mode A game, the mode A end lottery (fall lottery to the normal mode) and the promotion lottery to the mode B are performed. These lottery may be performed for each variation display of the special symbol once, or for each variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (two or more times). The promotion lottery to mode B is performed only when the game state of mode A is "high probability no time reduction".

When the "big hit" is won in the mode A, the big hit game is performed as shown in FIG. 42, and after the big hit game is completed, the effect mode shifts to any of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode D. ..

At this time, the game state at the time of winning the big hit and the type of "big hit" ("hit 1" to "hit 17" and the first of the first special symbols (special figure 1) in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43). 2 The effect mode of the transition destination differs depending on (one of "hits 1" of the special symbol), and the transition mode is the transition mode to mode A, mode B, mode C or mode D in the above-mentioned normal mode (). This is the same as the migration types [1] to [4]).

In mode A, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "no high probability time reduction", the production mode does not shift to mode A as shown in FIG. 43 (the production mode of the transition type [4]). No migration will occur). That is, in mode A, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "no high probability time reduction", mode A is not continued after the big hit game ends, and the effect modes are mode B, mode C, and mode D. Move to either.

Further, in the mode A, when the game state is "no high probability time reduction" and the promotion lottery to the mode B is won, the effect mode shifts to the mode B as shown in FIG. 42.

Further, in the mode A, the effect mode shifts to the mode B even when the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times of variable display of the special symbol, which is the transition condition at this time, is selected within the range of 0 to 199 times by lottery. In the lottery process for a predetermined number of times of variable display of the special symbol, which is the transition condition, for example, a case where a number exceeding 200 times is selected as the predetermined number of times is set, and depending on the lottery result, the effect mode is mode B. A case may be provided so as not to shift to.

Further, in mode A, when the game state is "high probability no time reduction" and the special symbol variation display (ST: Special Time) is performed 200 times, but the "big hit" is not won (ST 200 times). At the end), as shown in FIG. 42, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.

Further, in mode A, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode even when the end lottery of mode A is won regardless of the game state. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the game state of the mode A is "no high probability time reduction", when the end lottery of the mode A is won, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.

[Mode B]
In the mode B, the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 71 is “no high probability time saving” (a state of “probability variation gaming state” and “non-time saving gaming state”). That is, the gaming state of mode B is the "latent gaming state". Even in mode B, the "probability variation game state" is maintained from the end of the "big hit game" until a predetermined number of lottery is performed up to 200 times.

When the "big hit" is won in the mode B, the big hit game is performed as shown in FIG. 42, and after the big hit game is completed, the effect mode shifts to any of the mode B, the mode C, and the mode D. At this time, the transition destination of the production mode differs depending on the type of "big hit".

For example, in mode B (“high probability no time reduction”), when the type of “big hit” is “hit 14” in special figure 1, that is, in mode B, it corresponds to the transition type [3] as the liquid crystal symbol alignment. When the "even number alignment" (see the "high probability time reduction no time" column in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43) is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13, the effect mode is set to the mode after the big hit game is completed. Transition to B (mode B continues).

Further, for example, in mode B, when the type of "big hit" is any of "hit 3" to "hit 7" and "hit 9" to "hit 13" in FIG. 1, that is, in mode B, As the liquid crystal pattern alignment, the "odd number alignment" or "even number alignment" corresponding to the transition type [2] (see the "high probability time reduction no time" column in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43) is the display area 13a of the display device 13. When is displayed, the effect mode shifts to mode C after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, for example, in mode B, when the type of "big hit" is any of "hit 1", "hit 2", "hit 8" and "hit 15" to "hit 17" in FIG. , When the type of "big hit" is "hit 1" in Special Figure 2, that is, in mode B, "blank eyes", "VVV matching", and "odd number" corresponding to the transition type [1] as the liquid crystal symbol matching stitches. When "matching", "even matching" or "777 matching" (see the "high probability time reduction no time" column in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43) is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13, the jackpot game After the end, the effect mode shifts to mode D.

Further, in mode B, the variation display of the special symbol is performed 200 times, but when the "big hit" is not won, that is, when the "probability variation game state" (high probability state) ends, FIG. 42 As shown in, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.

[Mode C]
In mode C, the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 71 becomes the "probability changing gaming state". Therefore, even in the mode C, the "probability variation game state" is maintained from the end of the "big hit game" until a predetermined number of lottery up to 200 times is performed.

Further, in the mode C, the time saving game is carried out in the range of 40 to 200 times depending on the type of the "big hit" that triggered the transition to the mode C (see FIG. 43). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, when the effect mode shifts to mode C, the shift type is type [2], and in this case, the number of time reductions depends on the type of "big hit". Then, it becomes one of "40", "60", "80", "100" and "200" (see the effect mode transition table in FIG. 43). That is, in mode C, depending on the type of "big hit", the game state is "high probability time saving" ("probability variation game state" and "time saving game state") in the range of 40 to 200 times. Become.

In mode C, when the selected predetermined number of time reductions is less than 200 times, when the game of mode C is started, first, the game is performed in the gaming state of "high probability time reduction" for the predetermined number of time reductions. Will be.

Then, when the selected predetermined number of times of time reduction is completed, that is, when the "time reduction game state" is completed, the game state is "high probability no time reduction" ("probability variation game state" and "non-time reduction game state". State). In this case, the gaming state is substantially the same as the gaming state in mode B. Therefore, when the "short-time gaming state" ends in mode C, the effect mode shifts to mode B as shown in FIG. 42. At this time, in the transition destination mode B, the game is performed for the number of fluctuations (200-time reduction) of the special symbol remaining in the mode C.

Further, in mode C, if the time saving game can be performed 200 times and the variation display of the special symbol is performed 200 times but the "big hit" is not won, the "probability change game state" is obtained. And the "time saving game state" end at the same time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.

Further, when the "big hit" is won in the mode C, the effect mode shifts to the mode D after the big hit game is completed, as shown by the transition type [5] in FIG. 42. In addition, in the transition type [5], 200 times of time reduction are set at the end of the big hit game regardless of the type of "big hit" (see the "high probability time reduction time" column in the effect mode transition table of FIG. 43). ). Further, when the effect mode shifts to the mode D in the shift mode of the shift type [5], the type of the liquid crystal symbol alignment displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13 changes according to the type of "big hit". ..

Further, when the number of time reductions of 200 times is won based on the "big hit" type that triggers the transition to mode C, a promotion lottery to mode D is performed in the game of mode C. Then, when the promotion lottery to mode D is won, the production mode shifts to mode D as shown in FIG. 42. In this case, in the mode D of the transition destination, the games for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol remaining in the mode C (the number of time-saving games digested at the time of 200-promotion lottery) are played in the game state of "high probability time-saving".

[Mode D]
In the mode D, the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 71 is “high probability time saving” (“probability variation gaming state” and “time saving gaming state”). Then, when the production mode shifts to the mode D via the "big hit game", in the mode D, both the "probability variation game state" and the "time saving game state" are both after the "big hit game" is completed. It is maintained until a predetermined number of lottery (variation display of special symbols) is performed up to 200 times.

If the "big hit" is won in the mode D, the mode D is continued after the big hit game is completed, as shown by the transition type [5] in FIG. 42. At this time, at the end of the big hit game, the number of lottery times (the number of changes in the special symbol) of 200 times is set again, and the number of time reductions of 200 times is also set.

Then, in mode D, the variation display (ST) of the special symbol is performed 200 times, but when the "big hit" is not won, that is, when the "probability variation game state" ends, it is shown in FIG. 42. As such, the production mode shifts to the normal mode.

In the transition mode at the time of winning the jackpot in each production mode of the present embodiment, as described above, the transition mode is shifted after the jackpot game ends. At this time, for example, at the start of the jackpot game, during the jackpot game. Alternatively, at the end of the big hit game, the display device 13 or the like may notify that the effect mode will be changed. Further, in this case, the type of the effect mode of the transition destination may be notified.

<Production operation in each production mode>
Next, in each effect mode, an outline of various effect operations performed by using the display device 13 under the control of the sub CPU 71 will be described. More specific processing contents of various production operations will be described later with reference to various flowcharts described later.

[Normal pseudo-continuous production: common to all production modes]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of pseudo continuous speed fluctuation display effect that makes it appear as if the fluctuation display of the special symbol is repeated a plurality of times during the fluctuation display period of one special symbol. In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect described later is not performed, a general pseudo-continuous speed fluctuation display effect (hereinafter, referred to as "normal pseudo-continuous effect") is used regardless of the type of effect mode. I do.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is referred to the variation effect pattern table when there is no look-ahead effect described later (see FIG. 64 described later), and is drawn by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. It is determined. Further, whether or not the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed is controlled by the value of the pseudo-continuous effect flag defined in the variable effect table (no look-ahead) shown in FIG. 64, which will be described later, and the value of the pseudo-continuous effect flag is "1". If is, a normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

FIG. 44 shows an operation example of a normal pseudo-continuous production performed in the present embodiment. In the normal pseudo-continuous production of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, a liquid crystal symbol alignment stitch composed of three decorative symbols (numbers and / or characters) displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13 is formed. It is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the effect pattern of the normal pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 44 is an effect pattern such as, for example, the effect pattern “EN02” defined in the variable effect table (no look-ahead) shown in FIG. 64 described later.

In the normal pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 44 (effect pattern "EN02" or the like), first, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the display area 13a of the display device 13 is stopped and displayed before the variation display is started. The set of liquid crystal symbols (“234”) fluctuates. Next, in the display area 13a of the display device 13, after the liquid crystal symbol alignment fluctuates for a predetermined period, the liquid crystal symbol alignment (“117”) is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment, each symbol does not stop completely and is in a state of swinging along the fluctuation direction. Then, after the temporary stop, the liquid crystal symbol alignment changes again, and after the remaining period of one special symbol variation display period elapses (at the end of the special symbol variation), the predetermined liquid crystal symbol alignment ("147"). ”) Completely stops (this stop display).

In the normal pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 44, as described above, the temporary stop display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment is performed once in one special symbol variation display period (variation time of the special symbol variation pattern). In the present specification, the number of times of temporary stop display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment (the number of repetitions of the variation display and the temporary stop display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment) performed in one special symbol variation display period is referred to as "pseudo-ream count". .. Therefore, the number of pseudo-reams in the normal pseudo-ream effect shown in FIG. 44 is one.

Further, in the present specification, the effect from the start of fluctuation of the liquid crystal symbol alignment to the temporary stop display (hereinafter, also referred to as a sub-effect) is referred to as a "pseudo-continuous effect", and the present invention is performed after the temporary stop display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment. The sub-effect performed during the period until the stop display is called "reach effect". Therefore, for example, the normal pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 44 is an production composed of one “pseudo-continuous production” and a “reach production”.

In the present embodiment, the effect period of various effects performed in one special symbol variation display period is the variation time (1) of the corresponding special symbol variation pattern regardless of the type and content (pattern) of the effect. It is almost the same as the variable display period of the special symbol of the time). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect period may be different from the variation time of the variation pattern of the corresponding special symbol (a period shorter than the variation time) according to the content (pattern) of the effect.

[Stock pseudo-continuous production: Production in normal mode]
In the present embodiment, a special effect stage is provided in the normal mode. Then, on the special production stage, a pseudo continuous fluctuation display production called "stock pseudo continuous production" is performed.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the stock pseudo-continuous effect is determined by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special pattern with reference to the variation effect pattern table for the special effect stage described later (see FIG. 69 described later). Will be done. Further, whether or not the stock pseudo-ream effect is executed is controlled by the value of the stock pseudo-ream effect flag defined in the variable effect table (special effect stage) shown in FIG. 69, which will be described later, and the value of the stock pseudo-ream effect flag is ". If it is "1", the stock pseudo-continuous production is executed.

(1) Configuration of stock pseudo-continuous production The stock pseudo-continuous production is performed before the predetermined number of "pseudo-continuous production", "pseudo-continuous production", "reach production", and "pseudo-continuous production". It is composed of "stock production" (pseudo continuous production).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 45a and 45b, the flow of the stock pseudo-continuous production will be described more specifically. 45a and 45b are diagrams for clarifying the difference between the above-mentioned normal pseudo-continuous effect and the stock pseudo-continuous effect, and FIG. A shows an operation flow of the above-mentioned normal pseudo-continuous effect. , FIG. 45b shows the operation flow of the stock pseudo-continuous production.

Since the "reach effect" performed by the normal pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 45a is the same as the "reach effect" performed by the stock pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 45b, in FIGS. 45a and 45b, "reach effect" is performed from the start of fluctuation. The operation flow of the sub-effect until the start of "reach production" is shown.

The normal pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 45a is an example of a normal pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the effect pattern “EN54” defined in the variable effect table (no look-ahead) shown in FIG. 64, which will be described later. Specifically, in the normal pseudo-ream effect shown in FIG. 45a, the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol is 45,000 milliseconds, the number of pseudo-reams is 3, and the liquid crystal symbol alignment is 3 During the period from the first temporary stop (33000 ms after the start of fluctuation) to the stop of fluctuation (12000 ms), a "reach effect" called "special effect D" is performed.

Further, during the period from the start of the fluctuation to 33000 milliseconds, the same operation as the movement display and the temporary stop display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment described in FIG. 44 is repeated three times, and the first, second, and third operations are repeated. The second "pseudo-continuous production" is performed for a period of 10000 ms, 11000 ms, and 12000 ms, respectively.

The stock pseudo-ream effect shown in FIG. 45b is an example of the stock pseudo-ream effect corresponding to the effect pattern “EG54” defined in the variable effect table (special effect stage) shown in FIG. 69, which will be described later, and is a pseudo-ream. This is a stock pseudo-continuous production when the number of times is 14. In this stock pseudo-continuous production, as shown in FIG. 45b, after the start of fluctuation, first, "stock production" is performed, and then 14 times of "pseudo-continuous production" ("pseudo 1" to "pseudo 14") are performed. Will be done. Then, after the 14th "pseudo-continuous production", a rush effect ("pseudo 15") into the "reach effect" is performed.

Then, after the rush effect ("pseudo 15") into the "reach effect", an effect called "special effect D" is performed. Therefore, in the stock pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 45b, a series of productions from the rush production to the "reach production" ("pseudo 15") to the "special production D" is substantially the "reach production".

Further, in the operation example of the stock pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 45b, the period from the start of the "stock production" to the end of the second "pseudo-continuous production" ("pseudo 2") is 10,000 milliseconds, which is the third time. The period from the start of the "pseudo-continuous production" ("pseudo 3") to the end of the 7th "pseudo-continuous production" ("pseudo 7") is 11000 milliseconds, and the 8th "pseudo-continuous production" ("pseudo-continuous production"). The period of each sub-effect is set so that the period from the start of the "pseudo 8") to the end of the rush effect ("pseudo 15") into the "reach effect" is 12000 milliseconds. The present invention is not limited to this, and the period of each sub-effect is appropriately changed according to, for example, a variable display period of one special symbol, the number of "pseudo-continuous effects", and the like.

(2) Contents of "stock production" Next, the contents of "stock production" performed at the start of the stock pseudo-continuous production will be described. In the "stock effect" of the present embodiment, an effect is performed in which three types of mascots (mascots A to C) appear in the display area 13a of the display device 13.

Mascot points "1" and "5" are given to the mascots A and B, respectively, and each time the production in which the mascots A or B appear (the second pseudo-consecutive production) is executed in the "stock production". The mascot points (conditions indicating whether or not the first pseudo-sequential effect is executed) corresponding to are added (updated). Then, when the mascot point becomes "5" or more (predetermined condition) during the "stock effect" period, the mascot C appears in the display area 13a of the display device 13 (first pseudo-continuous effect). In the present embodiment, when the mascot C appears in the "stock production", the "pseudo continuous production" is always performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of "pseudo-ream effects" performed when the mascot C appears (the number of pseudo-reams) is set to a value equal to or greater than the number of appearances of the mascot C, and the value is set in the figure described later. It is determined by a lottery process using the pseudo-ream number determination table shown in 70. In this embodiment, as shown in the pseudo-ream number determination table shown in FIG. 70, which will be described later, the variation occurs even when the mascot C does not appear (when the number of mascots C appearing is “0”). Depending on the type of pattern, "pseudo-continuous production" may be performed.

In the present embodiment, when the mascot C appears during the variable display of the liquid crystal symbol alignment in the "stock effect", a predetermined reach symbol is displayed as the liquid crystal symbol alignment as shown in FIG. 45b. After that, the mascot C is directed to destroy the reach pattern. Then, after that, the first "pseudo-continuous production" ("pseudo 1") is started.

(3) Contents of rushing effect into "pseudo-continuous effect" and "reach effect" In each "pseudo-continuous effect", the liquid crystal symbols are aligned in the display area 13a of the display device 13 as in the above-mentioned normal pseudo-continuous effect. The operation of variable display and temporary stop display is performed.

At this time, in the present embodiment, in the display area 13a of the display device 13, the mascot C attacks and destroys each symbol of the changing liquid crystal symbol alignment, thereby temporarily stopping each symbol. Production is performed.

Further, in the rush effect to the "reach effect" ("pseudo 15"), an effect of stopping a predetermined reach symbol is performed. Specifically, in the rush effect to the "reach effect" ("pseudo 15"), an effect of stopping the reach symbol on the left and right symbols of the liquid crystal symbol alignment (the middle symbol is changing) is performed.

(4) Operation example of stock pseudo-continuous production 1
Next, an operation example 1 (an operation example in which the "pseudo-continuous production" is executed) of the stock pseudo-continuous production in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

Note that FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an operation flow of operation example 1 of the stock pseudo-continuous production. Further, in the operation example 1 of the stock pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 46, for example, the number of appearances of the mascots A, B, and C in the “stock production” is set to “4” by the mascot appearance number determination table shown in FIG. , "2" and "2" are operation examples of the stock pseudo-continuous production.

In the operation example 1 shown in FIG. 46, the “stock effect” is first started after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. In this "stock effect", first, four mascots A appear in succession in the display area 13a of the display device 13. At this time, "1" is added to the mascot points for each appearance of the mascot A, and when four mascots A appear, the total of the mascot points becomes "4" points.

Next, one mascot B appears. As a result, "5" points are added to the mascot points, and the total of the mascot points is "9" points. That is, with the appearance of the mascot B, the mascot points become "5" points or more. As a result, one mascot C appears next. And this clears the mascot point.

After that, one mascot B appears again. As a result, "5" points are added to the mascot points, and the total of the mascot points becomes "5" points. As a result, the second mascot C then appears. Then, the mascot points are cleared and the "stock production" ends.

Next, a predetermined number of "pseudo-continuous productions" corresponding to the number of appearances of the mascot C are repeated. Specifically, first, the variable display of the liquid crystal pattern alignment is performed. Next, the effect of attacking the changing symbol with the mascot C is performed. Then, after the symbol is destroyed, the liquid crystal symbol alignment is temporarily stopped. After that, this one-series effect operation (“pseudo-series effect”) is repeated a predetermined number of times. That is, in the present embodiment, the "pseudo-continuous production" continues while the mascot C appears.

Then, after the predetermined number of "pseudo-continuous effects" are completed, the "special effects A" to "special effects A" to "special effects A" specified in the predetermined "special reach effects" (for example, the variable display table (special effect stage) of FIG. If it is decided to perform "special effect D", etc.), an effect of stopping the reach symbol on the left and right symbols of the liquid crystal symbol alignment (rush effect to "reach effect") is performed, and then a predetermined effect is performed. "Special reach production" is performed. Then, when the predetermined "special reach production" is completed, the stock pseudo-continuous production is also completed.

On the other hand, when the predetermined "special reach effect" is not performed after the predetermined number of "pseudo-continuous effects" are completed, the effect that the mascot C disappears in the display area 13a of the display device 13 is first performed. Then, after the reach symbol is stopped at the left symbol and the right symbol of the symbol alignment, the effect that the lost symbol is stopped immediately at the middle symbol is performed, and the stock pseudo-continuous production is completed.

(5) Operation example of stock pseudo-continuous production 2
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, operation example 2 of the stock pseudo-continuous effect (operation example in which the “pseudo-continuous effect” is not executed) in the present embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an operation flow of the operation example 2 of the stock pseudo-continuous production. Further, in the operation example 2 of the stock pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 47, for example, the number of appearances of the mascots A, B, and C in the “stock production” is set to “4” by the mascot appearance number determination table shown in FIG. , "0" and "0" are operation examples of the stock pseudo-continuous production.

In the operation example 2 shown in FIG. 47, four mascots A appear consecutively in the display area 13a of the display device 13 after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the “stock effect” ends. In this case, "1" is added to the mascot points for each appearance of mascot A, but the total of mascot points at the time when four mascots A appear is "4" points (less than "5" points). Since there is, mascot C does not appear. Therefore, in the operation example 2 shown in FIG. 47, the stock pseudo continuous effect ends at the same time as the end of the “stock effect”.

(6) Flow of determining the content of the stock pseudo-ream effect Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a processing procedure for determining the content of the above-mentioned stock pseudo-ream effect (number of appearances of each mascot, number of pseudo-ream, etc.) The outline of is explained. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flow of determining the contents of the stock pseudo-continuous production. The process of determining the content of the stock pseudo-continuous production is performed by the sub CPU 201.

In the present embodiment, first, the production content of the "reach production" is determined. Specifically, referring to the variable effect table (special effect stage) shown in FIG. 69, which will be described later, the effect content of the "reach effect" (including the presence or absence of the "reach effect") is drawn by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. To decide.

Next, the number of repetitions of the "pseudo-ream effect" (pseudo-ream number) is determined. Specifically, the number of pseudo-reams is determined by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the pseudo-ream number determination table shown in FIG. 70, which will be described later. At this time, the number of pseudo-reams is selected so that the "pseudo-ream effect" is within the time obtained by subtracting the time required for the "reach effect" from the fluctuation time of one special symbol.

Next, the number of appearances of the mascot C in the "stock production" is determined. Specifically, the number of appearances of the mascot C is determined by referring to the pseudo-ream number determination table shown in FIG. 70, which will be described later. At this time, in the present embodiment, the correspondence between the number of appearances of the mascot C and the number of pseudo-reams is appropriately set so that the number of pseudo-reams is equal to or greater than the number of appearances of the mascot C.

Next, the number of appearances of mascots A and B is determined. Specifically, the number of appearances of mascot A and the number of appearances of mascot B are determined based on the determined number of appearances of mascot C with reference to the mascot appearance number determination table shown in FIG. 71, which will be described later. Then, when the number of appearances of the mascots A and B is determined, the process of determining the content of the stock pseudo-continuous production is completed, and then the variable display of the special symbol is started.

As described above, in the stock pseudo-continuous production in the special production stage of the normal mode of the present embodiment, the number of executions of the "pseudo-continuous production" (pseudo-continuous production) is set to a predetermined number equal to or greater than the number of appearances of the mascot C. To. Therefore, the player can grasp at least how many times the "pseudo-continuous production" is executed based on the number of mascots C appearing in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the pseudo-continuously variable display effect without impairing the playability of the pseudo-continuously variable display effect.

In addition, considering the general playability of the pseudo-continuous variation display effect that the higher the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the minimum of the "pseudo-ream effect" as in the stock pseudo-ream effect of the present embodiment. By notifying the information regarding the number of executions, it is possible to give the player a sense of security for the pseudo continuous fluctuation display effect. Therefore, in the stock pseudo-continuous production of the present embodiment, the player's interest in the pseudo-continuous variation display production can be further improved. In this embodiment, the stock pseudo-continuous production is more easily selected at the time of "big hit" than at the time of "loss" (see the variable production table (special production stage) in FIG. 69 described later). ..

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which all the mascot points are cleared when the mascot C appears has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a part of the mascot points may be cleared may be used. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 46, the total number of mascot points is "9", and when the first mascot C appears, the minimum number of mascot points, which is the condition for the appearance of mascot C, is calculated from the total number of current mascot points. Only the value (“5” points) may be subtracted from the total number of mascot points, leaving the “4” points of mascot points uncleared. In this case, since the player's expectation for the appearance of the mascot C can be further increased, the player's interest in the appearance production (stock production) of the mascot C and the subsequent "pseudo-continuous production" is further enhanced. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper limit of the points that can be added in one mascot point addition process is "5" points when the mascot B appears (the minimum value of the mascot points, which is the appearance condition of the mascot C). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect may be provided in which points larger than "5" points are added in one mascot point addition process. Further, in this case, when the mascot C appears, only a part of the mascot points may be cleared as described above, or all the mascot points may be cleared as in the above embodiment. The combination form of such mascot point addition processing and clearing processing can be appropriately set.

[Hidden Expectation Notification Production (Rank Production): Production in Mode A]
As described with reference to FIG. 43, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the "small hit" is won in the normal mode and the mode A is entered, the normal mode before the "small hit" is won. When the gaming state of is "probability changing gaming state"("high probability no time reduction"), the gaming state is maintained even after the transition to mode A, and the gaming state is also "latent gaming state"("latent gaming state"("" High probability no time reduction ").

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the production mode shifts to mode B via mode A not only when the "big hit" is won in the normal mode but also when the "small hit" is won. There is. Specifically, in mode A, when the game state is "latent game state" ("high probability no time reduction") and the promotion lottery to mode B is won, the production mode is set to mode B. Transition. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the "small hit" is won in the normal mode and the mode A is entered, the gaming state of the mode A is the "latent gaming state" ("high probability no time reduction"). If this is the case, the effect mode may shift to mode B and the latent probability number notification effect described later may be performed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the mode A, the display device 13 displays the expectation degree (hereinafter, referred to as "latent probability expectation degree") in which the gaming state is the "latent probability gaming state" ("high probability no time reduction"). The latent probability expectation notification effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “rank effect”) displayed (notified) in the area 13a is performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 49, the contents of the rank effect (latent expectation level notification effect) performed in the mode A will be specifically described. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 49 also describes not only the outline of the rank effect performed in the mode A but also the outline of the latent probability number notification effect described later in the mode B.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the latent expectation degree in the mode A is divided into three stages. Specifically, as the stage showing the latent expectation, the stage 1 in which the latent expectation is "low", the stage 2 in which the latent expectation is "medium", and the latent expectation are "high". A stage 3 is provided. Then, in the rank production in the mode A, when the latent expectation level rises to a higher stage, the information indicating that the latent probability expectation level has increased is notified (“stage transition effect” is performed).

In addition, the state of the stage 3 is a state in which the gaming state is the "latent gaming state" ("high probability no time reduction") and it is easy to win the transition lottery to the mode B, and the transition to the mode B in the stage 3 If the lottery is won, the transition effect to mode B is performed. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned stage transition effect and mode B transition effect are referred to as "rank-up effect".

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 43, in the present embodiment, the mode A end lottery is performed in the mode A. Then, when the end lottery of the mode A is won, the information to the effect that the mode A ends is notified in the rank effect (the "end effect" is performed).

In the rank production (latent expectation notification production), the selection of the production type of "rank up production" and "end production" refers to the rank production table (not shown), for example, the current game state, the current stage, and promotion. It is selected based on conditions such as the result of the lottery or the end lottery. In the present embodiment, an example of performing "rank-up effect" or "end effect" as the rank effect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the rank effect, for example, an effect of lowering the rank or an effect peculiar to each stage may be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the latent expectation stage is divided into three stages has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent expectation stage is divided into two stages or four or more stages. May be good.

Further, in the rank effect of the present embodiment, the stage may be changed by one step or the stage may be changed by two steps in one special symbol variation display period. In the latter effect, the stage 1 may be changed to the stage 2 in one variation period, and then the stage 2 may be changed to the stage 3 in one variation period. You may perform an effect that the stage 1 directly changes to the stage 3. In addition, an effect of directly upgrading from stage 1 to mode B may be provided.

According to the above-mentioned latent probability expectation notification effect in mode A, the player has an impression that the gaming state may have shifted to the "latent gaming state" even after the small hit is won. Can be given. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interest in the small hit game can be enhanced by the latent probability expectation notification effect, and the interest in the game in the "latent game state" can also be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the small hit game, another player who does not know the end status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose game has ended while the latent probability expectation notification effect is being performed. When the player starts the game, the player suspects that the game state may be the "latent game state", and as a result, the player may be executed after the latent expectation notification effect, which will be described later. There is a possibility that the game will continue until the "indication of the number of latent times" is completed. In this case, the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased.

[Indication of latent number of times: Production in mode B]
As described with reference to FIG. 43, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the gaming state of mode B is the “latent gaming state”, whether or not the gaming state is the “probability changing gaming state” for the player. It is difficult to clearly determine whether or not. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the mode B, the latent probability number notification effect of displaying (notifying) the information regarding the execution number (ST) of the remaining special symbol variation display in the display area 13a of the display device 13 is performed.

Here, the content of the latent probability number notification effect will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 49. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the number of executions of the variation display of the remaining special symbols in mode B (hereinafter, referred to as “remaining latent probability number”) is divided into three stages. Specifically, as a stage indicating the number of remaining latent times, stage A having a remaining latent number of 200 to 120 times, stage B having a remaining latent number of 119 to 50 times, and 49 to 0 remaining latent times. Stage C, which is a time, is provided. Then, in the latent probability number notification effect in the mode B, a unique effect is performed in each stage, and the player is notified of the information regarding the current remaining latent number of times.

The range of the remaining latent number of times set in each of the stages A to C is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 49, and may be appropriately changed depending on, for example, a model or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the stage of the remaining latent number of times is divided into three stages has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stage of the remaining latent number of times is divided into two stages or four or more stages. May be good.

[Time saving number notification effect: Production in mode C]
As described with reference to FIG. 43, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of time-saving games (time-saving number of times) performed in mode C depends on the type of "big hit" that triggered the transition to mode C. Is different. Therefore, in mode C, it is difficult for the player to clearly determine the remaining number of time reductions.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the mode C, the time saving number notification effect of displaying (notifying) the information regarding the number of remaining time saving games (hereinafter, referred to as "remaining time saving number") in the display area 13a of the display device 13 is performed. Do.

In the time reduction number notification effect in mode C, the time reduction number is simply subtracted by "1" from the time reduction number at the start of mode C (initial value of the remaining time reduction number) in the display area 13a of the display device 13 for each execution of the time reduction game. Basically, such an effect (notification) is not performed (depending on the notification pattern of the number of time reductions, such a simple effect may be performed). In the present embodiment, the display area 13a of the display device 13 is notified of a provisional remaining time reduction number (hereinafter, referred to as “notification number”) equal to or less than the actual remaining time reduction number, and a predetermined number of notifications is subtracted. At the timing, an effect (“notice effect” and “continuous effect” described later) that temporarily increases the number of notifications is performed.

Here, the content of the time saving number of times notification effect will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 50. Note that FIG. 50 is an example of the time flow of the time saving number notification effect. In the example shown in FIG. 50, 200 time reduction times (initial value of the remaining time reduction number) are set at the end of the big hit game according to the type of "big hit" that triggers the transition to mode C, and then mode C is set. This is an example of the time flow of the time saving number notification effect when it is started.

In the time reduction number notification effect shown in FIG. 50, "60 times" is first set as the initial value of the notification number (provisional remaining time reduction number). As the initial value of the number of notifications (provisional number of remaining time reductions), the number of times equal to or less than the actual number of remaining time reductions (“200 times”) is set.

After that, 40 times of time saving games (variation display of special symbols) are digested, and when the number of notifications reaches "20 times" (the actual number of remaining time reductions is "160 times"), in the variation display of special symbols, " The number of notifications of "100 times" is added to the number of notifications. At this time, the number of additional notifications is set to be less than or equal to the actual number of remaining time reductions (“160 times”). Then, in the present embodiment, the information that the time reduction number (notification number) is added to the display area 13a of the display device 13 by "100 times" is added to the display area 13a of the display device 13 in the change period of the special symbol at the time when the notification number is added. A predetermined effect to be notified (hereinafter referred to as "notice effect") is performed.

Here, FIGS. 51 and 52 show an example of the advance notice effect. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flow of the advance notice effect, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing one aspect of the advance notice effect (liquid crystal symbol alignment) displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13. In the operation indicated by the reference numerals "A" to "E" shown in FIG. 52, the display mode of the liquid crystal symbol alignments displayed in the display area 13a is changed to the display modes A to E of the liquid crystal symbol alignments in FIG. 53. Correspond.

In the advance notice effect, when the change of the special symbol is started, three symbols (decorative symbols) are variablely displayed in the display area 13a as shown in the display mode A in FIG. 52. Next, as shown in display mode B in FIG. 52, a symbol “?” Is displayed on each symbol. After that, as shown in the display modes C to E in FIG. 52, the symbol "?" Is destroyed in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and the corresponding numbers of the number of additions are sequentially displayed on each symbol.

In the example shown in FIG. 50, since the number of notifications is added by "100 times" at the timing of the advance notice effect, the numbers "1", "0", and "0" are displayed on the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively. Will be done. Then, when the number of additions is displayed in the display area 13a as the alignment of the liquid crystal symbols, the advance notice effect ends.

In the present embodiment, when the number of notifications is not added due to the change of the special symbol at the time of the advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 52, the effect for failing to add the number of time reductions (number of notifications) (“Gasechemuri appearance”). "Direction) is executed as a notice production. In this "Gasekemuri appearance" effect, "Kemuri" appears in the display area 13a of the display device 13 at the display timing of the right symbol of the display mode E in FIG. 52, and the player is notified of the information of the addition failure. To.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "big hit" is won in the change of the special symbol at the time of the advance notice effect, the effect of notifying the fact ("Atari character appearance" effect) is performed in the advance notice effect. For example, in this "Atari character appearance" effect, the characters "Atari" are displayed in the display area 13a as the liquid crystal pattern alignment by the operation of the display modes C to E in FIG. 52.

It should be noted that whether or not the above-mentioned advance notice effect is executed depends on the effect pattern (notification pattern of the time reduction number of times) determined when the time reduction number of times notification effect is performed. A notification pattern is also prepared. Further, when the advance notice effect is performed, the timing of performing the advance notice effect is preset for each notification pattern of the time reduction number of times determined when the time reduction number of times notification effect is performed.

The content (effect mode) of the advance notice effect is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, and any effect mode can be adopted depending on the model and the like. For example, in the above-mentioned example, an example in which one type of symbol "?" Is used as a symbol to be destroyed has been described. However, a plurality of types of symbols to be destroyed are provided, and for each symbol, for example, the degree of expectation of displaying the number of additional notifications is set. It may be changed.

Here, returning to the explanation of the time reduction number notification effect shown in FIG. 50, in the example shown in FIG. 50, when the notification number is "20 times" (the actual remaining time reduction number is "160 times"). After the number of notifications is added to "100 times" and the number of notifications is updated to "120 times", the number of notifications displayed in the display area 13a is subtracted by "1" each time the time-saving game is executed. .. Then, when the number of notifications reaches "0 times", an effect called "continuous effect" is performed. In the present embodiment, an example in which the number of notifications is subtracted by "1" for each fluctuation will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of "2 or more" is subtracted from the number of notifications. May be good.

In the example shown in FIG. 50, when the number of notifications first reaches "0" (timing for continuous production), the actual number of remaining time reductions is still "40", so at this point, "40". A continuous effect is performed such that the number of times less than or equal to the number of times is added to the number of notifications. In the example shown in FIG. 50, at this point in time, a continuous effect of adding "40 times" to the number of notifications is performed.

Here, FIG. 53 shows an example of continuous production. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flow of continuous production. First, with reference to FIG. 53, an operation for performing an effect of adding the number of notifications (“additional number display” effect in FIG. 53) in the continuous effect will be described. First, in mode C, when the continuous effect is started, the image of the "door" appears in the display area 13a. Next, an image of a "button" for destroying the "door" is displayed in the display area 13a.

Next, when the player repeatedly hits the appearing "button" to destroy the "door", an image in which the "door" is cracked is displayed. At this time, in the present embodiment, any one of four images (including an image in which the "door" is not cracked) having different crack generation levels of the "door" is displayed. In the present embodiment, the higher the crack generation level of the "door", the higher the success rate of destruction of the "door", and the higher the probability that the number of notifications will be added.

Then, when the "door" is destroyed by the player's repeated pressing of the "button" (when the "door destruction success" effect is performed), the number of notifications is added ("40 times" in the example shown in FIG. 50). ) Is displayed in the display area 13a (“additional number display” effect).

In the continuous production of the present embodiment, the risk level at which the time-saving game ends is also notified. Specifically, a three-stage stage in which the end risk of the time-saving game at the time of continuous production is different from each other is provided, and which stage is the end risk of the current time-saving game is notified. Then, when the "additional number display" effect of the number of notifications is performed during the continuous production, the end risk of the time saving game does not change ("stage continuation" effect) together with the additional number display, or the time saving game ends. Information on whether the degree of risk is reduced (“stage rank up” effect) is also displayed in the display area 13a.

Note that the notification of the end risk of the time-saving game at the time of continuous production may be performed at the same time as the display of the number of additional notifications as in the present embodiment, or before or after the display of the number of additional notifications. You may. Further, the division of the stage of the end risk of the time saving game is set based on the value of the current notification number of times and the value of the remaining time saving number of times. In this case, the number of notifications may be "0" even though the number of remaining time reductions is large (the stage where the risk of ending the time reduction game is low), which may give the player a sense of discomfort. There is sex. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of notifications becomes "0" in the stage where the risk of ending the time-saving game is low, the "additional number display" effect of the number of notifications is controlled so as to be easily executed. You may. As a result, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort for the player's continuous production, and it is possible to improve the interest and playability of the player regarding the number of time reductions.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 43, when the number of time reductions of 200 times is won based on the type of "big hit" that triggers the transition to mode C, in mode C, the mode D is entered. Perform a promotion lottery. Then, in the case of winning the promotion lottery to mode D in the change of the special symbol at the time of continuous production, in the continuous production, after the "door" is destroyed by the repeated hitting operation of the "button" by the player, the mode D is entered. The transition production of.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 43, when the "big hit" is won in the mode C, the effect mode shifts to the mode D. Then, if the "big hit" is won in the fluctuation of the special symbol during the continuous production, the "door" is destroyed by the player's repeated hitting of the "button" in the continuous production, and then the "big hit" is obtained. An effect is performed to notify that the player has won. That is, in mode C, when the number of notifications is added during the continuous production, when the lottery for transition to mode D is won, or when the "big hit" is won, the "door destruction success" in FIG. 53. The production of time is performed.

On the other hand, in the continuous production, when the image of the "button" for destroying the "door" is displayed in the display area 13a and then the "button" is not repeatedly hit, or the "button" is repeatedly hit. However, when the "door" is not destroyed, that is, when the effect of "door destruction failure" occurs, the transition effect to mode B is performed during the continuous effect. This effect is performed when both the number of notifications and the number of remaining time reductions are "0 times". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 50, when the number of notifications first becomes "0", the actual number of remaining time reductions is "40". Therefore, at this point, the time of "door destruction failure" occurs. No production is done.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 50, after the number of notifications is updated (added) to "40 times" by the continuous effect when the number of notifications first becomes "0 times", each time the time saving game is executed, The number of notifications displayed in the display area 13a is subtracted by "1".

Then, when the number of notifications becomes "0 times", the number of remaining time reductions also becomes "0 times", so that the time reduction game ends. At this time, the effect at the time of "door destruction failure" described in the above continuous effect, that is, the effect of shifting to mode B is performed.

The content of the continuous effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 53, and is arbitrary as long as the correspondence between the effect at the time of "door destruction success" and the above-mentioned "door destruction failure" and the notification content is the same. An effect mode can be used.

In the time reduction number notification effect in the mode C described above, the notification number, which is information on the remaining time reduction number, is not simply subtracted with the digestion of the time reduction game (notification), but is predetermined in the process of the notification number subtraction effect. It is possible to perform an effect (“notice effect” and “continuous effect”) in which the number of notifications is once added at the timing of. Therefore, in the time-saving number-of-time notification effect of the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to grasp the duration of the "time-saving game state". Therefore, the "time-saving game state" continues for a long time during the time-saving number of time notification effect. It is possible to continue the player's expectation of whether or not. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the "time-saving game state" and also improve the player's interest in the time-saving number-of-times notification effect.

[Probability change number notification effect: effect in mode D]
In the mode D, the probability variation number notification effect of displaying (notifying) the information regarding the number of fluctuations (ST) of the remaining special symbols in the display area 13a of the display device 13 is performed. It should be noted that this effect is performed in the same manner as the latent probability number notification effect in mode B.

<Pre-reading specialized zone production>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the variable display (holding ball) of the special symbol is held during the variable display of the special symbol, various look-ahead effects are performed based on the information of the holding ball. Here, among those various look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect called "look-ahead special zone effect" will be described.

[Overview of look-ahead special zone production]
In the look-ahead special zone effect, when it is decided to perform the look-ahead special zone effect when a predetermined reserved ball is generated, a series of effects are performed over the fluctuation of all the reserved balls existing at that time. In addition, the variable display of the special symbol that is being executed (currently changing) when it is decided to perform the look-ahead special zone effect, and the predetermined hold ball that is decided to perform the look-ahead special zone effect. The fluctuation period of the reserved ball that occurs later does not contribute to the production of the look-ahead special zone.

The look-ahead special zone effect is mainly composed of the effect before the look-ahead special zone, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone, and the effect in the look-ahead special zone. Then, in the look-ahead special zone effect, basically, the effect before the look-ahead special zone, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone, and the effect in the look-ahead special zone are executed in this order.

In addition, when the look-ahead special zone effect is performed over a variable period of a plurality of reserved balls, in the variable period of each reserved ball, the effect before the look-ahead special zone, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone, and One of the productions in the look-ahead special zone will be performed. The allocation of this effect is determined when it is decided to perform the look-ahead special zone effect.

At this time, the look-ahead special zone start flag is registered in the predetermined reserved ball to which the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is assigned (the value of the look-ahead special zone start flag is set to "1"). .. In addition, each holding ball from the next holding ball of the predetermined holding ball to which the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is assigned to the holding ball to which the look-ahead special zone end flag is registered has a flag in the look-ahead special zone. Is registered (the value of the read-ahead special zone flag is set to "1"). Note that various flags for the look-ahead special zone are not set for the reserved ball to which the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is assigned (the value of each flag for the look-ahead special zone is set to "0"). (Set). Further, in the present embodiment, among the reserved balls involved in the look-ahead special zone production, the look-ahead special zone end flag is registered in the reserved balls for which the look-ahead special zone production is determined to be performed (look-ahead special zone end flag). The value of the special zone end flag is set to "1").

In the variable display period of the reserved ball assigned to the effect before the look-ahead special zone, an effect that encourages the player to enter the look-ahead special zone is performed. In addition, during the variable display period of the reserved ball assigned to the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone, the effect of notifying the entry into the special zone and the effect of entering the zone are performed. In the present embodiment, in the effect before the look-ahead special zone and the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone, the effect is executed by the decorative symbol displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13 (hereinafter, "design effect"). ”) And / or an effect executed with a background pattern (hereinafter referred to as“ background effect ”) is performed. The type (system) of the design effect (first effect) and / or the background effect (second effect) performed in the effect before the look-ahead special zone or the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is the effect before the look-ahead special zone. Alternatively, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is determined according to the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the variation of the reserved ball to which the effect is assigned (see the variation effect table of FIGS. 66 and 67 described later).

In addition, in the production in the look-ahead special zone, a predetermined production (third production) is performed so that the expectation of the transition to the jackpot game is higher than the production (design production or background production) before the look-ahead special zone. Be told. In other words, in the look-ahead special zone production, the expectation for the transition to the jackpot game is gradually increased from the production before the look-ahead special zone to the production in the look-ahead special zone. Will be The content of the effect in the look-ahead special zone is determined according to the type of the change pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the change of the reserved ball to which the effect in the look-ahead special zone is assigned (see the figure below). See 68 variable production table).

[Operation example of look-ahead specialized zone production]
Here, an operation example of the look-ahead specialized zone effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 54a to 54c. It should be noted that FIGS. 54a to 54c are diagrams showing an operation flow of the look-ahead special zone effect. In the example shown in FIGS. 54a to 54c, a start opening prize is generated (a fourth reserved ball is generated) in a state where three reserved balls already exist, and a look-ahead special zone effect is performed at that time. This is an example of various operations of the look-ahead specialized zone effect when is determined.

In this case, the fluctuation period of the three reserved balls held at the time when the fourth reserved ball occurs and the fluctuation period of the fourth reserved ball determined to perform the look-ahead special zone effect. A series of look-ahead effects will be performed over the course.

In the operation example of the look-ahead specialized zone effect shown in FIG. 54a, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is set for the first reserved ball, and the look-ahead is set for the second to fourth reserved balls. This is an operation example when the effect in the special zone is set. That is, in the example of the look-ahead special zone effect shown in FIG. 54a, the effect before the look-ahead special zone is not performed.

In this case, first, when the variation display of the first reserved ball is started, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone (the effect of notifying the entry into the special zone and the effect of entering the zone) is performed. Next, in each fluctuation period of the second to fourth reserved balls, the effect in the look-ahead special zone is performed. The content of the effect during the change period of each hold ball is determined based on the change pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of change of each hold ball.

In the operation example of the look-ahead special zone effect shown in FIG. 54b, the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is set for the first reserved ball, and the look-ahead special zone starts for the second hold ball. This is an operation example when the effect of is set and the effect in the look-ahead special zone is set for the third and fourth reserved balls. In this case, first, when the variable display of the first reserved ball is started, the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is performed so as to encourage the player to enter the look-ahead special zone. Next, when the variation display of the second reserved ball is started, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone (the effect of notifying the entry into the special zone and the effect of entering the zone) is performed. Then, in each fluctuation period of the third and fourth reserved balls, the effect in the look-ahead special zone is performed. The content of the effect during the change period of each hold ball is determined based on the change pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of change of each hold ball.

In the operation example of the look-ahead specialized zone effect shown in FIG. 54c, the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is set for each of the first and second reserved balls, and the look-ahead is set for the third reserved ball. This is an operation example when the effect at the start of the special zone is set and the effect in the look-ahead special zone is set for the fourth reserved ball. In this case, first, during the fluctuation period of each of the first and second reserved balls, an effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is performed so as to encourage the player to enter the look-ahead special zone. Next, when the variation display of the third reserved ball is started, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone (the effect of notifying the entry into the special zone and the effect of entering the zone) is performed. Then, in each variation display of the fourth reserved ball, the effect in the look-ahead special zone is performed. The content of the effect during the change period of each hold ball is determined based on the change pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of change of each hold ball.

[Example of production operation at the start of the look-ahead special zone]
Next, an operation example of the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone will be described with reference to FIG. 55. Note that FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of an operation flow of the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the reserved ball for which the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is set is started, first, the symbol effect and the background effect of the same system are displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13. At the same time, a notice of entry into the specialized zone (“zone transition notice combined success” effect) will be performed. For example, the design effect A and the background effect A are performed at the same time. Next, a predetermined zone entry effect (look-ahead special zone start effect) is performed. By the production at the start of this series of look-ahead special zones, it is notified that the player has entered the look-ahead special zone where the expectation of the transition to the jackpot game is higher.

In addition, in the rush notice effect to the special zone, the effect of simultaneously executing the pattern effect and the background effect having different systems from each other is not performed. For example, an effect in which the symbol effect A and a background effect (background effect B or C) having a different system from the symbol effect A are simultaneously performed, or an effect in which the background effect A and the background effect A have a different system (design effect B or C) are performed. ) And are not performed at the same time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the symbol effect and the background effect of the same system occur at the same time in the look-ahead effect, the player enters the look-ahead special zone and shifts to the jackpot game. It can be recognized that the degree of expectation is higher.

Here, in the operation example of the look-ahead specialized zone effect shown in FIG. 54c, an example of the change in the effect content from the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone to the effect in the look-ahead special zone will be described.

In the operation example of the look-ahead special zone effect shown in FIG. 54c, for example, in the fluctuation period of the first and second reserved balls, as an effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone, for example, the symbol effect A is continuously performed twice. And perform a production that encourages you to enter the look-ahead special zone. Next, during the fluctuation period of the third reserved ball, the symbol effect A and the background effect A are simultaneously generated as the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone, and then a predetermined effect of entering the zone is performed. Then, in the fourth variable period of the reserved ball, the effect in the predetermined look-ahead special zone, which is more expected to shift to the jackpot game than the symbol effect A (the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone), is performed.

Further, in the operation example of the look-ahead special zone effect shown in FIG. 54c, for example, during the fluctuation period of the first hold ball, the symbol effect A is executed as the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone, and the second hold ball is held. In the fluctuation period of, the symbol effect A may be executed, and a tilt effect of entering a predetermined look-ahead special zone may be added. In this case, the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone makes it possible to further incite the entry into the look-ahead special zone.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the look-ahead special zone production, a series of look-ahead effects are performed over a variable period of a plurality of reserved balls. Then, in the look-ahead special zone production, the production is performed so that the expectation of the transition to the jackpot game gradually increases. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the look-ahead effect, the player's expectation for the jackpot game can be improved, and the player's interest in the look-ahead effect itself can be improved.

[Configuration of data table stored in main ROM]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62.

[Big hit random number judgment table (at the time of winning the first start opening)]
First, with reference to FIG. 56, a jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting port) will be described. The jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting port) is "big hit" and "small hit" based on the random number value for jackpot determination acquired when the game ball enters (wins) the first starting port 44. And, it is a table referred to when determining one of "loss" by lottery.

The jackpot determination random number value is a random number value for determining the lottery result performed when the start opening prize is won, and more specifically, a lottery of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). It is a random value indicating the result. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 44, one of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss" is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning the first start opening), as shown in FIG. 56, for each value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”), “ The range of random number values for jackpot judgment for determining the winning of each of "big hit", "small hit" and "loss", and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data" and The relationship with any of the "loss judgment value data") is defined.

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “probability change game state”. When the game state is the "probability change game state", the probability change flag is "1".

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the jackpot determination random value is any of "777" to "943" at the time of winning the first starting port 44. The "big hit" is won and the "big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the "big hit" in this case is 167/65536.

In addition, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the random value for jackpot determination is any of "1" to "300" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, "small hit" is won and "small hit" is won. "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of "small hit" in this case is 300/65536.

Further, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the random value for jackpot determination is neither "1" to "300" nor "777" to "943" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, "loss" Is won, and the "loss judgment value data" is determined.

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for jackpot determination is any of "777" to "1273" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, as shown in FIG. 56, "big hit". Is won, and the "big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the "big hit" in this case is 497/65536, which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

If the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for jackpot determination is any of "1" to "300" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, "small hit" is won and "small hit" is won. "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of "small hit" in this case is 300/65536, which is the same as that when the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for jackpot determination is neither "1" to "300" nor "777" to "1273" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, "loss" Is won, and the "loss judgment value data" is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44, the jackpot probability varies depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probability variation game state”. Specifically, the jackpot probability when the game ball wins the first starting port 44 when the game state is the "probability change game state" is about three times that when the game state is not the "probability change game state". It gets higher.

[Big hit random number judgment table (at the time of winning the second start opening)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting port) will be described. The jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting port) is a lottery for whether or not it is a "big hit" based on the random number value for jackpot determination acquired when the game ball enters (wins) the second starting port 45. It is a table that is referred to when performing.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 45, either "big hit" or "loss" is determined by lottery. If the game ball wins in the second starting port 45, the "small hit" will not be won.

Therefore, in the jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning the second start opening), as shown in FIG. 57, for each value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”), “ Relationship between the range of random number values for jackpot judgment for determining the winning of "big hit" and "loss" and the corresponding judgment value data (either "big hit judgment value data" or "loss judgment value data") Is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the jackpot determination random value is any of "777" to "943" at the time of winning the second starting port 45. The "big hit" is won and the "big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the "big hit" in this case is 167/65536.

If the probability variation flag is "0" and the random value for jackpot determination is neither "777" to "943" at the time of winning the second starting port 45, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for jackpot determination is any of "777" to "1273" at the time of winning the second starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 57, "big hit". Is won, and the "big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the "big hit" in this case is 497/65536, which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

If the probability variation flag is "1" and the jackpot determination random number value is neither "777" to "1273" at the time of winning the second starting port 45, it becomes "loss" and "loss determination value data". Is decided.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the game ball wins the second starting port 45, the jackpot probability varies depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probability changing game state”. .. Specifically, as in the case of winning the first starting port 44, when the second starting port 45 is won, the game ball wins in the second starting port 45 when the game state is the "probability changing game state". The jackpot probability is about three times higher than that when the game state is not the "probability change game state".

[Big hit symbol random number judgment table (at the time of winning the first start opening)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the jackpot symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting port) will be described.

In the present embodiment, when the "big hit" is determined from the lottery based on the big hit determination random number value performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 44, the big hit symbol random value is acquired and the big hit symbol is obtained. The jackpot symbol is selected based on the random value.

The jackpot symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the first start opening) is a table that is referred to when the jackpot symbol is selected. The jackpot symbol random value is a random value for determining the jackpot symbol when the "big hit" is determined, and is selected from 0 to 99 (100 types).

As shown in FIG. 58, a symbol designation command (“z0” to “z16”) for designating a jackpot symbol and the symbol designation command are selected in the jackpot symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the first start opening). The relationship with the jackpot symbol random number value to be performed is defined. In addition, the probability (selection rate) that each symbol designation command is selected is also defined in the jackpot symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the first start opening).

For example, in the jackpot symbol selection process, when the jackpot symbol random value is any of "77" to "96", the symbol designation command "z13" is selected as shown in FIG. 58, and the selection rate thereof. Is 20/100.

[Big hit symbol random number judgment table (at the time of winning the second start opening)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting port) will be described.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol random value is also acquired when the "big hit" is determined from the lottery based on the jackpot determination random number value performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 45. The jackpot symbol is selected based on the jackpot symbol random value. The jackpot symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting opening) is a table that is referred to when the jackpot symbol is selected.

In the jackpot symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the second start opening), as shown in FIG. 59, a symbol designation command (“z17”) for designating a jackpot symbol and a jackpot symbol to which the symbol designation command is selected are selected. The relationship with the random number value (any of 0 to 99) is defined. In addition, the probability (selection rate) that each symbol designation command is selected is also defined in the jackpot symbol random number determination table (at the time of winning the second start opening).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, when the "big hit" is determined at the time of winning the second starting port 45, in the jackpot symbol selection process, the symbol designation command is always performed regardless of the jackpot symbol random value. “Z17” is selected (selectivity = 100/100).

[Big hit type determination table]
Next, the jackpot type determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In the present embodiment, when the symbol designation command (any of "z0" to "z17") is determined with reference to the jackpot symbol random number determination table (see FIGS. 58 and 59), the determined symbol designation Based on the command, the type of "big hit" (contents of the big hit game) is determined. The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the type of "big hit" (contents of the jackpot game) based on the symbol designation command.

As shown in FIG. 60, the jackpot type determination table defines the relationship between the symbol designation commands (“z0” to “z17”) and various parameters for determining the type of “big hit”. Various parameters that determine the type of "big hit" (contents of the big hit game) include the upper limit of the number of rounds in the big hit game, the number of rounds in which the ball (prize ball) is relatively easy to obtain in the big hit game, and open during the big hit game. The type of the big winning opening to be played, the number of prize balls, and the time reduction flag and the number of time reductions set in the game state of the transfer destination are specified.

In addition, the "number of rounds in which it is relatively easy to get a ball" defined in the jackpot type determination table means the number of rounds in which the opening time of the jackpot is relatively long in the jackpot game.

For example, if the upper limit of the number of rounds is 16 rounds and the number of rounds in which it is relatively easy to obtain a ball (prize ball) is 6 rounds, the big prize opening is 30 in the 1st to 6th round games of the jackpot game. The seconds are released, and in the remaining 7th to 16th round games, the opening time of the big prize opening is 0.1 seconds.

In this way, by changing the number of rounds in which balls (prize balls) are relatively easy to obtain according to the type of jackpot symbol (symbol designation command), even if the upper limit of the number of rounds is the same, the jackpot symbol Depending on the type of (design designation command), it is possible to give a difference to the total number of balls finally obtained in the big hit game.

Further, the type "1" of the big winning opening to be opened corresponds to the first big winning opening 53, and the type "2" corresponds to the second big winning opening 54, which is defined in the big hit type determination table. Then, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the first prize opening 53 is "10" balls, and the number of prize balls at the time of winning the second prize opening 54 is "15" balls (see FIG. 60).

In this way, in the present embodiment, by changing the type of the big prize opening that is opened at the time of the big hit winning, even if the number of times that the big winning opening is won in one big hit game is the same, the total number of prize balls is increased. Can be changed.

As shown in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 60, the value of the time reduction flag (“1” (on) or “0” (off)) and the number of time reductions to be given are specified for each game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Will be done. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the "big hit" is determined in the gaming state of "low probability no time reduction", when the "big hit" is determined in the gaming state of "high probability no time reduction", and , The value of the time reduction flag and the number of time reductions are separately defined in each case where the "big hit" is determined in the gaming state of "high probability with time reduction".

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "time saving game state". When the game state is "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1 (on)".

Note that the "low probability no time reduction" shown in FIG. 60 is a gaming state in which the "normal game state" and the "non-time reduction game state" occur at the same time, so that the value of the probability variation flag is "0 (off)". It is a gaming state in which the value of the time saving flag is "0 (off)".

Further, "no high probability time reduction" is a game state in which "probability change game state" and "non-time reduction game state" occur at the same time ("latent probability game state"), so that the value of the probability change flag is "1 (" It is a gaming state in which the value of the time saving flag is "0 (off)".

Further, "high probability with time reduction" is a game state in which "probability change game state" and "time reduction game state" are occurring at the same time, so that the value of the probability change flag is "1 (on)" and the time is shortened. It is a gaming state in which the value of the flag is "1 (on)".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the presence / absence of the time-saving game and the number of time-saving games can be changed according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. That is, in the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the big hit game can be changed according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit.

For example, when the symbol designation command is "z9", as shown in FIG. 60, the number of rounds is set as various parameters for determining the type (content) of the "big hit" regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The upper limit value "16", the number of rounds "6" which makes it relatively easy to get a ball, the type "1" of the big winning opening to be opened during the big hit game, and the number of prize balls "10" are acquired.

However, in this case, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "no low probability time reduction", the time reduction flag "0" and the number of time reductions "0" are selected, and the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "no high probability time reduction". When is, the time saving flag "1" and the time saving number "100" are selected, and when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "high probability time saving", the time saving flag "1" and the time saving number "200" are selected. To.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the big hit game is completed, the game state is always changed to the "probability change game state". Therefore, in the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 60, the probability change flag is set for the symbol designation command (big hit symbol). The value of is not specified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the probability variation flag may be specified for the symbol designation command (big hit symbol) in the jackpot type determination table.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the game state is always changed to the "probability variation game state" after the end of the big hit game will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the game state after the end of the big hit game. May be provided with a type of "big hit" that does not shift to the "probability-changing gaming state", or whether or not the gaming state shifts to the "probability-changing gaming state" is determined according to the type of "big hit". The configuration may be different. In this case, the value of the probability variation flag is specified for the symbol designation command (big hit symbol) in the jackpot type determination table.

[Winning pattern determination table]
Next, the winning pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 70 (main CPU71) is based on the winning type (“big hit”, “small hit” or “missing”) and the symbol designation command determined at the time of winning (at the time of winning the starting port). Then, a winning pattern (information for designating the winning content) is determined, and the winning pattern is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201) as a winning command. The winning pattern determination table is a table that is referred to when determining a winning pattern based on the winning type and the symbol designation command determined at the time of winning.

As shown in FIG. 61, the winning pattern determination table defines the relationship between the types of winning patterns (“NS00” to “NS19”), the symbol designation commands, and various parameters indicating the winning contents. As various parameters indicating the winning contents, the winning type, the value of the time saving flag set in the game state of the transfer destination, and the number of time saving times are defined. The information on the winning type defined in the winning pattern determination table corresponds to the determination value data defined in the jackpot random number determination table shown in FIGS. 56 and 57.

Further, in the winning pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61, the value of the time reduction flag (“1” (on) or “0” (off)) and the number of time reductions are defined for each game state at the time of winning the big hit. Specifically, when the "big hit" is determined in the game state of "low probability no time reduction", when the "big hit" is determined in the game state of "high probability no time reduction", and when there is "high probability time reduction". In each case where the "big hit" is determined during the game state of "", the value of the time reduction flag and the number of time reductions are separately defined.

In the present embodiment, since the symbol designation command is the information for designating the big hit symbol, the information of the symbol designation command is not specified for the winning types "miss" and "small hit" in the winning pattern determination table. .. In addition, when the winning types are "miss" and "small hit", the game does not shift to the time-saving game state regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, in the winning pattern determination table, the winning types "loss" and "small hit" are displayed. The value of the time reduction flag and the information on the number of time reductions are not specified for "hit".

[Variation pattern determination table]
Next, the fluctuation pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 70 (main CPU71) provides information such as the winning type (“big hit”, “small hit” or “loss”), the symbol designation command, the fluctuation time, etc. at the start of the variation display of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above, and the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201) as a fluctuation command.

The variation pattern determination table is a table that is referred to when determining a variation pattern based on information such as a winning type, a symbol designation command, and a variation time at the start of variation of a special symbol. The variation pattern of the special symbol determined by the variation pattern determination table also serves as information for designating the effect pattern of the effect to be performed during the variation display period of the special symbol, as will be described later.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 62, the fluctuation pattern type (“HN00” to “HN27”) and the information to be referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern (design designation command, fluctuation time, and winning type) are displayed. ) Is defined. In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table also defines the value of the time reduction flag and the number of time reductions corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

The value of the time reduction flag and the number of time reductions are defined for each game state at the time of winning the big hit. Specifically, when the "big hit" is determined in the game state of "low probability no time reduction", when the "big hit" is determined in the game state of "high probability no time reduction", and when there is "high probability time reduction". When the "big hit" is determined in the game state of "", the value of the time reduction flag and the number of time reductions are defined respectively.

[Configuration of data table stored in program ROM]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 71.

[Look-ahead effect flag table]
First, the look-ahead effect flag table will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub CPU201) is the content of the variable display of the reserved special symbol. A predetermined look-ahead effect (including a look-ahead special zone effect) is performed according to (contents of the reserved ball). At this time, whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed is controlled by the management information (various flags) of the look-ahead effect.

The look-ahead effect flag table shown in FIG. 63 is a table that is referred to when setting management information (various flags) for the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect management information (various flags) is determined based on the information of the winning pattern included in the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 at the time of winning the starting port.

In the look-ahead effect flag table, as shown in FIG. 63, a winning pattern type (“NS00” to “NS19”), a random number value for determining management information (various flags) of the look-ahead effect, and the random number value are displayed. Correspondence relationship with the value of the variable look-ahead flag, the value of the look-ahead special zone flag, and the management information set of the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determined by

In addition, the look-ahead effect flag table also defines the selection rate of each management information set and the winning type (“big hit”, “small hit” or “miss”) corresponding to each winning pattern. The information on the winning type defined in the look-ahead effect flag table corresponds to the determination value data defined in the jackpot random number determination table shown in FIGS. 56 and 57.

The random number value defined in the look-ahead effect flag table is a random number value acquired at the time of winning the starting opening, and is any one of "0" to "999" (1000 types).

The variable look-ahead flag defined in the look-ahead effect flag table is a flag that determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect. When the look-ahead effect is performed, the value of the variable look-ahead flag is "1 (on)". Set. Further, the look-ahead special zone flag is a flag that determines whether or not the above-mentioned look-ahead special zone effect is performed as the look-ahead effect. When the look-ahead special zone effect is performed, the value of the look-ahead special zone flag. Is set to "1 (on)". The variable look-ahead flag and the look-ahead special zone flag are set in the look-ahead effect flag determination process described later (see FIG. 87 described later).

Further, the look-ahead special zone effect pattern defined in the look-ahead effect flag table is information indicating the system of the look-ahead effect executed before entering the effect of the look-ahead special zone. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, three types of look-ahead specialized zone effect patterns (“Pattern A”, “Pattern B”, and “Pattern C”) are prepared, and the value of the look-ahead special zone flag is set. When it is "1", a predetermined pattern is selected.

For example, the winning pattern determined at the time of winning is "NS08", and the random number value acquired at the time of winning to set the management information (various flags, etc.) of the look-ahead effect is any one of "100" to "999". If it is a value, "0" is set in the variable look-ahead flag, "1" is set in the look-ahead special zone flag, and "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead special zone effect pattern.

[Variable production table]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are executed during the variable display of the special symbol by the control of the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201).

The content of the effect (effect pattern) performed at this time is based on the information of the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 at the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Is decided.

The various variation effect tables described below are referred to when determining the effect content (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern information and the like. In the present embodiment, separate variable effect tables are prepared according to various conditions such as the presence / absence and type of the look-ahead effect and the presence / absence of the stock pseudo-continuous effect.

(1) Variable production table (no look-ahead)

First, the variation effect table (without look-ahead) will be described with reference to FIG. 64. In the variable look-ahead table (no look-ahead), when the look-ahead effect is not performed during the variable display of the special symbol, that is, when both the value of the variable look-ahead flag and the value of the look-ahead special zone flag are "0" (note that the effect). This is a table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the effect during the variable display of the special symbol, which is performed in the mode (except when the mode is the special effect stage of the normal mode).

As shown in FIG. 64, the variation pattern type ("HN00" to "HN27") and the effect pattern ("EN00" to "EN54") of the special symbol are selected (determined) in the variation effect table (without look-ahead). ), And the correspondence relationship between the effect pattern determined by the random value and the data set of the values of the pseudo-continuous effect flag is defined.

In addition, in the fluctuation effect table (without pre-reading), the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of each special symbol (variation display period of the special symbol), the winning type ("big hit", "small hit" or "loss") and the symbol The designated command, the selection rate of each effect pattern, and the content of the effect are also specified.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the variation time defined in the variation effect table (without look-ahead) is substantially the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. Further, the random number value defined in the variable effect table (without look-ahead) is a random number value acquired at the time of winning the starting opening, and is any one of "0" to "999" (1000 types).

The pseudo-continuous effect flag defined in the variable effect table (no look-ahead) is a flag that determines whether or not to perform the normal pseudo-continuous effect described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect is performed. If so, the value of the pseudo-continuous production flag is set to "1 (on)".

For example, it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not executed, the variation pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol is "HN10", and the variation pattern is acquired at the time of winning to select the effect pattern. When the random number value is any value from "500" to "999", "EN20" is selected as the effect pattern, and "1" is set in the pseudo-continuous effect flag.

In this case, a normal pseudo-continuous effect is performed during the variable display period (25,000 milliseconds) of the special symbol. Specifically, first, a "pseudo-ream effect" is performed a predetermined number of pseudo-reams, and then a "reach effect" called "normal reach effect A" is performed. Then, at the end of the "normal reach effect A", the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is displayed in the "big hit" mode, and the special symbol stops fluctuating.

In the present embodiment, as the "reach effect", in addition to the "normal reach effect A", there is an effect called "special effect A" or "special effect D", and as the "non-reach effect", there is a "normal variation". There is a production called "Production A". Further, as the "reach effect", the liquid crystal display device 13 displays an effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol (or identification information, identification symbol, ordinary symbol, etc.), and the lightning bolt character 80, according to the effect. The logo accessory 210 and the door accessory 420 are driven.

In addition, in order to notify that the result of the production is a "big hit", the lightning bolt accessory 80 and the logo accessory 210 are driven (or moved, moved, moved, etc.) as shown in FIG. 21, for example. , When there is an effect that shifts (or changes, develops, promotes, etc.) from "reach effect" to "normal reach effect A", the right gold door 421 and the left gold door 422 are driven as shown in FIG. 28. , The transition of the effect may be notified.

(2) Variable production table (with look-ahead)

Next, the variation effect table (with look-ahead) will be described with reference to FIG. 65. In the variable look-ahead table (with look-ahead), when it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect when the special symbol changes, that is, when the special symbol starts changing, the value of the variable look-ahead flag is "1" and This is a table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the effect during the variable display of the special symbol, which is performed when the value of the look-ahead special zone flag is "0".

As shown in FIG. 65, the variation pattern type (“HN00” to “HN27”) and the effect pattern (“ES00” to “ES55”) of the special symbol are selected (determined) in the variation effect table (with look-ahead). ), And the correspondence between the effect pattern determined by the random value and the data set of the contents of the look-ahead effect (type of symbol effect and background effect) are defined.

In the present embodiment, in the look-ahead effect, a pattern effect (effect performed by a decorative pattern) and / or a background effect (effect performed by a background pattern) is performed. Then, in the present embodiment, three types of "design effect A", "design effect B", and "design effect C" are prepared as the symbol effect, and "background effect A" and "background effect B" are prepared as the background effect. "And" Background effect C "are prepared. In the present embodiment, the system (type) of the content of "design effect A" is the same as that of "background effect A", and the system (type) of the content of "design effect B" is that of "background effect B". It is assumed that the system (type) of the contents of "design effect C" is the same as that of "background effect C".

In addition, in the fluctuation effect table (with look-ahead), the variation time (variation display period of the special symbol) corresponding to each variation pattern, the winning type ("big hit", "small hit" or "loss"), and each effect The pattern selection rate and the content of the effect are also specified.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the fluctuation time defined in the fluctuation production table (with look-ahead) is substantially the same as the production time of the corresponding production pattern. Further, the random number value defined in the variable effect table (with look-ahead) is a random number value acquired at the time of winning the starting opening, and is any one of "0" to "999" (1000 types).

For example, the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined, the variation pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol is "HN00", and the random value acquired at the time of winning to select the effect pattern. When is a value of any of "0" to "499", "ES00" is selected as the effect pattern, and "design effect A" is selected in the look-ahead effect. In this case, during the fluctuation display period (5000 milliseconds) of the special symbol, the look-ahead effect of "design effect A" is first performed at the start of the change, and after the look-ahead effect is completed, it is referred to as "normal variation effect A". The so-called production is performed. Then, at the end of the effect called "normal variation effect A", the display area 13a of the display device 13 is displayed in the "missing" mode, and the special symbol stops changing.

The variable effect table (with look-ahead) shown in FIG. 65 may be used when the look-ahead effect is not performed. That is, the variable effect table (with look-ahead) shown in FIG. 65 may be used as the variable effect table (without look-ahead). In this case, even in the variable display period of the normal special symbol in which the look-ahead effect is not performed, the same effect as when the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined can be performed.

(3) Variable production table (before the start of the look-ahead special zone)

Next, the variation effect table (before the start of the look-ahead special zone) will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

As described above, when a plurality of variable displays of the special symbol are held (a state in which a plurality of reserved balls exist) and the transition to the look-ahead special zone is decided, that is, the change of the special symbol. At the start, when the value of the variable look-ahead flag is "0" and the value of the look-ahead special zone flag is "1", the look-ahead special zone effect is performed. At this time, as described above, each of the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone, and the effect in the look-ahead special zone is executed at the time of the variable display of the corresponding reserved ball.

The variation effect table (before the start of the look-ahead special zone) shown in FIG. 66 determines the effect pattern of the effect performed during the variation display period of the hold ball at the start of the change of the hold ball that performs the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone. It is a table that is referred to when doing so.

As shown in FIG. 66, the variation effect table (before the start of the look-ahead special zone) is determined by the type of variation pattern (“HN00” to “HN04”) of the special symbol and the look-ahead effect flag table shown in FIG. A look-ahead special zone effect pattern, a random number value for selecting (determining) an effect pattern ("EX00" to "EX13"), an effect pattern determined by the random number value, and an effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone. Correspondence relationship with the data set of the contents (type of design effect and background effect) is defined. That is, the content of the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is determined based on the look-ahead special zone effect pattern and the type of variation pattern (“HN00” to “HN04”).

When the effect pattern is determined with reference to the variable effect table (before the start of the look-ahead special zone), either the design effect or the background effect is selected as the look-ahead effect. In addition, in the variation effect table (before the start of the look-ahead special zone), the variation time (variation display period of special symbols) and winning type (“missing”) corresponding to each variation pattern, and the selection rate of each effect pattern are also displayed. Is regulated.

In the look-ahead special zone effect, for the first time in the effect in the look-ahead special zone, the display area 13a of the display device 13 is displayed in the "big hit" mode or the "small hit" mode, and the special symbol stops fluctuating. That is, in the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone and at the start of the look-ahead special zone, the display area 13a of the display device 13 is displayed in a “missing” mode, and the special symbol stops fluctuating. Therefore, in the variable effect table (before the start of the look-ahead special zone) and the variable effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) shown in FIG. 67, various data corresponding to the winning type of "loss" are defined. Various data corresponding to the winning types of "small hit" and "big hit" are not specified.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the variation time defined in the variation effect table (before the start of the look-ahead special zone) is substantially the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. Further, the random number value defined in the variable effect table (before the start of the look-ahead special zone) is a random number value acquired at the time of winning the start opening, and is any one of "0" to "999" (1000 types). ..

For example, it is decided to execute the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone, the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the change display of the special symbol is "HN00", and the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determined at the time of winning is "HN00". If it is "Pattern A" and the random number value acquired at the time of winning to select the effect pattern is any value from "0" to "499", "EX00" is selected as the effect pattern and pre-reading. As the effect before the start of the special zone, "design effect A" is selected. In this case, in the special symbol variation display period (5000 milliseconds), when the special symbol variation display is started, "design effect A" is performed as a look-ahead effect, and after the look-ahead effect is completed. , The display area 13a of the display device 13 is displayed in the "missing" mode, and the special symbol stops fluctuating.

In addition, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of effect pattern of the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone, not only the predetermined symbol effect or the predetermined background effect but also the entry into the look-ahead special zone is further encouraged. In some cases, a variety of effects (tilt effects) are performed.

(4) Variable production table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone)

Next, the variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

The variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) shown in FIG. 67 shows the effect performed during the change display period of the hold ball at the start of the change of the hold ball that performs the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone (at the time of entry). This is a table that is referred to when determining the production pattern.

As shown in FIG. 67, the variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) is determined by the type of variation pattern (“HN00” to “HN04”) of the special symbol and the look-ahead effect flag table shown in FIG. A look-ahead special zone effect pattern, a random number value for selecting (determining) an effect pattern ("EZ00" to "EZ20"), an effect pattern determined by the random number value, and an effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone. Correspondence relationship with the data set of the contents (type of design effect and background effect) is defined. That is, the content of the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is determined based on the look-ahead special zone effect pattern and the type of the variation pattern (“HN00” to “HN04”).

In the production at the start of the look-ahead special zone, as described above, first, as the production of the entry notice to the special zone (the production of "zone transition notice combined success"), the design production and the background production of the same system are simultaneously performed. Will be done. Therefore, data of the same system of symbol effect and background effect is defined for each effect pattern in the variable effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone). For example, in the effect pattern "EZ00", "design effect A" and "background effect A" are defined as pre-reading effects.

In addition, in the variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone), the variation time (variation display period of the special symbol) and winning type (“miss”) corresponding to each variation pattern, and the selection rate of each effect pattern are also displayed. Is regulated. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the fluctuation time defined in the fluctuation production table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) is substantially the same as the production time of the corresponding production pattern. Further, the random number value defined in the variable effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) is a random number value acquired at the start opening winning, and is any one of "0" to "999" (1000 types). ..

For example, it is decided to execute the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone, the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the change display of the special symbol is "HN00", and the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determined at the time of winning. When is "Pattern A", "EZ00" is selected as the effect pattern at the start of the look-ahead special zone, and "design effect A" and "design effect A" and "design effect A" are selected as the look-ahead effect ("zone transition notice compound success" effect). "Background effect A" is selected. In this case, in the variable display period (5000 milliseconds) of the special symbol, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, "design effect A" and "background effect A" are produced as "zone transition notice compound success". "Is performed at the same time, and after the effect is completed, a predetermined zone entry effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern is performed. Then, after the end of the predetermined zone entry effect, the display in the "missing" mode is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13, and the special symbol stops fluctuating.

(5) Variable production table (in the look-ahead special zone)

Next, the variation effect table (in the look-ahead special zone) will be described with reference to FIG. 68.

The variation effect table (in the look-ahead special zone) shown in FIG. 68 determines the effect pattern of the effect performed during the variation display period of the hold ball at the start of fluctuation of the hold ball performing the effect in the look-ahead special zone. This is the table referenced by.

As shown in FIG. 68, the variation effect table (in the read-ahead special zone) shows the types of variation patterns (“HN00” to “HN27”) of special symbols and the effect patterns (“ET00” to “ET52”). The correspondence between the random value for selection (determination) and the data set of the effect pattern and the effect content determined by the random value is defined. That is, the content of the effect in the look-ahead special zone is determined based on the type of variation pattern of the special symbol (“HN00” to “HN27”).

In addition, in the fluctuation production table (in the look-ahead special zone), the fluctuation time (variation display period of the special symbol) and winning type ("miss", "small hit" and "big hit") corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and , The selection rate of each production pattern is also specified. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the fluctuation time defined in the fluctuation production table (in the look-ahead special zone) is substantially the same as the production time of the corresponding production pattern. Further, the random number value defined in the variable effect table (during the start of the look-ahead special zone) is a random number value acquired at the time of winning the start opening, and is any one of "0" to "999" (1000 types). ..

For example, it is decided to execute the effect during the start of the look-ahead special zone, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is "HN00", and the random number value acquired at the time of winning to select the effect pattern is "0". When the value is any of "899", "ET00" is selected as the effect pattern in the look-ahead special zone, and the effect content is "in the look-ahead special zone" as the effect in the look-ahead special zone. The look-ahead effect of "Production A" is selected. In this case, in the variable display period (5000 milliseconds) of the special symbol, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the look-ahead effect corresponding to the "look-ahead special zone medium effect A" is performed. After the look-ahead effect is completed, the display area 13a of the display device 13 is displayed in the "missing" mode, and the special symbol stops fluctuating.

Although the types of look-ahead specialized zones will not be described in detail here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of look-ahead specialized zones are prepared, and a predetermined look-ahead specialization is appropriately performed according to the type of the look-ahead special zone. The effect at the start of the zone and the effect pattern in the look-ahead special zone are associated with each other. For example, if the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is a rush effect into the "look-ahead special zone A", the effect during the start of the look-ahead special zone is the same type of "look-ahead special zone medium effect A". Is selected. Further, for example, when the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is a rush effect into the "look-ahead special zone B", the effect during the start of the look-ahead special zone is the same type of "look-ahead special zone medium effect". "B" is selected. That is, the production system during the start of the look-ahead special zone is the same as the production system at the start of the look-ahead special zone. For example, the production at the start of the look-ahead special zone is a rush effect into the "look-ahead special zone A". In this case, a different system of "pre-reading specialized zone middle effect B" is not selected as the effect during the start of the pre-reading specialized zone.

Further, when a plurality of types of look-ahead special zones are provided, the type of the look-ahead special zone may be associated with the probability of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For example, the probability of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, which corresponds to the “look-ahead special zone B”, may be set to be higher than that corresponding to the “look-ahead special zone A”. In this case, by performing the look-ahead effect corresponding to the "look-ahead special zone B", it is possible to further increase the expectation of the transition to the gaming state which is advantageous to the player. That is, in this case, the player's expectation for the look-ahead special zone production can be changed according to the production content, so that the interest in the look-ahead special zone production can be improved.

(6) Variable production table (special production stage)

Next, the variable effect table (special effect stage) will be described with reference to FIG. 69.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special effect stage is selected in the "normal mode", the stock pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The variable effect table (special effect stage) shown in FIG. 69 is a table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the stock pseudo-continuous effect performed during the variable display period of the special symbol in the special effect stage.

As shown in FIG. 69, the variation pattern type ("HN00" to "HN27") and the effect pattern ("EG00" to "EG54") of the special symbol are selected for the variation effect table (special effect stage) ("EG00" to "EG54"). The correspondence relationship between the random number value to be determined) and the data set of the effect pattern and the stock pseudo-continuous effect flag determined by the random number value is defined. That is, the production content of the stock pseudo-continuous production is determined based on the type of variation pattern of the special symbol (“HN00” to “HN27”).

In addition, in the variation effect table (special effect stage), the variation time (variation display period of the special symbol) corresponding to each variation pattern, the winning type ("loss", "small hit" and "big hit"), and each The selection rate of the production pattern and the content of the production are also defined. In addition, the production of the production content specified in the variable production table (special production stage) is the above-mentioned "reach production", and when the stock pseudo-ream production is performed, the predetermined number of pseudo-ream "" It is executed after the end of "pseudo-continuous production".

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the variation time defined in the variation effect table (special effect stage) is substantially the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. Further, the random number value defined in the variable effect table (special effect stage) is a random number value acquired at the time of winning the starting opening, and is any one of "0" to "999" (1000 types). Further, the stock pseudo-continuous production flag defined in the variable production table (special production stage) is a flag for determining whether or not to perform the stock pseudo-continuous production, and when the stock pseudo-continuous production is performed, the stock is stocked. "1 (on)" is set to the value of the pseudo-continuous production flag.

For example, in the special effect stage in the normal mode, the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol is "HN27", and the random number values acquired at the time of winning to select the effect pattern are "100" to "999". In the case of any value of "", "EG54" is selected as the effect pattern of the stock pseudo-continuous effect, and "1" is set in the stock pseudo-continuous effect flag.

In this case, in the variable display period (45,000 milliseconds) of the special symbol, a predetermined "stock effect" (effect in which various mascots appear) is first performed, and then a predetermined number of pseudo-ream effects is performed. Is performed. Then, after the completion of the "pseudo-continuous production" of a predetermined number of pseudo-reams, a "reach effect" called "special effect D" is performed. For the contents of the "stock effect" and the "pseudo-ream effect" performed at this time, refer to the pseudo-ream number determination table (see FIG. 70 described later) and the mascot appearance number determination table (see FIG. 71 described later) described later. Is decided.

[Pseudo-ream count determination table]
Next, the pseudo-ream number determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 70.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of pseudo-reams in the stock pseudo-ream effect is the number (number of appearances) of "mascots C" (mascot points) appearing in the "stock effect" performed at the start of the stock pseudo-ream effect. It changes according to. The pseudo-ream number determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the number of pseudo-reams and the number of appearances of the mascot C when the execution of the stock pseudo-ream effect is determined.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the pseudo-ream number determination table, the type of variation pattern of the special symbol ("HN00" to "HN27"), the random number value for selecting (determining) the pseudo-ream number, and the random number are displayed. The correspondence with the data set of the number of pseudo-reams determined by the numerical value and the number of appearances of the mascot C is defined. In addition, in the pseudo-ream number determination table, the fluctuation time (variation display period of the special symbol) and winning type (“miss”, “small hit” and “big hit”) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and each data set The selectivity is also specified.

For example, in the special effect stage of the normal mode, it is decided to perform the stock pseudo-ream effect, and the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol is "HN27", in order to select the number of pseudo-reams. When the random number value acquired at the time of winning is any value from "900" to "999", the number of pseudo-reams in the stock pseudo-ream production is "15", and the number of appearances of the mascot C is "3". Become. In this case, as described in the variable effect table (special effect stage), "EG54" is selected as the effect pattern.

Therefore, in this case, in the variable display period (45,000 milliseconds) of the special symbol in which the stock pseudo-continuous production is performed, first, the production in which three mascots C appear in the "stock production" is performed, and then the production is performed. , 15 times of "pseudo-continuous production" will be performed. Then, after the 15 times of "pseudo-continuous production" are completed, a "reach production" called "special production D" is performed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of appearances of the mascot C is the minimum number of times the "pseudo-ream effect" is executed. Therefore, the table for determining the number of pseudo-reams in FIG. 70 is not shown. However, for example, even if the number of appearances of the mascot C is "1", it is also stipulated that the "pseudo-ream effect" is performed within the range of the number of pseudo-reams of "1" to "15". Further, since the number of appearances of the mascot C is the minimum number of executions of the "pseudo-continuous production", the number of mascots C appearing in the display area 13a of the display device 13 informs the minimum number of executions of the "pseudo-continuous production". It will be.

[Mascot appearance number determination table]
Next, the mascot appearance number determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 71.
As described above, in the "stock production" performed at the start of the stock pseudo-continuous production, the appearance of "mascot A" (mascot point "1") and / or "mascot B" (mascot point "5") causes mascot points. "Mascot C" appears when the mascot points are added and become 5 points or more. Therefore, there may be a plurality of combinations of the number of appearances of "mascot A" and the number of appearances of "mascot B" for making a predetermined number of "mascots C" appear. The mascot appearance number determination table is a combination of the appearance number of "mascot A" and the appearance number of "mascot B" according to the appearance number of mascot C determined by the above-mentioned pseudo-ream number determination table (see FIG. 70). It is a table that is referred to when determining.

In the mascot appearance number determination table, as shown in FIG. 71, the number of appearances of "mascot C" determined by lottery with reference to the pseudo-ream number determination table shown in FIG. 70, the number of appearances of "mascot A", and "mascot A" The correspondence between the random number value for selecting (determining) the combination of the number of appearances of "mascot B" and the combination data of the number of appearances of "mascot A" and the number of appearances of "mascot B" determined by the random value is Is regulated. In addition, the selection rate of each combination data is also defined in the mascot appearance number determination table.

For example, the number of appearances of "mascot C" determined by lottery with reference to the pseudo-ream number determination table shown in FIG. 70 is "2", and the number of appearances of "mascot A" and the number of appearances of "mascot B" are combined. If the random number value acquired at the time of winning to select (determine) is any value from "800" to "899", the number of appearances of "mascot A" is "4" and "mascot B". The number of appearances of is "2". The appearance order (appearance pattern) of "mascot A" and "mascot B" in the "stock effect" in this case can be arbitrarily set as long as two "mascots C" appear.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the number of pseudo-reams and the number of appearances of "mascot C" are uniquely determined according to the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. Not done. The number of appearances of "Mascot C" is determined separately by lottery regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and then the number of appearances of "Mascot A" and "Mascot B" are determined by lottery according to the number of appearances of the determined "Mascot C". The combination of the number of appearances of "" may be determined. Further, in this case, the number of appearances of each mascot may be determined by lottery in consideration of the fluctuation time set for each fluctuation pattern.

[Explanation of operation of main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 84.

[Main control main processing]
First, the main control main process controlled by the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main control main process in the present embodiment.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main CPU 71 first performs the initial setting process (S1). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs processes such as access permission to the main RAM 73, backup restoration, and initialization of the work area. Next, the main CPU 71 updates the initial value random number (S2). In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the initial random number counter value.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process (S3). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the special symbol game and the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) displayed on the special symbol display device 61. The details of the special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol control process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the normal symbol game and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 62. The details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a control process of the symbol display device (S5). In this process, the main CPU 71 changes the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) and the ordinary symbols based on the execution results of the special symbol control process (S3) and the normal symbol control process (S4). Control the display of the display.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a game information data generation process (S6). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates game information data to be transmitted to a hall computer or the like of a game store, and stores the game information data in the main RAM 73.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a storage / game state data generation process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 73.

Then, after the processing of S7, the main CPU 71 returns the processing to the processing of S2, and repeats the processing after S2 described above.

[Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the special symbol control process performed in S3 during the main control main process (see FIG. 72) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol control process in the present embodiment. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) shown in parentheses below the code of each processing step shown in FIG. 73 indicate the value of the control state flag, and this control state flag is a predetermined value in the main RAM 73. Stored in storage area. The main CPU 71 advances the special symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

First, the main CPU 71 loads the control state flag (S11). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73.

The main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes of S12 to S20 described later based on the value of the control state flag loaded in S11. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes S12 to S20 to be executed.

Further, the main CPU 71 executes the processing of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time and the like set for each processing of S12 to S20. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing the processes of each step. Of course, the system timer interrupt process described later (see FIG. 81 described later) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Then, when the process of S11 is completed, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory check process (S12).

In this process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of holds for variable display of the special symbol when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process, and when the number of holds is not “0”. (If there is a reserved ball), processing such as hit determination, determination of a special symbol, determination of a variation pattern of a special symbol, etc. is performed.

Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process (S13) described later, and corresponds to the variation pattern determined in this process. Set the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the process of S12 has elapsed, the special symbol variation time management process described later is set to be executed.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 71 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. The details of the special symbol memory check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (S13). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control status flag displays the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the time management process (S14) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer.

That is, by this process, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of S13 has elapsed. The details of the special symbol fluctuation time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 described later.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol display time management process (S14). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and when the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of S13 has elapsed, the result of the hit determination Is a "big hit" or a "small hit".

Then, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag with a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process (S15) described later. Set the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of S14 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag with a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (S20) described later. That is, in this case, it is set so that the special symbol game end processing described later is executed. The details of the special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78 described later.

Next, when the result of the hit determination is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit" in S14, the main CPU 71 performs the big hit start interval management process (S15). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of S14 elapses, the first In order to open the large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54, the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 72.

Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process (S16) during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) of the large winning opening. ) Is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. The details of the jackpot start interval management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 described later.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (S16). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 71 is conditioned that the number of large winning opening winning counters is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and is open. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has passed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied).

In S16, when one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the predetermined big winning opening (first big winning opening or second big winning opening). To do.

Then, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag with a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (S17) described later, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. .. That is, by this process, after the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time set in S17 has elapsed, the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (S17). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied.

When it is determined in S17 that the main CPU 71 does not satisfy the above conditions, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets the time corresponding to the inter-round interval in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

On the other hand, in S17, when it is determined that the main CPU 71 satisfies the above conditions, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval. (Big hit end interval time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in S17 has elapsed, the jackpot end interval processing described later is set to be executed.

Next, in S17, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 71 performs the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening ( S18).

In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the inter-round interval elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The value of the count counter is stored and updated so as to increase by "1".

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 71 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (S16) is set to be executed again after the process of S18.

Further, in S17, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the big hit end interval processing is performed (S19).

In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value indicating the jackpot end interval process (“07”), and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval elapses, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of S19. The details of the jackpot end interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Then, the main CPU 71 controls to shift the gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state when the jackpot symbol is the probabilistic symbol, and shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state when the jackpot symbol is the non-probable variable symbol. Control to make. When the big hit symbol is a symbol corresponding to the "small hit", the main CPU 71 controls to maintain the game state.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state or the small hit game state ends, or when the "loss" is won (S20).

In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 71 stores and updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) so as to decrease by “1”. To do. In addition, the main CPU 71 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the special symbol next time.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of S20, the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (S12) is set to be executed.

Then, after the processing of S20, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol control processing, and shifts the processing to S4 of the main control main processing (see FIG. 72).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is "missing", the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags to "00" and "01". , "02", "08" in that order.

As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (S12), special symbol variation time management process (S13), special symbol display time management process (S14), and special symbol game end process (S20) in this order. Execute at a predetermined timing.

Further, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags to "00" and " Set in the order of "01", "02", "03".

As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (S12), special symbol variation time management process (S13), special symbol display time management process (S14), and jackpot start interval management process (S15) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening (S16), monitoring processing of residual balls in the large winning opening (S17), and waiting time management processing before reopening of the large winning opening (S18) in this order at predetermined timings. And execute a big hit game or a small hit game.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (S16), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (S17), big hit end interval processing (S19), and special symbol game end processing (S20) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 81 described later) of S4 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 72 also branches the processing flow according to the status, as described later in the special symbol control process. ..

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in the present embodiment as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the special symbol memory check process performed in S12 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73) will be described. Note that FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol memory check process in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process (S31). In S31, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not "00" (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol memory check process and performs the process in the special symbol control process (FIG. 73). See).

On the other hand, in S31, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is "00" (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main CPU 71 wins the second start opening (variable display of the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) is "0" (S32).

In S32, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is not "0" (when the determination in S32 is NO), the main CPU 71 has a second number corresponding to the number of reserved second start opening prizes. The value of the start memory number is subtracted by "1" (S33).

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73. , It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is changing or pending.

In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is changing is stored as the start memory. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol for four times held. Data (information) is stored as a start memory.

The data included in the start memory stored in each of the second special symbol start storage areas is, for example, data such as a jackpot determination random value and a jackpot symbol random value acquired at the time of winning the second start port 45. ..

After the process of S33, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the second start opening winning (S34). In this process, the main CPU 71 transfers (stores) the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. Then, after the processing of S34, the main CPU 71 performs the processing of S39 described later.

On the other hand, in S32, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is "0" (when the determination in S32 is YES), the main CPU 71 receives the first start opening prize (first special symbol). It is determined whether or not the reserved number (first start storage number) of (variable display of) is “0” (S35).

In S35, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0" (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs a demo display process (S36). Then, after the process of S36, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol memory check process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

In the demo display process of S36, the main CPU 71 sets the demo display permission value in the main RAM 73. That is, the main CPU 71 has a predetermined time (for example, a state in which the start memory of the special symbol game is "0") when the number of reserved first start opening prizes and second start opening prizes is "0". If it is maintained (30 seconds), a predetermined value is set as the demo display permission value.

Further, when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value in the demo display process of S36, the main CPU 71 sets the demo display command data in the main RAM 73. The demo display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When the sub-control circuit 200 receives the demo display command data, the sub-control circuit 200 displays the demo screen in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

On the other hand, in S35, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0" (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main CPU 71 corresponds to the number of reserved first start opening prizes. The value of the first start storage number is subtracted by "1" (S37).

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73. , It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is changing or pending.

In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as start storage. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for four times held. Data (information) is stored as a start memory.

The data included in the start memory stored in each first special symbol start storage area is, for example, data such as a jackpot determination random value and a jackpot symbol random value acquired at the time of winning the first start port 44. ..

After the process of S37, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the first start port winning (S38). In this process, the main CPU 71 transfers (stores) the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. Then, after the processing of S38, the main CPU 71 performs the processing of S39 described later.

Next, after the processing of S34 or S38, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management processing (S39).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a jackpot determination process (S40). In this process, the main CPU 71 is extracted at the time of winning the start opening, and is set to the random number value for jackpot determination previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the determination value data is acquired by referring to the jackpot random number determination table (FIG. 56 or 57) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 71 determines (hit determination) which of the "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" is won based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol determination process (S41). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines the big hit symbol as a special symbol when the result of the hit determination is "big hit".

At this time, the main CPU 71 reads the jackpot symbol random value extracted at the time of starting winning, determines the special symbol based on the jackpot symbol random value and the result of the hit determination, and mainly uses the data indicating the special symbol. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 73.

Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 71 determines the big hit symbol as a special symbol, and when the result of the hit determination is "small hit" or "miss". , As a special symbol, a predetermined symbol set for each of "small hit" and "loss" is determined. Further, at this time, when the main CPU 71 determines the special symbol as a special display mode (display mode in which the jackpot symbol becomes the probabilistic symbol), the main CPU 71 controls to shift to the probabilistic gaming state.

The data indicating the special symbol stored in this way is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special symbol display device 61. Further, the data indicating the special symbol stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a derived symbol designation command.

As a result, in the sub-control circuit 200, the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13. The details of the special symbol determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 described later.

Next, the main CPU 71 determines the type of game state (probability change, time reduction and normal), the result of hit determination (winning type: "big hit", "small hit" or "miss"), and the number of pending special symbols (starting). The fluctuation pattern determination process is performed based on the number of memories), a special symbol (big hit symbol, etc.), and the like (S42).

In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a random value for selecting the effect condition. The main CPU 71 refers to a jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 60) for determining a variation pattern based on a special symbol (big hit symbol or the like) determined as described above.

Then, the main CPU 71 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the effect condition selection random number value extracted from the effect condition selection random number counter and the jackpot type determination table, and stores it in the predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines the variation display mode (variation display time, etc.) of the special symbol based on the data indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The data showing the variation pattern of the stored special symbol is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 variably displays the special symbol in the determined variation pattern.

Further, the data indicating the variation pattern of the stored special symbol is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a variation command (variation pattern designation command). Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect display with the effect pattern corresponding to the received variable command.

After the processing of S42, the main CPU 71 sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (S43). Next, the main CPU 71 clears the information (data) of the storage area used for the variable display this time (S44). Then, after the process of S44, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol memory check process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

[Special symbol determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the special symbol determination process performed in S41 during the special symbol memory check process (see FIG. 74) will be described. Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol determination process in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination performed in the process of S40 during the special symbol memory check process is a "big hit" (S51).

In S51, when the main CPU 71 determines that the result of the hit determination is "big hit" (when the determination in S51 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random number value (S52). ).

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the determined jackpot symbol (S53). Then, after the process of S53, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol determination process, and shifts the process to S42 during the special symbol memory check process (see FIG. 74).

In the process of S52, the main CPU 71 supplies the data of the jackpot symbol to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 makes the special symbol variable and displays, and stops and displays the special symbol in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and transmits the command as a derived symbol designation command to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 derives and displays the jackpot mode of the identification symbol in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

On the other hand, in S51, when the main CPU 71 determines that the result of the hit determination is not "big hit" (when the determination in S51 is NO), the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination is "small hit". Determine (S54).

In S54, when the main CPU 71 determines that the result of the hit determination is "small hit" (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 71 has a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) corresponding to the "small hit". ) Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 (S55). Then, after the process of S55, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol determination process, and shifts the process to S42 during the special symbol memory check process (see FIG. 74).

In the process of S55, the main CPU 71 supplies the data of the small hit symbol to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 makes the special symbol variable and displays, and stops and displays the special symbol in an manner based on the data of the small hit symbol.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command for a small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and transmits the command as a derived symbol designation command to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 derives and displays the small hit mode of the identification symbol in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

On the other hand, in S54, when the main CPU 71 determines that the result of the hit determination is not "small hit" (when the determination in S54 is NO), the main CPU 71 has a predetermined special symbol (loss symbol) corresponding to "loss". Data is set (S56). Then, after the process of S56, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol determination process, and shifts the process to S42 during the special symbol memory check process (see FIG. 74).

In the process of S56, the main CPU 71 supplies the data of the lost symbol to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 makes the special symbol variable and displays, and stops and displays the special symbol in an manner based on the data of the lost symbol.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and transmits the command as a derived symbol designation command to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 derives and displays the lost mode of the identification symbol in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol fluctuation time management process performed in S13 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73) will be described. Note that FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process (S61). In S61, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs the special symbol variation time management process. It ends and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 71 is the waiting time timer. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" (S62). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted.

In S62, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (when the determination in S62 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management process and performs the process as a special symbol control process. (See FIG. 73).

On the other hand, in S62, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (when the determination in S62 is YES), the main CPU 71 indicates a special symbol display time management process in the state control flag. The value (“02”) is set (S63).

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the symbol stop command in the main RAM 73 (S64). The symbol stop command set in the main RAM 73 is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub-control circuit 200 recognizes that the special symbol is stopped when the symbol stop command is received.

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the waiting time (for example, 10 milliseconds) after the fluctuation is confirmed in the waiting time timer (S65). The waiting time after the fluctuation is confirmed (variation start waiting time) is the waiting time from the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to the start of the fluctuation display of the next special symbol. Then, after the processing of S65, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

[Special symbol display time management process]
Next, the special symbol display time management process performed in S14 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73) will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. 77 and 78 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol display time management process in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs the special symbol display time management process. It ends and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 71 is the waiting time timer. It is determined whether or not the value (waiting time) is "0" (S72). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation start waiting time) after the fluctuation is confirmed set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted.

In S72, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (when the determination in S72 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process and performs the process as a special symbol control process. Return to (see FIG. 73).

On the other hand, in S72, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (when the determination in S72 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". Determine (S73).

In S73, when the main CPU 71 determines that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S85 described later. On the other hand, in S73, when the main CPU 71 determines that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (when the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value indicating the special symbol game end process ("08"). ) Is set (S74).

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is "0" (S75).

In S75, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is “0” (when the determination in S75 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S77 described later. On the other hand, in S75, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is not "0" (when S75 is NO determination), the main CPU 71 subtracts the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter by "1". (S76).

After the processing of S76, or when the determination of S75 is YES, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the probability change state change number counter is “0” (S77).

In S77, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change state fluctuation counter is “0” (when the determination in S77 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S79 described later.

On the other hand, in S77, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change state change counter is not "0" (when the determination in S77 is NO), the main CPU 71 subtracts the value of the probability change state change counter by "1". (S78).

After the processing of S78, or when the determination of YES in S77, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is “0” (S79).

In S79, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S79 is NO), is the main CPU 71 the value of the probability variation state fluctuation counter "0"? Whether or not it is determined (S80).

In S80, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change state change count counter is not "0" (when the determination in S80 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process and controls the process. Return to processing (see FIG. 73).

On the other hand, in S80, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change state change number counter is "0" (when the determination in S80 is YES), the main CPU 71 clears the game state flag (S81).

Specifically, the main CPU 71 clears the probability change flag. Next, the main CPU 71 sets a game state command corresponding to the game state of "low probability with time reduction" (the state of "normal game state" and "time reduction game state") (S82). Then, after the processing of S82, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

In S79, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time saving state change number counter is "0" (when the determination in S79 is YES), the main CPU 71 has the value of the probability change state change number counter "0". Whether or not it is determined (S83).

In S83, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change state change number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S83 is NO), the main CPU 71 clears the game state flag (S84).

Specifically, the main CPU 71 clears the time saving flag. Next, the main CPU 71 sets a game state command corresponding to the game state of "high probability no time reduction" (a state of "probability variation game state" and "non-time reduction game state") (S85). Then, after the processing of S85, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

On the other hand, in S83, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability change state change number counter is "0" (when the determination in S83 is YES), the main CPU 71 clears the game state flag (S86). Specifically, the main CPU 71 clears the time saving flag and the probability change flag.

Next, the main CPU 71 sets a game state command corresponding to the game state of "low probability no time reduction" (a state of "normal game state" and "non-time reduction game state") (S87). Then, after the processing of S87, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

Here, returning to the process of S73 again, the process performed when S73 is a YES determination will be described. If the determination in S73 is YES, the main CPU 71 sets the jackpot flag to the ON state (S88). The jackpot flag is a flag indicating whether or not to perform a jackpot game.

Next, the main CPU 71 clears the value of the large winning opening opening count counter, the value of the game state flag, and the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter (S89). Next, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process (S90).

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 milliseconds) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (S91). Next, the main CPU 71 sets the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 73 (S92).

Next, the main CPU 71 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 60), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (the upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (type of the symbol designation command) in the main RAM 73. (S93).

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the round number display LED pattern flag to the ON state (S94). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. Then, after the processing of S94, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

[Big hit start interval management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the jackpot start interval management process performed in S15 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73) will be described. Note that FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot start interval management process in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process (S101).

In S101, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process (when the determination in S101 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot start interval management process. , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

On the other hand, in S101, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process (when the determination in S101 is YES), the main CPU 71 is the value of the waiting time timer. Is determined to be "0" (S102). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the jackpot start interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted.

In S102, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (when the determination in S102 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot start interval management process and performs the process as a special symbol control process (when the process is determined to be NO). (See FIG. 73).

On the other hand, in S102, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (when the determination in S102 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the display command data during the opening of the winning opening in the main RAM 73. (S103).

The large winning opening opening display command data set in the main RAM 73 by this process is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening (S104). Next, the main CPU 71 clears the large winning opening winning counter (S105). Next, the main CPU 71 sets the large winning opening opening time in the waiting time timer (S106).

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the data during the opening of the large winning opening (S107). The large winning opening opening data is data indicating that the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54 is open.

In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to open the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54.

By updating the variables in this way, the solenoid actuator related to the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54 is driven to open the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54. Then, after the process of S107, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot start interval management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

[Big hit end interval processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot end interval process performed in S19 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73) will be described. Note that FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end interval processing in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (S111).

In S111, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the jackpot end interval processing (“07”) (when the determination in S111 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval processing and processes it. Is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 73).

On the other hand, in S111, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the jackpot end interval processing (“07”) (when the determination in S111 is YES), the value of the waiting time timer is set in the main CPU 71. It is determined whether or not it is "0" (S112). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted.

In S112, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (when the determination in S112 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process and performs the process as a special symbol control process (FIG. FIG. See 73). On the other hand, in S112, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in S112), the main CPU 71 clears the round number display LED pattern flag (S113).

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end processing (S114). Next, the main CPU 71 clears the game state flag (S115).

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the probability change flag is "1" (whether the probability change flag is in the ON state) (S116). As described above, in the present embodiment, after the big hit game is completed, the game state becomes the "probability change game state", so the value of the probability change flag is also "1".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, S116 is usually determined to be YES. In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 60, when the value of the probability variation flag is specified for the symbol designation command (big hit symbol), in S116, the main CPU 71 refers to the jackpot type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation flag is "1" according to the type of the jackpot symbol (symbol designation command) determined by the special symbol determination process.

In S116, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability variation flag is not "1" (when the determination in S116 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S119 described later. On the other hand, in S116, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the probability variation flag is "1" (when the determination in S116 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the game state flag (S117). Specifically, the main CPU 71 sets the probability change flag. Next, the main CPU 71 sets “200” to the value of the probability change state change number counter (S118).

Then, after the processing of S118 or when the determination in S116 is NO, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time saving flag is "1" (whether the time saving flag is in the ON state) or not (S119).

In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the jackpot type determination table, and the value of the time saving flag according to the type of the jackpot symbol (symbol designation command) determined by the special symbol determination process and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Determines whether or not is "1".

In S119, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time saving flag is "1" (when the determination in S119 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the "time saving game state" in the game state flag (S120). ..

Specifically, the main CPU 71 sets the time saving flag. Next, the main CPU 71 refers to the jackpot type determination table, and the value of the corresponding time reduction number of times according to the type of the jackpot symbol (symbol designation command) determined by the special symbol determination process and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Is set in the time saving state fluctuation count counter (S121). Then, after the processing of S121, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

On the other hand, in S119, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time saving flag is not "1" (when the determination in S119 is NO), the main CPU 71 sets the "non-time saving game state" in the game state flag (when the game state flag is determined). S122). Then, after the processing of S122, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 73).

[Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the normal symbol control process performed in S4 during the main control main process (see FIG. 72) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol control process in the present embodiment.

The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses under the code of each processing step in the flowchart shown in FIG. 81 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main. It is stored in a predetermined storage area in the RAM 73. The main CPU 71 advances the normal symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

First, the main CPU 71 loads the normal symbol control state flag (S131). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 73.

The main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes of S132 to S136 described later based on the value of the normal symbol control state flag loaded in S131. This normal control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and enables any process of S132 to S136 to be executed.

Further, the main CPU 71 executes the processing of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time and the like set for each processing of S132 to S136. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing the processes of each step. Of course, the system timer interrupt process described later (see FIG. 82 described later) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Then, when the process of S131 is completed, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol memory check process (S132).

In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of pending normal symbols for variable display, and the number of reserved symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as hit determination is performed.

Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (S133) described later, and sets the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set to the wait time timer. That is, by this process, after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol determined in the process of S132 has elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (S133). In this process, in the main CPU 71, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the normal symbol control state flag is added to the normal symbol control state flag, which will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (S134) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer.

That is, by this process, after the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of S133 elapses, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (S134). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and when the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of S133 has elapsed, the hit determination is made. Judge whether or not the result of is "hit".

Then, when the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 71 performs the normal electric accessory release setting process, and sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value indicating the normal electric accessory release process (S135) described later (S135). "03") is set. That is, this process is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "hit", the main CPU 71 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process (S136) described later. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the hit determination is determined to be "hit" in S134, the main CPU 71 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (S135). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process, the main CPU 71 has received a predetermined number of start prizes while the normal electric accessory 46 is open. It is determined whether or not one of the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied.

In S135, when one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the blade member which is the ordinary electric accessory 46. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end processing (S136) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol game end process (S136). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 71 reduces the data indicating the pending number of variable display of the normal symbol by “1”. Update memory to.

Further, the main CPU 71 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of S136, the above-mentioned normal symbol memory check process (S132) is set to be executed.

Then, after the processing of S136, the main CPU 71 ends the normal symbol control processing, and shifts the processing to S5 of the main control main processing (FIG. 72).

[System timer interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 interrupts the main process at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt process even during the execution of the main process. Specifically, the main CPU 71 executes the system timer interrupt process according to the clock pulse generated from the reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

Here, the system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. Note that FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the system timer interrupt process according to the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 71 saves the data (information) of each register (S141). Next, the main CPU 71 performs a random number update process (S142). In this process, the main CPU 71 updates various random value values extracted from the jackpot determination counter, the symbol determination counter, the hit determination counter, the fall determination counter, the fluctuation pattern determination counter, the effect pattern determination counter, and the like. ..

The jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness if the counter value update timing is indefinite. Therefore, the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at a fixed timing every 2 milliseconds in order to ensure fairness.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a switch input detection process (S143). In this process, the main CPU 71 detects winning or passing through the various starting ports, various winning ports, and the ball passage detector 43. The details of the switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a timer update process (S144). Specifically, the main CPU 71 has various timers such as a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200, and a large winning opening opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening. Update process.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a command output process (S145). In this process, the main CPU 71 outputs various commands such as a winning command and a variable command to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs game information output processing (S146). In this process, the main CPU 71 outputs various information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 123, and the like to the hall computer of the game store.

Next, the main CPU 71 restores the data of each register saved in S141 (S147). Then, after the process of S147, the main CPU 71 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection process]
Next, the switch input detection process performed in S143 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG. 83. Note that FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch input detection process in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 71 performs a start port passage detection process (S151). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 44 or the second start port 45.

That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not the winning of the game ball is detected by the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a or the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a. The details of the start port passage detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S152). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 51 or 52. That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not the winning of the game ball is detected by the general winning ball sensor 51a or 52a. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 51 or 52 is detected, the main CPU 71 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the winning.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S153). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54.

That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not the winning of the game ball is detected by the first special winning opening solenoid 53b or the second special winning opening solenoid 54b. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54 is detected, the main CPU 71 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the winning.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a gate passage detection process (S154). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball passage detector 43. That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected by the passing ball sensor 43a.

Then, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the ball passage detector 43, the main CPU 71 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the passage. Then, after the processing of S154, the main CPU 71 ends the switch input detection processing, and shifts the processing to S144 of the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 81).

[Starting port passage detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the start port passage detection process performed in S151 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 83) will be described. Note that FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port passage detection process in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 44 is detected based on the output signal of the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a (S161).

In S161, when the main CPU 71 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 44 has not been detected (when the determination in S161 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S167 described later.

On the other hand, in S161, when the main CPU 71 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 44 is detected (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 71 pays out information corresponding to the first starting port winning. Is set in the main RAM 73 (S162). In the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44, three game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the process of S162, the payout information of the three game balls is set.

After the process of S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) of the first start opening winning (variable display of the first special symbol) is less than "4" (S163).

In S163, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not less than "4" (when the determination in S163 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S167 described later. On the other hand, in S163, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is less than "4" (when the determination in S163 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines the number of reserved first start opening prizes. The process of adding "1" is performed (S164).

After the processing of S164, the main CPU 71 acquires various random number values used for the lottery, and stores the acquired various random number values in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 (S165). Specifically, the main CPU 71 acquires the jackpot determination random number value and the jackpot symbol random value.

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the hold number increase command data of the first start opening winning in the main RAM 73 (S166). The command data for increasing the number of reserved first start port prizes set in the main RAM 73 by this process is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200.

After the processing of S166, or when S161 or S163 is determined to be NO, has the main CPU 71 detected the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 45 based on the output signal of the second starting port winning ball sensor 45a? Whether or not it is determined (S167).

In S167, when the main CPU 71 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second start port 45 has not been detected (when the determination in S167 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the start port passage detection process and processes the process. To S152 of the switch input detection process (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S167, when the main CPU 71 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 45 has been detected (when the determination in S167 is YES), the main CPU 71 has the payout information corresponding to the second starting port winning. Is set in the main RAM 73 (S168). In the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 45, three game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the process of S168, the payout information of the three game balls is set.

After the process of S168, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) of the second start opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is less than "4" (S169).

In S169, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved second start port prizes is not less than "4" (when the determination in S169 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the start port passage detection process and switches the process. Move to S152 of the input detection process (FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S169, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is less than "4" (when the determination in S169 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines the number of reserved second start opening prizes. The process of adding "1" is performed (S170).

After the processing of S170, the main CPU 71 acquires various random number values used for the lottery, and stores the acquired various random number values in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 (S171). Specifically, the main CPU 71 acquires the jackpot determination random number value and the jackpot symbol random value.

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the hold number increase command data of the second start opening winning in the main RAM 73 (S172). The command data for increasing the number of reserved second start port prizes set in the main RAM 73 by this process is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Then, after the process of S172, the main CPU 71 ends the start port passage detection process and shifts the process to S152 of the switch input detection process (FIG. 83).

As described above, in the start port passage detection process, when a start port prize occurs during the variable display period of the special symbol, the lottery result (various random values) performed at the time of the prize is stored as a reserved ball, and this process is performed. , Is executed by the main control circuit 70.

That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means (holding ball storage means) for storing the lottery result performed at the time of winning as a holding ball when a starting port winning occurs during the variable display period of the special symbol.

[Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 92. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70, and performs various processes based on the various commands.

[Sub-control main processing]
First, the sub-control main process controlled by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-control main process in the present embodiment. The sub-control main process is a process started when the power is turned on.

First, the sub CPU 201 performs an initialization process (S181). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs various initial setting processes such as an access permission process for the work RAM 203 and an initialization process for the work area of the work RAM 203.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a random number update process (S182). In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number value stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a command analysis process (S183). In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes the contents of the command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203. The details of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs an effect process (S184). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets (registers) various data necessary for executing various notification effects and look-ahead special zone effects in each of the above-mentioned effect modes. The registration (setting) process of various effects performed in the process of S184 will be described separately for each effect with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a display control process (S185). In this process, first, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying a predetermined effect image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 205.

Next, the VDP (Video Display Processor) provided in the display control circuit 205 captures various image data such as decorative pattern data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. Read from the data ROM. Then, the VDP superimposes various read image data to display a predetermined effect image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs voice control processing (S186). In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice control circuit 206 to control the voice generated from the speaker 11. Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a lamp control process (S187).

In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the lamp control circuit 207 to control the light emission of the lamp 18. Then, after the processing of S187, the sub CPU 201 returns the processing to the processing of S182, and repeats the processing after S182.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the various effects described above are executed by the sub-control circuit 200 by the series of effect control processes of S184 to S187. That is, the sub-control circuit 200 is, for example, a means for executing the above-mentioned effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone (first pre-reading control means), or the above-mentioned look-ahead special zone. It also serves as a means (second pre-production control means) for executing the production inside. Further, the sub-control circuit 200 is a means for controlling the operation of the latency expectation notification effect performed in the mode A described above (expectation degree notification means), and a means for controlling the operation of the latency expectation number notification effect performed in the mode B described above. It also serves as (first lottery number notification means) and means for controlling the operation of the time saving number notification effect performed in the mode C described above (second lottery number notification means). Further, the sub-control circuit 200 is a means for controlling the operation of the "stock effect" in the stock pseudo-ream effect performed in the special effect stage in the normal mode described above (pseudo-ream effect), or a "pseudo-ream effect". It also serves as a means for controlling the operation (pseudo-continuous production means).

[Command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the command analysis process performed in S183 during the sub-control main process (see FIG. 85) will be described. Note that FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the command analysis process in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a command received in the sub control circuit interrupt process (see FIG. 92 described later) described later (S191). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203.

In S191, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no received command (NO in S191), the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process and shifts the process to S184 of the sub-control main process (see FIG. 85). Transfer.

On the other hand, in S191, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command (YES in S191), the sub CPU 201 reads the received command and analyzes the content of the received command (S192).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a variation command (a command that specifies the content of the variation pattern of the special symbol) based on the analysis result of the reception command in S192 (S193).

In S193, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a winning command (YES in S193), the sub CPU 201 performs a look-ahead effect flag determination process (S194). In this process, the sub CPU 201 refers to the look-ahead effect flag table (see FIG. 63), and based on the winning pattern, each value (“0” or “1”) of the variable look-ahead flag and the look-ahead special zone flag is drawn by lottery. ) Is selected and set. The details of the look-ahead effect flag determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later. Then, after the processing of S194, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing, and shifts the processing to S184 of the sub-control main processing (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S193, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a winning command (NO in S193), the sub CPU 201 specifies that the received command is a variable command (the content of the variable pattern of the special symbol). It is determined whether or not it is a command) (S195).

In S193, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a variable command (YES in S193), the sub CPU 201 performs the variable effect pattern determination process (S194). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines various variation effect patterns of the special symbol (including the effect patterns of the look-ahead special zone effect and the stock pseudo-continuous effect) based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. The details of the variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89 described later. Then, after the processing of S196, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing, and shifts the processing to S184 of the sub-control main processing (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S195, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a variable command (NO in S195), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a derived symbol designation command (when the received command is a derived symbol designation command). S195).

In S197, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the derived symbol designation command (when the determination in S197 is YES), the sub CPU 201 is based on the derived symbol designation command, and the sub CPU 201 determines the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. The decorative design to be derived and displayed on the screen is determined (S198). Then, after the processing of S196, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing, and shifts the processing to S184 of the sub-control main processing (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S197, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the derived symbol designation command (NO determination in S197), the sub CPU 201 sets the effect control data corresponding to the received command (S199). Then, after the processing of S199, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing, and shifts the processing to S184 of the sub-control main processing (see FIG. 85).

[Look-ahead effect flag determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the look-ahead effect flag determination process performed in S194 during the command analysis process (see FIG. 86) will be described. Note that FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead effect flag determination process in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 refers to the look-ahead effect flag table (see FIG. 63), and based on the winning command (the winning pattern obtained from the analysis result of the reception command), each value of the variable look-ahead flag and the look-ahead specialized zone flag. (“0” or “1”) is selected (S201). In the present embodiment, the values of the variable look-ahead flag and the look-ahead special zone flag are determined by lottery based on the winning command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning command, the type of effect, etc. The values of the variable look-ahead flag and the look-ahead special zone flag may be uniquely determined accordingly.

Next, the sub CPU 201 registers the value of the selected variable look-ahead flag in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203 (S202). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the selected read-ahead special zone flag is "1" (S203).

In S203, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the look-ahead special zone flag is not "1" (when the determination in S203 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the look-ahead effect flag determination process and also commands analysis process ( (See FIG. 86) also ends. On the other hand, in S203, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the look-ahead special zone flag is "1" (when the determination in S203 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the look-ahead special zone flag in the work RAM 203. Register in a predetermined area (S204).

Next, the sub CPU 201 registers the look-ahead special zone start flag for the variable display (holding ball) of the predetermined special symbol from the variable display (holding ball) of the reserved special symbol (S205). In this process, the variable display (holding ball) of the special symbol in which the look-ahead special zone start flag is set is determined by the lottery process. By this process, the look-ahead special zone is started from the variable display of the predetermined special symbol in which the look-ahead special zone start flag is registered.

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the look-ahead special zone for the variable display (hold ball) of the special symbol determined to be transferred to the look-ahead special zone from the reserved special symbol variable display (hold ball). Register the end flag (S206). The look-ahead special zone end flag is a flag indicating whether or not to end the look-ahead special zone effect, and when the value of the look-ahead special zone end flag is "1", the look-ahead special zone effect is produced. If the value of the look-ahead special zone end flag is "0", the look-ahead special zone production is continued. That is, the value of the look-ahead special zone end flag is "0" in the hold ball related to the look-ahead special zone effect other than the variable display (hold ball) of the special symbol for which the transition to the look-ahead special zone is determined.

Then, after the processing of S206, the sub CPU 201 ends the look-ahead effect flag determination processing, and also ends the command analysis processing (see FIG. 86).

As described above, in the look-ahead effect flag determination process, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect (pre-effect) based on the content of the winning pattern (content of the reserved ball) acquired at the start opening winning. The process is executed by the sub-control circuit 200. That is, the sub-control circuit 200 also serves as a means (pre-effect determination means) for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect (pre-effect).

[Variation effect pattern determination process]
Next, the variation effect pattern determination process performed in S196 during the command analysis process (see FIG. 86) will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. It should be noted that FIGS. 88 and 89 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the variation effect pattern determination process in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current production mode is the normal mode and the production stage is a special production stage that performs stock pseudo continuous production (S211). In the normal mode, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift the production stage to a special production stage for performing stock pseudo-continuous production.

In S211 when the sub CPU 201 determines that the effect mode is the normal mode and the effect stage is a special effect stage for performing the stock pseudo continuous effect (when the determination in S211 is YES), the sub CPU 201 is described in S218 described later. Perform processing. On the other hand, in S211 when the sub CPU 201 determines that the effect mode is the normal mode and the effect stage is not the special effect stage for performing the stock pseudo-continuous effect (when the determination in S211 is NO), the sub CPU 201 specializes in read-ahead. It is determined whether or not the value of the zone flag is "1" (on state) (S212).

In S212, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the look-ahead special zone flag is "1" (when the determination in S212 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process (S217). .. The details of the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. Then, after the process of S217, the sub CPU 201 ends the variation effect pattern determination process, and also ends the command analysis process (see FIG. 86).

On the other hand, in S212, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the read-ahead special zone flag is not "1" (when the determination in S212 is NO), the sub CPU 201 has a variable look-ahead flag value of "1" (on state). ) Or not (S213).

In S213, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the variation look-ahead flag is not "1" (when the determination in S213 is NO), the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation effect table (no look-ahead) in FIG. 64 and receives a reception command. Based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of (variation command), the variation effect pattern when there is no look-ahead effect is determined by lottery (S214).

Specifically, the sub CPU 201 selects the effect pattern and the pseudo-continuous effect flag defined in the variation effect table (no look-ahead) of FIG. 64 based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined variation effect pattern in the work RAM 203. Then, after the processing of S214, the sub CPU 201 ends the variation effect pattern determination processing, and also ends the command analysis processing (see FIG. 86).

On the other hand, in S213, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the variation look-ahead flag is "1" (when the determination in S213 is YES), the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation effect table (with look-ahead) of FIG. Based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the reception command (variation command), the variation effect pattern with the look-ahead effect is determined by lottery (S215). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 selects the effect pattern defined in the variation effect table (with look-ahead) of FIG. 65, the symbol effect, and / or the background effect, based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined variation effect pattern in the work RAM 203.

After the processing of S215, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the variable look-ahead flag to "0" (S216). Then, after the process of S216, the sub CPU 201 ends the variation effect pattern determination process, and also ends the command analysis process (see FIG. 86).

Here, returning to the description of the process of S211 again, the process performed when S211 is a YES determination will be described. When the determination in S211 is YES, the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation effect table (special effect stage) of FIG. 69, and determines the variation effect pattern in the special effect stage by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol (S218). .. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 is defined in the variation effect table (special effect stage) of FIG. 69 by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the reception command (variation command). Select the effect pattern and the stock pseudo-ream pseudo-ream effect flag. Then, the sub CPU 201 and the determined variation effect pattern are stored in the work RAM 203.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the stock pseudo-continuous production flag is "1" (S219). In S219, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the stock pseudo-continuous effect flag is not "1" (when the determination in S219 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the variation effect pattern determination process and also performs the command analysis process (command analysis process). (See FIG. 86) also ends.

On the other hand, in S219, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the stock pseudo-continuous production flag is "1" (when the determination in S219 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the stock pseudo-continuous production pattern determination process (S220). ). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines, for example, the number of pseudo-reams in the stock pseudo-ream effect, the appearance mode of various mascots, and the like. The details of the stock pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. Then, after the processing of S220, the sub CPU 201 ends the variation effect pattern determination processing, and also ends the command analysis processing (see FIG. 86).

[Look-ahead special zone production pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process performed in S217 in the variation effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89) will be described. Note that FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead specialized zone effect pattern determination process in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead special zone start flag set at the time of acquiring the winning pattern is "1" (on state) (S231). That is, in this determination process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current variation display of the special symbol is the variation display of the special symbol that produces the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone.

In S231, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the read-ahead special zone start flag is "1" (when the determination in S231 is YES), that is, when the read-ahead special zone starts in the variable display of the current special symbol. When performing the effect of, the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) of FIG. 67, and pre-reads by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the reception command. The variable effect pattern in the effect at the start of the special zone is determined (S232). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 selects the effect pattern defined in the variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead specialization zone) of FIG. 67, the symbol effect, and the background effect based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. ..

After the processing of S232, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the read-ahead special zone start flag to "0" (S233). Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the read-ahead special zone flag to "1" (S234). Then, after the processing of S234, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S238 described later.

On the other hand, in S231, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the read-ahead special zone start flag is not "1" (when the determination in S231 is NO), the sub CPU 201 has a read-ahead special zone in-flag value of "1". "(On state) or not is determined (S235). That is, in this determination process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current variation display of the special symbol is the variation display of the special symbol that produces the effect in the look-ahead special zone. The value of the look-ahead special zone flag is set to "1" (on state) when the change effect pattern of the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is determined, as described in the process of S234 above. The flag.

In S235, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-reading special zone flag is "1" (when S235 is YES), that is, in the pre-reading special zone in the current variation display of the special symbol. When performing the effect, the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation effect table (in the look-ahead specialization zone) of FIG. 68, and based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command, the sub CPU 201 specializes in look-ahead by lottery. The variable effect pattern in the effect in the zone is determined (S236). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern defined in the variation effect table (in the look-ahead specialization zone) of FIG. 68 based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. Then, after the processing of S236, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S238 described later.

On the other hand, in S235, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-reading special zone flag is not "1" (when S235 is NO), that is, the pre-reading specialized zone starts in the variable display of the current special symbol. When performing the previous effect, the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation effect table of FIG. 66 (before the start of the look-ahead specialization zone), and is selected by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command. The variable effect pattern in the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is determined (S237). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern defined in the variation effect table of FIG. 66 (before the start of the look-ahead special zone), and a symbol effect or a background effect, based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. .. Then, after the processing of S237, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S238 described later.

After the processing of S234, S236 or S237, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead special zone end flag set at the time of acquiring the winning pattern is "1" (on state) (S238). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current special symbol variation display is the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball for which the transition to the look-ahead special zone has been determined.

In S238, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the read-ahead special zone end flag is not "1" (when the determination in S238 is NO), that is, when the look-ahead special zone effect is continued, the sub CPU 201 Along with ending the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process, the variation effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S238, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the read-ahead special zone end flag is "1" (when the determination in S238 is YES), that is, when the read-ahead special zone effect is terminated, the sub CPU 201 Sets the value of the read-ahead special zone flag to "0" (S239). Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the read-ahead special zone flag to "0" (S240). Then, after the processing of S240, the sub CPU 201 ends the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process, and also ends the variation effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89).

[Stock pseudo-continuous production pattern determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the stock pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination process performed in S220 in the variation effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89) will be described. Note that FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the stock pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination process in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 refers to the pseudo-ream number determination table of FIG. 70, and determines the pseudo-ream number by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the reception command (S251). Then, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined number of pseudo-reams in the work RAM 203.

Next, the sub CPU 201 refers to the pseudo-ream number determination table of FIG. 70, and determines the number of appearances of the mascot C based on the pseudo-ream number determined in S251 (S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 may determine the number of appearances of the mascot C by lottery based on the number of pseudo-reams. Then, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined number of appearances of the mascot C in the work RAM 203. In the present embodiment, as shown in the pseudo-ream number determination table of FIG. 70, the pseudo-ream number and the mascot C appearance number in the stock pseudo-ream effect can be simultaneously determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. In that case, the processes of S251 and S252 may be performed at the same time.

Next, the sub CPU 201 refers to the mascot appearance number determination table of FIG. 71, and determines the mascot A appearance number and the mascot B appearance number by lottery based on the mascot C appearance number determined in S252 (S253). Then, the sub CPU 201 stores the determined number of appearances of mascot A and the number of appearances of mascot B in the work RAM 203.

Next, the sub CPU 201 is based on the number of appearances of mascot A and the number of appearances of mascot B determined in S253, and the appearance mode of mascot A and mascot B (for example, the timing at which each mascot appears, each mascot) in the stock pseudo-continuous production. Appearance order, etc.) is determined (S254). Then, after the processing of S254, the sub CPU 201 ends the stock pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination process, and also ends the variable effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89).

As described above, in S252 of the stock pseudo-ream effect pattern determination process, the number of appearances of the mascot C (the number of times the appearance effect of the mascot C is executed) is determined based on the number of pseudo-reams, and this process is performed by the sub-control circuit 200. Is executed by. That is, the sub-control circuit 200 also serves as a means (first effect number determination means) for determining the number of appearances of the mascot C based on the pseudo-ream count. Further, in S253 of the stock pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination process, the number of appearances of mascots A and B (the number of executions of the appearance effect of mascots A and B) is determined based on the number of appearances of mascot C, and this process is subordinate. It is executed by the control circuit 200. That is, the sub-control circuit 200 also serves as a means for determining the number of appearances of the mascots A and B (second effect number determination means) based on the number of appearances of the mascot C.

[Sub-control circuit interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 interrupts the sub control main process and executes the interrupt process at a predetermined cycle even during the execution of the sub control main process. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 executes an interrupt process according to a clock pulse generated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) in the sub control circuit 200. ..

Here, the sub-control circuit interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 92. Note that FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-control circuit interrupt process in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 performs a random number update process (S261). In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number value stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203. Further, at this time, the sub CPU 201 performs a random number update process so as to increase the value of the effect pattern determination counter by "1".

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a command reception process (S262). In this process, the sub CPU 201 receives various commands transmitted from various control circuits (main control circuit 70, display control circuit 205, voice control circuit 206, lamp control circuit 207, etc.) to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a timer update process (S263). In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates various timers stored in the work RAM 203 for counting various processing times.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a command output process (S264). In this process, the sub CPU 201 outputs various commands to various control circuits (display control circuit 205, voice control circuit 206, lamp control circuit 207, etc.).

Then, after the process of S264, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub control circuit interrupt process. As a result, the address of the processing program returns to the address before the interrupt processing occurred.

<Various notification processing by sub-control circuit>
Next, the registration process of various notification effects (set processing of various data necessary for executing the effect) performed in the effect process (S184) during the sub-control main process described with reference to FIG. 85 will be described. Specifically, the registration process of the latency expectation notification effect (latent expectation notification process) performed in the mode A described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 53 and the registration process of the latency expectation notification effect performed in the mode B (latent). The contents of the certain number of times notification process) and the time saving number of times notification effect registration process (time reduction number of times notification process) performed in mode C will be described. The processing order of the latent probability expectation notification process, the latent number of times notification process, and the time reduction number of times notification process in the effect processing (S184) can be arbitrarily set.

[Intelligence expectation notification processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the effect mode is mode A, the latent probability expectation notification effect is performed (see FIG. 49). Here, with reference to FIG. 93, the latent expectation degree notification process (registration process of rank effect) executed by the sub CPU 201 in the mode A will be described. Note that FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latent expectation degree notification process in the present embodiment.

In the process shown in FIG. 93, a process of determining the effect at the time of fluctuation in the mode A and a process of determining whether or not to change the effect mode (notification mode of the latent expectation degree) of the mode A are mainly performed. .. In the mode A, the latent expectation degree is notified in the background of the non-variable time displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13 even in the non-variable state, and in the process shown in FIG. Based on the lottery result, it is determined by lottery whether or not to change the mode A effect mode (notification mode of latent expectation) displayed before the change (when not changing).

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current effect mode is mode A (S271).

In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is provided with flags (normal mode selection flag, mode A selection flag to mode D selection flag) for managing the type of effect mode currently being executed. Then, in the process of S271, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect mode is mode A by referring to the value (“0” or “1”) of the mode A selecting flag stored in the work RAM 203. To do. When the value of the mode A selection flag is "1", it indicates that the mode A effect is being executed.

In S271, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the current effect mode is not the mode A (when the determination in S271 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the latency expectation notification process and performs the process as the sub control main process (FIG. FIG. See 85). On the other hand, in S271, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the current effect mode is the mode A (when the determination in S271 is YES), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the "probability changing gaming state". (S272).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, various commands are transmitted from the main CPU 71 to the sub CPU 201 at the timing of each change display of a special symbol, each update of the game status flag, every predetermined time, etc., and these commands are used. Also includes information on the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 71 (for example, the value of the time saving flag, the value of the probability variation flag, etc.).

Therefore, in the process of S272, the sub CPU 201 refers to the information regarding the game state (value of the probability change flag) included in the various commands transmitted from the main CPU 71, and whether or not the game state is the "probability change game state". To determine.

In S272, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the "probability changing gaming state" (when the determination in S272 is YES), the sub CPU 201 refers to the probabilistic change state rank effect table (not shown) and determines a predetermined value. Select the effect (S273). On the other hand, in S272, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is not the "probability variation gaming state" (NO determination in S272), the sub CPU 201 refers to the rank effect table for the normal state (not shown) and is predetermined. (S274). Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the selection probability of the rank-up effect in the rank-up effect table for the probability variation state is set to be higher than the selection probability of the rank-up effect in the rank effect table for the normal state.

Then, after the processing of S273 or S274, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the selected effect is a rank-up effect (S275).

In S275, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected effect is a rank-up effect (YES in S275), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current effect stage is stage 3 (when the sub CPU 201 determines that the effect is a rank-up effect). S276).

In S276, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the current effect stage is not stage 3 (NO in S276), the sub CPU 201 sets the stage transition effect (S277). In the stage transition effect, information indicating that the effect stage will shift to the effect stage having a higher latent expectation than the current effect stage is displayed (notified) in the display area 13a of the display device 13. For example, when the current effect stage is stage 1, information indicating that the effect stage shifts to stage 2 is displayed (notified) in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Then, after the process of S277, the sub CPU 201 ends the latency expectation degree notification process and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S276, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the current effect stage is the stage 3 (YES in S276), the sub CPU 201 sets the transition effect to the mode B (S278). In the transition effect to mode B, information indicating that the effect mode shifts from mode A to mode B is displayed (notified) in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Then, after the process of S278, the sub CPU 201 ends the latency expectation degree notification process and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

Here, returning to the description of the process of S275 again, when the sub CPU 201 determines in S275 that the selected effect is not the rank-up effect (when the determination in S275 is NO), the sub CPU 201 is selected. It is determined whether or not the effect is the end effect of mode A (S279).

In S279, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected effect is the end effect of the mode A (when the determination in S279 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets the transition effect to the normal mode (S280). In the transition effect to the normal mode, information indicating that the effect mode shifts from the mode A to the normal mode is displayed (notified) in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Then, after the processing of S280, the sub CPU 201 ends the latent expectation degree notification processing and returns the processing to the sub control main processing (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S279, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected effect is not the end effect of the mode A (when the determination in S279 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the latency expectation notification process and subordinates the process. Return to the control main process (see FIG. 85). At this time (when neither "rank up effect" nor "end effect" is selected), the sub CPU 201 sets the effect selected from the normal or probabilistic rank table, and then notifies the latent expectation degree. End the process.

If the rank production table is configured so that, for example, a production to be ranked down or a production specific to the stage can be selected in addition to the "rank up production" and the "end production", S279 is NO. At the time of determination, the sub CPU 201 is set with a predetermined effect corresponding to, for example, a rank-down effect or a stage-specific effect.

[Indication of latent number of times]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the effect mode is mode B, the remaining latent number of times is divided into three stages (stage A to stage C) to notify the effect (indication of the number of latent times). (Direction) is performed (see FIG. 49). Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the latent probability number notification process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the mode B will be described. Note that FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latent probability number notification process in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect mode is mode B (S291). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect mode is mode B by referring to the value (“0” or “1”) of the mode B selecting flag stored in the work RAM 203. In the present embodiment, if any of the following three conditions is satisfied, S291 is a YES determination.
(1) When the game state is "latent game state" and the promotion lottery is won in stage 3 of mode A.
(2) When a "big hit" is won in a non-time saving game state.
(3) When mode B is being executed.

In S291, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the effect mode is not the mode B (NO in S291), the sub CPU 201 ends the latent probability number notification process and performs the process as the sub control main process (see FIG. 85). Return to. On the other hand, in S291, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the effect mode is the mode B (YES in S291), the sub CPU 201 has a remaining latent probability within the range of 200 to 120 times. Whether or not it is determined (S292). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the sub control circuit 200 is provided with a dedicated counter for separately counting the remaining latent number of times managed by the main control circuit 70. Then, in the process of S292, the sub CPU 201 performs the determination process of the remaining latent number of times based on the value of the dedicated counter for counting the remaining latent number of times.

In the present embodiment, each time the remaining latent number of times is updated in the main control circuit 70, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200, and the sub control circuit 200 receives the predetermined command. Update the value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of remaining latent times based on the command of. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining latency number managed by the main control circuit 70 and the remaining latency number managed by the sub control circuit 200 are updated in synchronization with each other. Further, at this time, the sub CPU 201 may update the value of the dedicated counter for counting the remaining latent times based on the reception of the predetermined command. Further, when the predetermined command includes information on the remaining latent number of times, the sub CPU 201 determines the remaining latent number of times by referring to the information on the remaining latent number of times in the process of S292. May be good.

In S292, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining latent times is within the range of 200 to 120 times (when the determination in S292 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets the stage in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Data for displaying (notifying) information about A is set (S293). Then, after the processing of S293, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S297 described later.

On the other hand, in S292, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining latent times (remaining ST times) is not within the range of 200 to 120 times (when S292 is NO determination), the sub CPU 201 has the remaining latent probability. It is determined whether or not the number of times is within the range of 119 times to 50 times (S294).

In S294, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining latent times is within the range of 119 to 50 times (when the determination in S294 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets the stage in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Data for displaying (notifying) information about B is set (S295). Then, after the processing of S295, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S297 described later.

On the other hand, in S294, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining latent times is not within the range of 119 to 50 times (when the determination in S294 is NO), the sub CPU 201 is placed in the display area 13a of the display device 13. Data for displaying (notifying) information about stage C is set (S296). Then, after the processing of S296, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S297 described later.

After the processing of S293, S295 or S296, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining latent number of times is 0 (S297).

In S297, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the remaining latent number of times is not 0 (NO in S297), the sub CPU 201 ends the latent probability number notification process and performs the process as the sub-control main process (FIG. 85). See). On the other hand, in S297, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining latent times is 0 (YES in S297), the sub CPU 201 shifts the effect mode from the mode B to the normal mode (S298). Then, after the process of S298, the sub CPU 201 ends the latent probability number notification process and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

[Time saving number notification processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the effect mode is mode C, the time saving number of times notification effect is performed (see FIG. 50). Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the time saving number notification process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the mode C will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving number of times notification processing in the present embodiment. As described with reference to FIG. 53, at the time of continuous production (number of notifications = 0), in addition to the notification production of the remaining time reduction number (additional number display production), the jackpot effect, the transition effect to mode D, and the mode B In some cases, the transition effect of the above is performed, but for convenience of explanation, the description of these effect processes (notification processes) other than the notification effect of the remaining time reduction number is omitted, and the notification of the remaining time reduction number of times is omitted. A flowchart specialized for processing is shown.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the "big hit gaming state" (S301). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game state is in the "big hit game state" by referring to the information on the game state included in the predetermined command transmitted from the main CPU 71. This predetermined command is transmitted from the main CPU 71 to the sub CPU 201 at timings such as every change display of the special symbol, every update of information about the game state, and every predetermined time.

In S301, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is not in the "big hit gaming state" (when the determination in S301 is NO), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S305 described later. On the other hand, in S301, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is in the "big hit gaming state" (when the determination in S301 is YES), the sub CPU 201 has the "big hit" type of the "big hit gaming state" set to "big hit". It is determined whether or not it is a "big hit with a reduced time" (S302). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the type of "big hit" is a type to which the number of time reductions is given, based on the result of the command analysis process (S183) during the sub-control main process shown in FIG. Determine.

In S302, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the type of "big hit" is not "big hit with time reduction" (when S302 is NO determination), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S305 described later.

On the other hand, in S302, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the type of "big hit" is "big hit with time reduction" (when the determination in S302 is YES), the sub CPU 201 transmits a preset number of time reduction notification patterns. It is set in the work RAM 203 (S303). Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the first remaining time saving notification number (initial notification number) in the work RAM 203 (S304). That is, in the present embodiment, the notification pattern of the number of time reductions and the initial notification number are determined during the jackpot game before the effect mode shifts to the mode C. At this time, the initial notification number is set to a value equal to or less than the upper limit of the time reduction number set for each type of "big hit" (symbol designation command). For example, in the example described with reference to FIG. 50, the upper limit of the number of time reductions is 200, and the initial notification number is 60.

Further, in the present embodiment, although not shown, the sub-control circuit 200 is provided with a dedicated counter for counting the number of notifications of the remaining time saving game. Then, at the start of the time saving game (when the effect mode shifts to mode C), the initial notification number is set in the dedicated counter for counting the number of notifications.

Then, after the processing of S304, or when S301 or S302 determines NO, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state" (S305).

In S305, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is not the "time saving game state" (NO in S305), the sub CPU 201 ends the time saving notification process and performs the process as the sub control main process (see FIG. 85). ). On the other hand, in S305, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the "time saving game state" (when the determination in S305 is YES), the sub CPU 201 acquires the current remaining time saving number of times (S306). In this process, the sub CPU 201 also updates the number of notifications. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 subtracts "1" from the value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of notifications.

In the present embodiment, although not shown, the sub control circuit 200 is provided with a dedicated counter for separately counting the remaining number of time reductions (the number of times the time reduction game is executed) managed by the main control circuit 70. Then, in the process of S306, the sub CPU 201 performs the determination process of the remaining time reduction number based on the value of the dedicated counter for counting the remaining time reduction number. In the present embodiment, each time the remaining time reduction number of times is updated in the main control circuit 70, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200, and the sub control circuit 200 receives the predetermined command. Update the value of the dedicated counter for counting the remaining time reduction number based on the command.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining time reduction number managed by the main control circuit 70 and the remaining time reduction number managed by the sub control circuit 200 are updated in synchronization with each other. At this time, the sub CPU 201 may update the value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of remaining time reductions based on the reception of the predetermined command. Further, when the predetermined command includes information on the number of remaining time reductions, the sub CPU 201 may determine the number of remaining time reductions by referring to the information on the number of remaining time reductions in the processing of S306.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of notifications is "0" (S307). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of notifications is "0" by referring to the value of the dedicated counter for counting the number of notifications.

In S307, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of notifications is "0" (when the determination in S307 is YES), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of remaining time reductions is "0" (S308). ..

In S308, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining time reductions is "0" (when the determination in S308 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets the notification information of the end of the time reduction (S309). Then, after the process of S309, the sub CPU 201 ends the time saving number of times notification process and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S308, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of remaining time reductions is not "0" (when the determination in S308 is NO), the sub CPU 201 sets the continuous effect of the time reduction game (S310).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs an additional update process for the number of notifications (S311). In this process, the sub CPU 201 newly sets the number of times equal to or less than the current number of remaining time reductions as the number of notifications (adds the number of notifications). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the number of notifications of 40 times is added in the process of S311. The number of notifications added at this time may be a predetermined number of times (however, the number of times is less than or equal to the current number of remaining time reductions), or notifications added by lottery based on the current number of remaining time reductions. The number of times may be determined. Then, after the process of S311 the sub CPU 201 ends the time saving number of times notification process and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

The process when the number of notifications is "0" and the number of remaining time reductions is not "0" is not limited to the processes of S310 and S311. For example, if the transition to the mode D of the effect mode is determined at this point, not only the processes of S310 and S311 but also the transition effect to the mode D may be performed at the same time.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S307 again, when the sub CPU 201 determines in S307 that the number of notifications is not "0" (when the determination in S307 is NO), the sub CPU 201 is set in S303. Based on the notification pattern, it is determined whether or not the notification pattern for the number of time reductions during execution is the notification pattern for performing the advance notice effect (notice notification) (S312).

In S312, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the notification pattern for the number of time reductions being executed is not the notification pattern for performing the advance notice effect (when the determination in S312 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the time reduction number notification process and performs the process. Return to the sub-control main process (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S312, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the notification pattern of the number of time reductions during execution is the notification pattern for performing the advance notice effect (when the determination in S312 is YES), the sub CPU 201 has the notification pattern set in S303. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the current variation display of the special symbol is the timing for performing the advance notice effect (S313). The timing of the advance notice may be determined by lottery for each variation display of the special symbol during the time-saving game. Further, when the notification pattern for performing the advance notice effect is set (process of S303), a predetermined predetermined timing (for example, at the time of the number of fluctuation display) may be determined as the timing for the advance notice effect.

In S313, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the change display of the current special symbol is not the timing for performing the advance notice effect (when the determination in S313 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the time saving number notification process and sub-controls the process. Return to the main process (see FIG. 85). On the other hand, in S313, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the current change display of the special symbol is the timing for performing the advance notice effect (when the determination in S313 is YES), the sub CPU 201 sets the advance notice effect for the remaining time reduction number of times. (S314).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs an additional update process for the number of notifications (S315). In this process, the sub CPU 201 adds the number of times equal to or less than the current remaining time reduction number to the current number of notifications (adds the number of notifications). The number of notifications added at this time may be a predetermined number of times (however, the number of times is less than or equal to the current number of remaining time reductions), or notifications added by lottery based on the current number of remaining time reductions. The number of times may be determined. Then, after the process of S315, the sub CPU 201 ends the time saving number of times notification process and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

As described above, in S311 and S315 during the time reduction number notification process, the notification number addition update process is performed at the execution timings of the continuous effect and the advance notice effect, respectively, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 200. That is, the sub-control circuit 200 also serves as a means for updating the number of notifications (means for updating the number of notifications) at a predetermined timing.

<Various modifications and applications>
The various effects of the pachinko gaming machine of the present invention are not limited to the examples of the effects of the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications can be considered. Hereinafter, various modifications and applications thereof will be described.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when the "small hit" is won in the state where the effect mode is the normal mode, the game state shifts to the "latent game state" mode B via the mode A, and the shift Although an example of performing an effect of notifying the remaining latent number of times is described in the mode B, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a "small hit" is won in the normal mode, the effect mode may directly shift to the mode B, and the remaining number of executions of the variation display of the special symbol may be notified in the shifted mode B. .. In the first modification, such a configuration example will be described.

(1) Mode Transition Mode between Normal Mode and Mode B First, the mode transition mode between the normal mode and mode B in the first modification will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 96. Note that FIG. 96 shows an outline of the mode transition mode between the normal mode and the mode B in the modification 1 and the notification operation performed in the mode B.

In the first modification, when the "big hit" is won in the normal mode (game state without time reduction), the number of executions (ST) of 200 special symbol variation display at the end of the big hit game is the same as in the above embodiment. Is set, and then the effect mode shifts to mode B.

Further, in the first modification, as shown in FIG. 96, in the normal mode, after winning the "small hit" and digesting the small hit game, the effect mode shifts to the mode B. At this time, as the mode of transition of the effect mode, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the effect mode shifts to mode B immediately after the end of the small hit game, and after the end of the small hit game, the normal mode is used again for a predetermined number of times. There is a mode in which the effect mode shifts to mode B after the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In the first modification, as in the above embodiment, when the small hit is won, the gaming state does not shift regardless of the shift mode to mode B.

Therefore, in the first modification, when shifting from the normal mode to the mode B via the small hit gaming state, if the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit in the normal mode is "no low probability time reduction", the transition is performed. Even in mode B, the gaming state of "low probability no time reduction" is continued. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning a small hit in the normal mode is "no high probability time reduction", the gaming state of "no high probability time reduction" is continued even in mode B after the transition. That is, in the first modification, the gaming state in the mode B is "no high probability time reduction" (latent game state) or "low probability no time reduction".

Further, in this example, when the gaming state of the mode B is the "latent gaming state", the effect mode shifts from the mode B to the normal mode when the latent gaming is completed.

On the other hand, in this example, when the gaming state of mode B is "no low probability time reduction", the remaining number of executions of the variation display of the special symbol (the number of remaining stays described later) in mode B becomes "0". At that time, the end lottery of mode B is performed. Then, when the end lottery of mode B is won, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode. However, if the end lottery of mode B is not won, the initial value of the remaining number of executions (the number of remaining stays described later) of the variable display of the special symbol is set again in mode B, and mode B is continued. To.

(2) Outline of Notification Effect in Mode B Next, an outline of the notification effect in Mode B will be described. Also in the first modification, the number of executions of the variation display of the remaining special symbols is displayed in the mode B as in the above embodiment.

In the first modification, as described above, when the effect mode shifts to the mode B via the small hit game, the game state is not the “latent game state” (no high probability time reduction) but the “low probability”. There may be no time reduction. Therefore, in the first modification, in consideration of both of these gaming states, in the mode B, the number of times the variation display of the remaining special symbols is executed is displayed as the "remaining number of stays". The number of remaining stays here means to include the number of remaining latent times, and when the gaming state of mode B is the "latent gaming state" (no high probability time reduction), the remaining number of stays remains. It is the number of latent probabilities. Further, when the gaming state of the mode B is "no low probability time reduction", a predetermined number of stays (initial value) is set when the effect mode shifts to the mode B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96, in the first modification, the number of remaining stays in the mode B is notified in three stages. Specifically, as a stage indicating the number of remaining stays, stage A in which the number of remaining stays is 200 to 120, stage B in which the number of remaining stays is 119 to 50, and stage in which the number of remaining stays is 49 to 0. C is provided. Then, in the notification effect of the remaining number of stays in the mode B, a unique effect is performed in each stage, and the player is notified of the information regarding the current remaining number of stays.

The range of the remaining number of stays set in each of the stages A to C is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 96, and may be appropriately changed depending on, for example, a model or the like. Further, in this example, an example in which the stage of the number of remaining stays is divided into three stages has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stage of the number of remaining stays may be divided into two stages or four or more stages.

Here, FIGS. 97a and 97b show an example of the operation flow of the notification effect of the remaining number of stays performed in the mode B.

FIG. 97a is an operation flow of the notification effect of the remaining number of stays when the effect mode shifts to the mode B via the small hit game and the game state of the mode B is “no low probability time reduction”. In this operation example, first, after the small hit game is completed, the initial value (“80 times” in the operation example of FIG. 97a) of the number of stays in mode B (the number of executions of the special symbol) is set. The initial value of the number of stays is appropriately selected from the range of 0 to 200 times.

In the operation example of FIG. 97a, after the mode B shifts, the stay count notification effect of the stage B is first performed, and then the remaining stay count is reduced for each change display of the special symbol. Next, when the number of remaining stays is 49 or less, the stay count notification effect is switched to the stay count notification effect of stage C. After that, the stage C stay count notification effect is performed until the remaining stay count becomes 0.

If the end lottery of mode B, which is performed when the number of remaining stays reaches 0, is not won, the initial value of the number of stays in mode B is set again, and the mode B stay count notification effect is repeated. Is done. On the other hand, when the end lottery of mode B is won, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.

In FIG. 97b, the time saving game ends in the mode C in which the game state is “high probability time saving”, the effect mode shifts from the mode C to the mode B, and the remaining latent number of times at the time of the transition is “80”. It is an operation flow of the notification effect of the remaining number of stays performed in the case of "time".

In the operation example of FIG. 97b, after the mode B shifts, the stay count notification effect of the stage B is first performed, and then the remaining stay count is reduced for each digestion of the latent game. Next, when the remaining number of stays (remaining latent number of times) is 49 or less, the stay number notification effect is switched to the stay number notification effect of stage C. After that, the stage C stay count notification effect is performed until the remaining stay count (remaining latent probability count) becomes 0. At this time, if the "big hit" is not won by the time the remaining number of stays (remaining latent number of times) becomes 0, that is, if the probability variation game state ends, the remaining number of stays becomes 0 times. After that, the production mode shifts to the normal mode.

As shown in FIGS. 97a and 97b, in the stay count notification effect of the first modification, even if the game state of the mode B is the "probability change game state", it is the "normal game state" (non-probability change game state). However, the same production is performed. In this case, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the gaming state is the “latent gaming state”.

Therefore, in the configuration of this example, when a player who can determine whether or not a "small hit" has occurred is playing a game with the same pachinko gaming machine, the gaming state is "latent game" in mode B. It is possible to determine whether or not it is in a "state". However, when another player (next player) plays a game with the game machine after shifting to the mode B, it is determined whether or not the game state is the "latent game state". Becomes very difficult. Further, in this example, in order to make it more difficult to distinguish between "small hit" and "big hit", a type of "big hit" having the same opening mode as the opening mode of the big winning opening at the time of small hit may be provided. Good.

(3) Details of Stay Count Notification Process Next, a registration process (stay count notification process) of the stay count notification effect performed by the sub CPU 201 in mode B will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the stay count notification processing in the first modification. The stay count notification process in the first modification is performed in the effect process (S184) during the sub-control main process described with reference to FIG. 85, similarly to the latent probability number notification process of the above embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the mode B selecting flag is "1" (S321). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current effect mode is mode B.

In S321, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the mode B selecting flag is "1" (when the determination in S321 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S327 described later. On the other hand, in S321, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the mode B selecting flag is not "1" (when the determination in S321 is NO), the sub CPU 201 has a mode B initial processing flag value of "1". It is determined whether or not there is (S322).

The mode B initial processing flag is a flag stored in the work RAM 203, and is a flag indicating whether or not the effect mode has just shifted to the mode B. Then, when the effect mode has just shifted to the mode B, the value of the mode B initial processing flag is set to "1". The value of the mode B initial processing flag is set to "1" at the following timings (A) to (C).
(A) Immediately after the small hit game ends.
(B) Immediately after the small hit game is completed, the effect mode shifts to mode B after the variable display of the special symbol has been performed a predetermined number of times in the normal mode again.
(C) Immediately after winning the "big hit" in the "non-time saving game state" and completing the big hit game.

In S322, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the mode B initial processing flag is not "1" (when the determination in S322 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the stay count notification processing and performs the processing as the sub control main processing. Return to (see FIG. 85). On the other hand, in S322, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the mode B initial processing flag is "1" (when the determination in S322 is YES), is the sub CPU 201 in the "probability changing gaming state"? Whether or not it is determined (S323).

In S323, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the "probability changing gaming state" (YES in S323), the sub CPU 201 sets the initial value of the number of remaining stays in the mode B (S324). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the remaining probability variation number (remaining latent probability number) at the time of transition to mode B as the initial value of the remaining stay number, and stores the set remaining stay number in the work RAM 203. Then, after the processing of S324, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S326 described later.

On the other hand, in S323, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the game state is not the "probability variation game state" (NO in S323), that is, immediately after the effect mode shifts to the mode B via the small hit game. When the gaming state is the "normal gaming state", the sub CPU 201 sets the initial value of the number of remaining stays in the mode B to a predetermined value within the range of 0 to 200 times (S325). At this time, the sub CPU 201 may determine the initial value of the number of remaining stays by lottery, or may use a predetermined number of presets as the initial value of the number of remaining stays. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 201 stores the initial value of the set remaining number of stays in the work RAM 203. Then, after the processing of S325, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S326 described later.

After the processing of S324 or S325, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the mode B selecting flag to "1" (S326).

Then, after the processing of S326 or when S321 is determined to be YES, the sub CPU 201 updates the value of the number of remaining stays (S327). In this process, the sub CPU 201 subtracts the value of the remaining stay count by "1" for each variation display of the special symbol, and stores the subtracted remaining stay count (update value) in the work RAM 203.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the number of remaining stays updated in S327 is "0" (S328).

In S328, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the number of remaining stays is not "0" (when the determination in S328 is NO), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S335 described later. On the other hand, in S328, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the number of remaining stays is "0" (when the determination in S328 is YES), the sub CPU 201 is whether or not it is the end timing of the "probability variation game state". Is determined (S329).

In S329, when the sub CPU 201 determines that it is the end timing of the "probability change game state" (when the determination in S329 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S332 described later. On the other hand, in S329, when the sub CPU 201 determines that it is not the end timing of the "probability variation game state" (NO determination in S329), the sub CPU 201 performs a mode B end lottery (S330). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the end lottery of the mode B has been won (S331).

In S331, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the end lottery of the mode B has been won (when the determination in S331 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S332 described later.

When the determination in S329 or S331 is YES, the sub CPU 201 ends the mode B and shifts the effect mode to the normal mode (S332). Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the mode B selecting flag to "0" (S333). Then, after the process of S333, the sub CPU 201 ends the stay count notification process and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S331, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the end lottery of the mode B has not been won (when the determination in S331 is NO), the sub CPU 201 remains in the mode B in the same manner as in the process of S325. The initial value of the number of stays is set to a predetermined value within the range of 0 to 200 times (S334). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 201 stores the initial value of the set remaining number of stays in the work RAM 203.

After the processing of S334 or when S328 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 201 selects the stage of the number of stays (any of stages A to C) according to the number of remaining stays (S335). Then, after the process of S335, the sub CPU 201 ends the stay count notification process and returns the process to the sub control main process (see FIG. 85).

[Modification 2]
In the time reduction number notification process of the above embodiment described with reference to FIG. 95, a processing example for setting a preset notification pattern of the time reduction number and the initial notification number (first remaining time reduction number of notifications) will be described in S303 and S304. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the notification pattern of the number of time reductions and the initial number of notifications may be determined by lottery.

In the second modification, an example of the time saving notification pattern table used when determining the notification pattern of the number of time reductions and the initial number of notifications by lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 99. Note that FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the time saving notification pattern table.

In the time saving notification pattern table of this example, a symbol designation command ("z1" to "z17"), a notification pattern type ("JT00" to "JT32"), and a type of notification pattern for the number of time reductions are determined. Correspondence between the random value of the above and various parameters of the notification pattern determined by the random value is defined. The random number value defined in the time saving notification pattern table is a random number value acquired at the time of winning, and is any one of "0" to "999" (1000 types).

In the time reduction notification pattern table of this example, the value of the advance notice notification flag, the initial notification number, and the time reduction number are defined as various parameters of the notification pattern of the time reduction number of times. The notice notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not the notification pattern for the number of time reductions is the notification pattern for performing the notice effect. If the notification pattern is for performing the notice effect, the value of the notice notification flag is "1". (On) ”is set.

In the lottery process using the time reduction notification pattern table shown in FIG. 99, the notification pattern of the number of time reductions and various parameters thereof are determined based on the type of the symbol designation command (big hit symbol). For example, if the symbol designation command is "z2" and the random number value for determining the notification pattern for the number of time reductions is any value of "500" to "999", the notification pattern for the number of time reductions is "JT02". Is set, and as various parameters of the notification pattern, the value of the warning notification flag is set to "1", the number of initial notification notifications is set to "40", and the number of time reductions is set to "60".

[Modification 3]
In the look-ahead special zone effect of the above embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 54a to 54c, the look-ahead special zone is formed when the hold ball held next to the hold ball to which the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is assigned changes. Although the example of performing the production inside has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the fluctuation period of one reserved ball, both the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone and the effect in the look-ahead special zone may be performed. In this case, the look-ahead special zone effect can be performed even when the hold ball does not exist before the variable display (hold ball) of the special symbol determined to perform the look-ahead special zone effect.

Further, in the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the design effect and the background effect are simultaneously generated in the rush notice effect to the special zone (“zone transition notice combined success” effect) will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the design effect and the background effect may be generated at different timings.

In the third modification, both the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone and the effect in the look-ahead special zone are performed during the fluctuation period of one reserved ball, and the design effect and the background effect are produced in the rush notice effect to the special zone. An operation example of the look-ahead specialized zone effect that generates the above at different timings will be described.

(1) Operation Example of Look-Ahead Specialized Zone Production First, an example of look-ahead specialized zone effect in Modification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 100. Note that FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an operation flow of the look-ahead special zone effect in this example.

In the example shown in FIG. 100, in a state where three reserved balls already exist, a new start opening prize is generated (a fourth reserved ball is generated), and a look-ahead special zone effect is performed at the time of the start opening winning. This is an operation example of the look-ahead special zone production when it is decided. In this case, as in the above embodiment, when the fourth reserved ball is generated, it is decided to display the fluctuations of the three reserved balls that have already been reserved and to perform the look-ahead special zone effect4. A series of look-ahead effects are performed by the variable display of the second reserved ball.

In this example, when each of the first to third reserved balls fluctuates, the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is performed, and the effect that encourages the player to enter the look-ahead special zone is performed. In this example, in the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone, the symbol effect (design look-ahead) or the background effect (background look-ahead) is performed as in the above embodiment, but in this example, the look-ahead special zone start. Perform one of the symbol effect and the background effect in the first half of the variable period of the reserved ball for which the previous effect is performed, and perform the other of the symbol effect and the background effect in the middle of the variable period.

In addition, when the fourth reserved ball fluctuates, first, the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone (the effect of notifying the entry into the special zone and the effect of entering the zone) is performed, and then the look-ahead special effect is performed during the change period. The production in the conversion zone is performed. At this time, in this example, in the rush notice production to the special zone, one of the design production and the background production of the predetermined system is performed in the first half of the fluctuation period, and the design production and the background production of the predetermined system are performed in the middle of the fluctuation period. Do the other of.

(1) Variable production table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone)
Next, the variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) used in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 101.

The variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) shown in FIG. 101 is special at the start of the change of the reserved ball that performs a series of effects from the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone to the effect in the look-ahead special zone. This is a table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the variable display period of the symbol.

In the variation effect table of this example (at the start of the read-ahead special zone), as shown in FIG. 101, the type of variation pattern of the special symbol (“HN00” to “HN27”) and the look-ahead effect flag table shown in FIG. The look-ahead special zone effect pattern determined in, the random value for selecting (determining) the effect pattern ("EZ00" to "EZ45"), the effect pattern determined by the random value, and the content of the look-ahead effect ( The correspondence between the pattern effect and the background effect) and the read-ahead special zone flag data set is defined. In the variable effect table of this example (at the start of the look-ahead special zone), in the effect pattern in which the value of the flag in the look-ahead special zone is "1", the effect at the start of the read-ahead special zone described above is changed to the look-ahead specialization. A series of productions up to the production in the zone is performed in a variable period of one reserved ball.

Further, in the variation effect table of this example (at the start of the look-ahead special zone), the variation time (variation display period of the special symbol) and the winning type (“loss”” corresponding to each variation pattern are displayed, as in the above embodiment. , "Small hit" and "Big hit"), and the selection rate of each production pattern is also specified. The random number value specified in the variable effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) is a random number value acquired at the start opening winning, and is any one of "0" to "999" (1000 types). ..

For example, it is decided to execute the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone, the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the change display of the special symbol is "HN01", and the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determined at the time of winning is "HN01". When it is "Pattern A" and the random number value is any of "0" to "499", "EZ03" is selected as the effect pattern at the start of the look-ahead special zone, and "design effect" is used as the look-ahead effect. "A" and "Background effect A" are selected, and "1" is set in the pre-reading special zone flag.

In this case, one of "design effect A" and "background effect A" is performed in the first half of the special symbol variation period (10000 milliseconds), and "design effect A" and "background effect A" are performed in the middle of the variation period. The other is done. Next, a zone entry effect corresponding to the effect pattern of "EZ03" is performed, and an mode corresponding to "loss" (winning type) is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13. After that, the effect in the predetermined look-ahead special zone determined based on the fluctuation pattern "HN01" is performed, and then the special symbol stops fluctuating.

(1) Details of Look-ahead Specialized Zone Effect Pattern Determination Process Next, the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process in the modified example 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead specialized zone effect pattern determination process in this example. The look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process of this example is performed in S217 during the variable effect pattern determination process shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, as in the above embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead special zone start flag set at the time of acquiring the winning pattern is "1" (on state) (S341). In this determination process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current variation display of the special symbol is the variation display of the special symbol on which the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone is performed.

In S341, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the read-ahead special zone start flag is "1" (when the determination in S341 is YES), that is, when the read-ahead special zone starts in the variable display of the current special symbol. When performing the effect of, the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation effect table (at the start of the look-ahead special zone) of FIG. 101, and pre-reads by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the reception command. The variable effect pattern in the effect at the start of the special zone is determined (S342). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 is based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, and is defined in the variation effect table of FIG. 101 (at the start of the look-ahead special zone), the effect pattern, the symbol effect, the background effect, and the look-ahead special. Select the value of the flag in the conversion zone (“0” or “1”).

After the processing of S342, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the read-ahead special zone start flag to "0" (S343). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the read-ahead special zone flag is “1” (S344).

In S344, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-reading special zone flag is "1" (when the determination in S344 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S347 described later. On the other hand, in S344, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-reading specialized zone flag is not "1" (when S344 is NO), the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the pre-reading specialized zone flag to "1". "(S345). Then, after the processing of S345, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S349 described later.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S341 again, when the sub CPU 201 determines in S341 that the value of the read-ahead special zone start flag is not "1" (when the determination in S341 is NO), the sub CPU 201 , It is determined whether or not the value of the read-ahead special zone flag is "1" (on state) (S346). In S346, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-reading special zone flag is "1" (when the determination in S346 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S347 described later.

When S344 or S346 is determined to be YES, that is, as in the modified example 3, in the current special symbol variation display period, a series of effects from the effect at the start of the look-ahead special zone to the effect in the look-ahead special zone are performed. When this is performed, or when the current special symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display that performs only the effect during the start of the look-ahead special zone, the sub CPU 201 uses the variation effect table of FIG. 68 (in the look-ahead special zone). ), And based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command, the variation effect pattern in the effect in the look-ahead special zone is determined by lottery (S347). Then, after the processing of S347, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S349 described later.

On the other hand, in S346, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the pre-reading special zone flag is not "1" (when S346 is NO), that is, the pre-reading specialized zone effect is produced in the variable display of the current special symbol. When performing the previous effect, the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation effect table of FIG. 66 (before the start of the look-ahead specialization zone), and is selected by lottery based on the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained from the analysis result of the received command. The variable effect pattern in the effect before the start of the look-ahead special zone is determined (S348). Then, after the processing of S348, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S349 described later.

After the processing of S345, S347 or S348, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead special zone end flag set at the time of acquiring the winning pattern is "1" (on state) (S349). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current special symbol variation display is the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball for which the transition to the look-ahead special zone has been determined.

In S349, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the read-ahead special zone end flag is not "1" (when the determination in S349 is NO), that is, when the look-ahead special zone effect is continued, the sub CPU 201 Along with ending the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process, the variation effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S349, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the read-ahead special zone end flag is "1" (when the determination in S349 is YES), that is, when the read-ahead special zone effect is terminated, the sub CPU 201 Sets the value of the read-ahead special zone flag to "0" (S350). Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the read-ahead special zone flag to "0" (S351). Then, after the processing of S351, the sub CPU 201 ends the look-ahead special zone effect pattern determination process, and also ends the variation effect pattern determination process (see FIGS. 88 and 89).

[Various notification processing by payout control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 110, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described.

[Power-on process]
First, the power-on process by the payout CPU 301 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the power-on process in the present embodiment. The power-on process is a process started when the power is turned on. When the power-on process is started, the payout CPU 301 first sets the stack pointer, the interrupt mode, and the interrupt vector.

First, the payout CPU 301 performs the input / output port setting process (S401). Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the power failure detection state (S402). In this process, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is at the H level (high level).

In S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection signal is at the H level (YES in S402), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection state is in the power failure detection state, and performs the process of S402.

On the other hand, in S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection signal is not at the H level (NO in S402), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection state is not present, and performs a write permission process for the RAM 303. Do (S403).

In this process, in addition to the write permission process of the RAM 303, the payout CPU 301 performs various initial setting processes such as an initialization process of the work area of the RAM 303.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 41) is on (S404).

In S404, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is ON (when the determination in S404 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S410 described later.

On the other hand, in S404, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on (NO in S404), the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not there is a power failure detection flag (S405). In this process, the payout CPU 301 confirms the power failure detection flag.

In S405, when the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no power interruption detection flag (when the determination in S405 is NO), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S410 described later. On the other hand, in S405, when the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a power failure detection flag (when the determination in S405 is YES), the payout CPU 301 calculates the work damage check value (S406). In this process, the payout CPU 301 checks the damage of the work area in the RAM 303 and calculates the work damage check value.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 executes an error detection process such as a parity check or a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), and uses the checksum obtained as the execution result as the work damage check value.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the work damage check value is normal (S407). In S407, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the work damage check value is not normal (when the determination in S405 is NO), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S410 described later.

On the other hand, in S407, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the work damage check value is normal (when the determination in S407 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs the initial processing at the time of power recovery (S408).

That is, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on, the power failure detection flag is present, and the work damage check value is normal, the payout CPU 301 is in the state before the power is turned off. It is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be restored, and the initial setting process at the time of power recovery is performed based on the data stored in the RAM 303.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (S409). In this process, the payout CPU 301 makes initial settings for determining whether 15 game balls are secured in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, respectively.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, respectively. In the present embodiment, assuming that the falling time of one game ball is 130 ms, 1950 times corresponding to the fall time of 15 game balls of 1950 ms (= 130 ms × 15 pieces) is set to 1950 times as the first and second secured ball counters 305A. The initial value is 305B.

Further, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B, respectively. In the present embodiment, based on the falling time of 15 game balls 1950 ms (1950 times), 2000 ms is set as the time assumed that the collateral of 15 game balls is completed, and the first and second collateral ball timers 306A , 306B is used as the initial value.

After the processing of S409, the payout CPU 301 returns the value of the program counter to the address before the power failure. Specifically, the payout CPU 301 ends the power-on process and continues to process the program that was being executed when the power-on process was executed.

If S404 is a YES determination, S405 is a NO determination, or S407 is a NO determination, the payout CPU 301 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state before the power was turned off, and the power supply is supplied. Executes the process when is input.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303 (S410) and performs initial processing when the power is turned on (S411). In this process, the payout CPU 301 resets the stop factors of the overpayment and the payout motor abnormality. At this time, the number of retries for the specified number of overpayments (10), which will be described later, is also initialized.

Further, when a stop factor occurs due to the ball running out, the display by the payout state notification display device 178, which will be described later, is turned off for 2 seconds so as not to be affected by the accumulation state of the secured balls in the ball supply passage 171.

Specifically, the payout status notification display device 178 is used until the determination of ball out is completed when a predetermined initialization operation is performed when the drive of the payout motor 174 is stopped due to the above-mentioned stop factor. The result of the determination is not displayed for a second.

Thereby, for example, the ball out is determined after a predetermined initialization operation, and when it is determined to be normal, the payout status notification display device 178 can prevent the notification. As a result, unnecessary notification can be eliminated. The predetermined initialization operation referred to here is, for example, that the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpaid items, or the work area of the error information portion without turning on the power again. The work area including one, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs the above-mentioned collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (S412) and executes the main process (S413).

When the power is turned on, the used register, interrupt state, and stack pointer are saved, and the excitation data of the payout motor 174 is forcibly set to 0 and switched to a low current.

If the power is cut off during the payout operation, it can be assumed that the origin (the number of steps is a multiple of 4) is not the origin. Therefore, by forcibly setting the excitation data to 0, the game ball can freely fall during the power cut. To prevent. Alternatively, the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power failure.

When the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power interruption, the power interruption process may be waited for or interrupted for the time required for the game ball to fall, and the execution period may be extended.

Further, instead of the case where the game ball is forcibly dropped, the game ball may be controlled to fall freely. In this case, in order to take a sufficient time to detect the free-falling game ball, the power interruption process may be waited for or interrupted, or the execution period may be extended.

[Main processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the main process performed in S413 during the power-on process (see FIG. 103) will be described. Note that FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process in the present embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the system timer of the payout CPU 301 is 4 or less (S421). In S421, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is not 4 or less (when the determination in S421 is NO), the payout CPU 301 returns the process to S421.

On the other hand, in S421, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is 4 or less (when the determination in S421 is YES), the payout CPU 301 subtracts "4" from the system timer (S422). In this process, the payout CPU 301 initializes the system timer.

That is, if the system timer is a timer that counts every 1 ms, the payout CPU 301 executes the processes after S423 described later every 4 ms by executing S421 and S422.

Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all the timers used in the main process (S423). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes the ball lending control process (S424). In this process, the payout CPU 301 manages the game ball, creates a command to be transmitted to the card unit 150, and receives the ball lending command transmitted from the card unit 150 when the lending operation unit 151 is operated. When this happens, the number of game balls to be rented is managed.

Next, the payout CPU 301 executes the prize ball control process (S425). In this process, the payout CPU 301 pays when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the general winning openings 51 and 52, the first major winning opening 53, and the second major winning opening 54. Manage the game balls to be put out.

Next, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout status notification display device 178 so that the payout control circuit 300 displays that an error has occurred, provided that an error has occurred in the payout control circuit 300 (S426).

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
Next, the system timer interrupt processing by the payout CPU 301 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the system timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout CPU 301 interrupts the main process at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt process even during the execution of the main process shown in FIG. 104 described above.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 executes the system timer interrupt process according to the clock pulse generated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 millisecond) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) in the payout control circuit 300. To do.

First, the payout CPU 301 receives the detection commands (signals) of the main control circuit 70 and various sensors, and executes a command reception process for analyzing the received commands at the same time (S431).

Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all the timers (for example, the first and second secured ball timers 306A, 306B, etc.) used in the system timer interrupt process (S432). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a collateral ball presence detection process (see FIG. 106), which will be described later (S433).

Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a collateral-free detection process (see FIG. 107), which will be described later (S434). After that, the payout CPU 301 executes a counting switch detection process (see FIG. 108), which will be described later (S435). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a motor start waiting process (see FIG. 109), which will be described later (S436).

Finally, the payout CPU 301 executes a command transmission process of transmitting a command indicating the payout error information of the payout control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 70 (S437). For example, when a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is input from the lower plate full tank switch 179, the payout CPU 301 issues a payout error information command indicating that the lower plate is full. Send to 70.

However, since the main control circuit 70 holds the start-up waiting time of the sub control circuit 200 for the specified time (for example, 6 seconds) immediately after the power is turned on, the payout error information is until the main control circuit 70 can receive the information. Avoid sending commands.

Here, when the power is turned on, the history information regarding the payout error information is cleared. Further, even if the lower plate is full before the power failure and the lower plate is released by discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 during the power failure, the lower plate is released after the power failure is restored. No information is sent to the effect that the full tank has been released. However, the payout motor abnormality and the overpayment abnormality that are released when the power is turned on again are initialized when the power is restored.

[Detection processing with collateral ball]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the detection process with a secured ball performed in S433 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the detection process with a collateral ball in the present embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (S441). In S441, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (when the determination in S441 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A is It is determined that replenishment is not necessary, and the process is transferred to S447.

On the other hand, in S441, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (when the determination in S441 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is a game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the replenishment of the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is necessary, and it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the ON state (S442).

In S442, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is not in the ON state (when the determination in S442 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number in the first ball supply passage 171A (this implementation). In the form of, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and the process is transferred to S447.

On the other hand, in S442, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the ON state (when the determination in S442 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that (15 in the present embodiment) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a collateral ball, and the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is subtracted by "1" (S443).

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (S444). In S444, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 (when the determination in S444 is NO), the payout CPU 301 replenishes the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. Is determined to be necessary and the process is moved to S447.

On the other hand, in S444, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (when the determination in S444 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays a game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the replenishment of the ball is not necessary, and 1 is set in the first falling ball confirmation flag (S445).

Here, the first falling ball confirmation flag is set to "1" when it is not necessary to replenish the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A, that is, when there is a collateral ball, and the first ball supply passage is set. This flag is set to "0" when it is necessary to replenish the game ball to the 171A, that is, when there is no collateral ball.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 0 to the first stop factor flag (S446). Here, the first stop factor flag is a flag in which "0" or "1" is set depending on whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170. Yes, in particular, regarding the payout of game balls accumulated (secured) in the first ball supply passage 171A, a flag is set to "1" when there is a stop factor, and is set to "0" when there is no stop factor. Is.

In the process of S446, it is determined in S444 that the supply of the game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A is completed and a predetermined number (15 in the present embodiment) of the game balls are accumulated. Therefore, 0 is set in the first stop factor flag in the sense of canceling the ball out which is the stop factor. As the stopping factor, which will be described later, there are various stopping factors other than the ball out. Here, the ball runs out as an example.

Next, when S441 is a YES determination, S442 is a NO determination, or S444 is a NO determination, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (S447). ).

In S447, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (when the determination in S447 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B is Judging that replenishment is not necessary, the detection process with a collateral ball is terminated.

On the other hand, in S447, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 (when the determination in S447 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is a game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the supply of the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is necessary, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the ON state (S448).

In S448, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is not in the ON state (when the determination in S448 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number in the second ball supply passage 171B (this implementation). In the form of, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and the detection process with collateral balls is terminated.

On the other hand, in S448, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the ON state (when the determination in S448 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number in the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that (15 in the present embodiment) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a collateral ball, and the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is subtracted by "1" (S449).

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (S450). In S450, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 (when the determination in S450 is NO), the payout CPU 301 replenishes the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined to be necessary, and the detection process with a collateral ball is terminated.

On the other hand, in S450, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (when the determination in S450 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays a game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the replenishment of the ball is not necessary, and 1 is set in the second falling ball confirmation flag (S451).

Here, the second falling ball confirmation flag is set to "1" when it is not necessary to replenish the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B, that is, when there is a collateral ball, and the second ball supply passage is set to "1". This flag is set to "0" when it is necessary to replenish the game ball to 171B, that is, when there is no collateral ball.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 0 in the second stop factor flag (S452), and ends the detection process with a collateral ball. Here, the second stop factor flag is a flag in which "0" or "1" is set depending on whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170. Yes, especially with regard to the payout of game balls accumulated (secured) in the second ball supply passage 171B, a flag is set to "1" when there is a stop factor, and is set to "0" when there is no stop factor. Is.

In the process of S452, it is determined in S450 that the supply of the game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B is completed and a predetermined number (15 in the present embodiment) of the game balls are accumulated. Therefore, 0 is set in the second stop factor flag in order to release the ball out which is the stop factor.

In this way, in the detection process with collateral balls, the presence or absence of collateral balls, the determination of the supply of game balls, and the stop factor (of the payout motor, sprocket, or payout) are determined by the collateral ball counter and the 15-ball collateral switch. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to cancel, it is possible to more accurately manage the collateral ball in the payout.

[Detection process without collateral ball]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the collateral-free detection process performed in S434 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the detection process without a collateral ball in the present embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0 (S461). In S461, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is not 0 (when the determination in S461 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is supplying the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the process is transferred to S471.

On the other hand, in S461, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0 (when the determination in S461 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays a game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the supply of balls is completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (S462).

In S462, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (when the determination in S462 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number (this) in the first ball supply passage 171A. In the embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a collateral ball, and it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the OFF state (S463).

Here, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” each time the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 105 is performed every 1 ms in S461 and S462, that is, the updated value of the first collateral ball timer 306A and the collateral. In S443 of the ball presence detection process (see FIG. 106), "1" is subtracted, that is, the value of the updated first collateral ball counter 305A is compared, and based on the comparison result, the game ball by the first sprocket 173A is used. It is determined whether or not to prohibit the withdrawal.

For example, when S461 is a YES determination and S462 is a YES determination, both the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A and the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A are 0 as predetermined values. Therefore, when 2000 ms, which is the initial value of the first collateral ball timer 306A set as a sufficient time to pay out 15 game balls from the ball tank 161 has elapsed, the first collateral ball counter This means that 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of 305A, has passed.

The initial value of the first collateral ball counter 305A, 1950 times (1950 ms), is a value that is not subtracted unless the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A detects a game ball. Therefore, when 2000 ms has elapsed (0). When 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first collateral ball counter 305A, becomes 0, 15 game balls are replenished in the first ball supply passage 171A. Is guaranteed.

On the other hand, when S461 is a YES determination and S462 is a NO determination, the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A becomes 0 when the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A becomes 0. It will not be.

That is, when 2000 ms, which is the initial value of the first secured ball timer 306A, has elapsed, 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first secured ball counter 305A, has not elapsed. From this, it can be estimated that there was a time when the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A did not detect the game ball, that is, there was a time when the supply of the game ball was interrupted before 2000 ms passed. Therefore, when S461 is a YES determination and S462 is a NO determination, it is determined that 15 game balls are not supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A.

The payout CPU 301 that performs a process of comparing the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A with the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A constitutes a determination means.

Next, in S463, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is not in the OFF state (when the determination in S463 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has 15 pieces in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the game ball is replenished, and the process is moved to S471.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S463 that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the OFF state (when the determination in S463 is YES), the payout CPU 301 is once in the above-mentioned S461 and S462. Although it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to the 1 ball supply passage 171A, 15 game balls are not supplied to the 1st ball supply passage 171A for some reason, that is, It is determined that there is no collateral ball, and 0 is set in the first falling ball confirmation flag (S464).

Here, as a factor for determining YES in S463, for example, a case where the game ball is excessively paid out due to a malfunction of the first sprocket 173A or the payout motor 174 can be mentioned. At this time, the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited.

Here, when the game balls are excessively paid out, for example, as a result of the first sprocket 173A being excessively rotated, the number of game balls supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A is changed from 15 to 14. The first 15-ball collateral switch 172A detects that the game balls that have been reduced and supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A in connection with the paid-out game balls move in the direction of the first sprocket 173A. Since the game ball also moves in the direction of the first sprocket 173A, this is a case where the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is turned off.

That is, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the first sprocket 173A even if the value of the first mortgage ball counter 305A is 0 when the value of the first mortgage ball timer 306A is 0. If the game ball is not detected by the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A before, the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A through the drive of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

In this way, the payout CPU 301 can grasp whether or not there is a game ball supplied in the first ball supply passage 171A, so that the payout management can be performed more accurately.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) as the monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the first collateral ball timer 306A (S465). When 2000 ms set here has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and the payout status notification display device 178 notifies the user.

After that, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the first collateral ball counter 305A (S466), and shifts the process to S471.

On the other hand, in S462, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (when the determination in S462 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number (in the case of the first ball supply passage 171A). In the present embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and 1 is set in the first stop factor flag (S467).

In this process, as described above, since it was determined by S461 and S462 that 15 game balls were not supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A, in order to prohibit the payout of the game balls by the first sprocket 173A. , 1 is set in the first stop factor flag.

In other words, when the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0 and the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0, the payout CPU 301 is driven by the first sprocket 173A through the drive of the payout motor 174. Prohibition of payout of game balls.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S468), and shifts the process to S471. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A.

Here, the origin of the first sprocket 173A is a rotation position (drive position) at which the game ball can be paid out to the first payout passage 180A when the first sprocket 173A is rotated. In the present embodiment, the number of steps of the payout motor 174 is controlled with reference to this origin.

When the first sprocket 173A stops due to some stopping factor (such as "error related to payout" described later), the index that causes the first sprocket 173A to grasp the rotation position of the position detection sensor (for example, the first sprocket 173A). ) Is not provided, so that the current rotation position (drive position) is unknown, that is, how many steps the payout motor 174 is driven with respect to the origin is unknown. Therefore, the first sprocket 173A The origin may also be unknown.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first sprocket 173A is stopped based on the stop factor, that is, when the origin adjustment flag is set to 1, the origin adjustment for grasping the origin of the first sprocket 173A is performed. Control is done. That is, the payout CPU 301 performs the origin adjustment control when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited as described above. The same applies to the retry control described later.

By performing the origin adjustment control in this way, the origin position of the sprocket 173 can be adjusted. Therefore, for example, even a payout device using the sprocket 173 that does not have a position detection sensor can accurately pay out. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the payout device in which the sprocket 173 is not provided with the position detection sensor has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sprocket is provided with the position detection sensor. However, by performing the origin adjustment control, it is possible to manage the position of the sprocket and the payout more accurately, so that the payout can be performed more accurately.

The origin adjustment flag is a flag that is set according to the presence or absence of a request for origin adjustment control, is set to "1" when there is a request for origin adjustment control, and is set to "1" when there is no request for origin adjustment control. This is a flag set to "0".

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (4 steps in the present embodiment) until the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Here, the unit drive amount (4 steps in the present embodiment) described above is smaller than the payout drive amount (16 steps in the present embodiment) described later.

Further, the unit drive amount (4 steps in the present embodiment) is divided into 4 times (the number of origin request retries described later) as a specific number of the payout drive amount (16 steps in the present embodiment) described later. The amount of drive.

Further, this origin adjustment control is a control common to the retry control described later. Therefore, even in the retry control, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (4 steps in the present embodiment) until the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Details will be described later. The payout CPU 301 that controls the drive of the payout motor 174 constitutes a control means and a drive control means.

Here, in the above-mentioned S467, 1 is set in the first stop factor flag in order to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A, but when the origin adjustment control is required as described above, , The origin cannot be adjusted unless the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A is permitted.

The same applies to retry control. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited, the payout CPU 301 permits the payout of the game ball on the condition that the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the origin adjustment control (retry control) from being performed due to the prohibition of payout of the game ball.

Next, when S461 is a NO determination, when S463 is a NO determination, or after the end of S466 or after the end of S468, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is 0. Determine (S471).

In S471, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is not 0 (when the determination in S471 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is replenishing the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined, and the detection process without collateral ball is terminated.

On the other hand, in S471, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0 (when the determination in S471 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays a game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the supply of balls is completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (S472).

In S472, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (when the determination in S472 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number (this) in the second ball supply passage 171B. In the embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a collateral ball, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the OFF state (S473).

Here, the determination as to whether or not to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B is the same as the determination as to whether or not to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A described above. The explanation is omitted. The payout CPU 301 that performs a process of comparing the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B with the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B constitutes a determination means.

Next, in S473, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is not in the OFF state (when the determination in S473 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has 15 pieces in the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the game balls have been replenished, and the detection process without collateral balls is terminated.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S473 that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the OFF state (when the determination in S473 is YES), the payout CPU 301 is once in the above-mentioned S471 and S472. Although it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to the 2 ball supply passage 171B, 15 game balls are not supplied to the 2nd ball supply passage 171B for some reason, that is, It is determined that there is no collateral ball, and 0 is set in the second falling ball confirmation flag (S474).

Here, as a factor for determining YES in S473, for example, there is a case where the game ball is excessively paid out due to a malfunction of the second sprocket 173B or the payout motor 174. At this time, the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited.

In other words, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the second sprocket 173B even if the value of the second mortgage ball counter 305B is 0 when the value of the second mortgage ball timer 306B is 0. If the game ball is not detected by the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B before the game is performed, the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B through the drive of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) as the monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the second secured ball timer 306B (S475). When 2000 ms set here has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and the payout status notification display device 178 notifies the user.

After that, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the second collateral ball counter 305B (S476), and ends the no collateral ball detection process.

On the other hand, in S472, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0 (when the determination in S472 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number (in the case of the second ball supply passage 171B). In the present embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and 1 is set in the second stop factor flag (S477).

In this process, as described above, since it was determined by S471 and S472 that 15 game balls were not supplied to the second ball supply passage 171B, in order to prohibit the payout of the game balls by the second sprocket 173B. , 1 is set in the second stop factor flag.

In other words, when the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0 and the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0, the payout CPU 301 is driven by the second sprocket 173B through the drive of the payout motor 174. Prohibition of payout of game balls.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S478) and ends the detection process without a collateral ball. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B. Here, since the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B is the same as the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Counting switch detection process]
Next, the counting switch detection process performed in S435 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting switch detection process in the present embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (S481). In S481, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has not detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S481 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is the counting switch. End the detection process.

Here, when the origin adjustment control is in progress, the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, so S481 is determined as NO.

On the other hand, in S481, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S481 is YES), the payout CPU 301 is the first. It is determined that the game ball has been paid out by the sprocket 173A or the second sprocket 173B of the above, and the number of requested payouts is subtracted by "1" (S482).

Further, at this time, the payout CPU 301 can count the number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B. Therefore, the payout CPU 301 constitutes a counting means.

Here, the payout request number is a prize ball control command or lending that is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and received by the payout control circuit 300 based on the winning of the game machine or the lending of the game ball to various starting ports and various winning ports. It is a value obtained by sequentially adding the number of prize balls or the number of rented balls based on the ball control signal, and is the total number of game balls to be paid out by the prize ball case unit 170 (total amount to be paid out).

The number of requested payouts is stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. The number of prize balls and the number of rented balls mentioned above correspond to the amount paid out. Further, the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 constitutes a payout storage means. In addition, the number of requested payouts is subtracted when the game balls are paid out.

Next, the payout CPU 301 subtracts "1" from the number of drop requests (S483). Here, the number of drop requests is determined as the number of game balls to be paid out by one drive of the payout motor 174 based on the number of payout requests (total amount of payouts) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. The maximum number is 15.

For example, if the number of payout requests (total payout amount) is 15 or more, the drop request number is 15, and if the payout request number (total payout amount) is 14 or less, the drop request number is The number is the same as the number of memorized payout requests.

Further, the number of dropped requests is determined by the payout CPU 301 according to the number of payout requests (total payout amount). The number of drops requested corresponds to the amount to be paid out separately. Further, the payout CPU 301 corresponds to a delimited payout amount determining means.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S484). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S484 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1, (when the determination in S484 is NO), the payout CPU 301 shifts the process to S487.

On the other hand, in S484, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when the determination in S484 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S485).

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S486). Here, the origin adjustment completion flag is a flag for determining whether the origin adjustment control is in progress or the origin adjustment control is completed, and is set to "0" when the origin adjustment control is in progress, and the origin adjustment control is completed. When it is, it is a flag set to "1".

Next, when the determination in S484 is NO, or after the end of S486, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of dropped requests is less than 0 (S487). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S487 that the number of drop requests is not less than 0 (when the determination in S487 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

On the other hand, in S487, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of drop requests is less than 0 (when the determination in S487 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has an excess of game balls actually paid out with respect to the number of drop requests. It is determined that the result is, and the number of overpaid items is added by "1" (S488).

Here, the number of overpay balls is the number of game balls that exceed the number of game balls actually paid out with respect to the number of requested drops, that is, the number of game balls actually paid out exceeds the number of requested drops. For example, if the number of drop requests is 15, but the number of game balls actually paid out is 16, one game ball is overpaid, so the number of overpay balls is increased. "1" is added.

The payout CPU 301 adds the above-mentioned overpay number to the total number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B (the total number of game balls actually paid out). ) And the number of payout requests, which can be stored in the RAM 303.

Therefore, the RAM 303 constitutes a difference storage means. The number of overpays is accumulated in the RAM 303 until a predetermined initialization operation is performed. Examples of the predetermined initialization operation referred to here include turning on the power again.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpaid items, or the work area of the error information portion is performed without turning on the power again. The work area including one, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of overpaid items is 10 or more (S489). In other words, the payout CPU 301 compares the total number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B (the total number of game balls actually paid out) with the number of payout requests. , It is determined whether or not the difference (total number of overpay pieces) is 10 or more.

In S489, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpayments is not 10 or more (when the determination in S489 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has an allowable range (allowable value) of the number of game balls related to overpayment. It is determined that the value is inside, and the counting switch detection process is terminated.

On the other hand, in S489, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpayments is 10 or more (when the determination in S489 is YES), the payout CPU 301 does not have the number of game balls related to overpayment within the permissible range (allowable). It is determined that the value is equal to or higher than the value), the overpay flag is set to 1 (S490), and the counting switch detection process is terminated.

Here, the overpay flag is a flag for determining whether or not the number of game balls related to overpayment is within the allowable range (allowable value), and the number of game balls related to overpayment is within the allowable range. When is, it is set to 0, and when the number of game balls related to overpayment is not within the permissible range (more than the permissible value), it is set to 1.

Further, when the overpay flag is set to 1, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout motor 174 so as to stop the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B until the above-mentioned predetermined initialization operation is performed. ..

[Motor start waiting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the motor start waiting process performed in S436 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start waiting process in the present embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S501). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S501 that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (NO in S501), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is in progress and shifts the process to S506.

On the other hand, in S501, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (when the determination in S501 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, and the first Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S502).

In S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S502 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. End the wait process.

On the other hand, in S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S502 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S503).

In S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S503 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no collateral ball and the motor. Ends the startup waiting process.

On the other hand, in S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S503 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and pays out. It is determined whether or not the requested number is greater than 0 (S504).

If the payout CPU 301 determines in S504 that the number of payout requests is not greater than 0 (NO in S504), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request and ends the motor start waiting process.

On the other hand, in S504, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is larger than 0 (when the determination in S504 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request, and performs the motor start initial processing described later (FIG. 110) is executed (S505).

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S506). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S506 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S506), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for origin adjustment control and shifts the process to S507. Therefore, when S506 is NO determination, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

On the other hand, in S506, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when the determination in S506 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for origin adjustment control, and the number of retries is 12 or more. It is determined whether or not it is large, that is, whether or not the origin adjustment control is performed 12 times (S508). Therefore, when the determination in S506 is YES, the origin adjustment control is performed.

Here, the number of retries is the number of times the origin adjustment control is performed, and more specifically, it is a value added every time the number of motors operated, which will be described later, is updated. In the origin adjustment control, the drive amount required for the sprocket 173 to pay out one game ball and then the next game ball, that is, the drive amount required to pay out one game ball (payout drive amount). Since the payout motor 174 is driven only, the payout drive amount required to pay out this one game ball (in this embodiment, 16 steps = unit drive amount (4 steps) x 4 times (origin request retry count). )) Was set to the number of motors operating = 1. Here, the unit drive amount as the excitation data is 4 steps × 5 ms.

Therefore, every time one motor operation number is set (updated) in S510 described later, the number of retries is added assuming that the origin adjustment control is completed once. As described above, since the origin adjustment control is the same control as the retry control, the number of retries can be said to be the number of times the retry control is performed.

In this way, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of motor operations as a retry value on the condition that the drive amount of the payout motor 174 reaches the payout drive amount (16 steps in the present embodiment).

The payout CPU 301 that updates the number of motors in operation constitutes a retry value updating means. Further, the payout CPU 301 manages the number of times the motor operation number is updated or the number of times the excitation data is set, that is, the number of retries as the number of times the origin adjustment control (retry control) is performed.

In the present embodiment, three grooves for receiving the game balls are formed in each sprocket so that three game balls are paid out for each rotation of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B. ing.

Therefore, when the number of motors operated is updated 6 times, the drive amount is such that the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B each rotate once (in the present embodiment, 96 steps = 16 steps (unit drive amount (unit drive amount (unit drive amount)). The payout motor 174 is driven by 4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry count)) × 6 times (half of the 12 retry counts)).

Therefore, when the number of retries is larger than 12, the driving amount for two rotations of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B (in the present embodiment, 192 steps = 96 steps (driving amount for only one rotation)). It means that the payout motor 174 was driven with a drive amount exceeding (× 2 times). The number of retries of 12 times is the upper limit number of retries control in which 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) x 4 times) are set as one set.

In S508, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is larger than 12 (when the determination in S508 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit (12 times). Then, the processing is transferred to S507.

At this time, the payout CPU 301 does not detect the game ball by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B, and the drive amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds 192 steps (upper limit drive amount), or the number of retries is increased. On condition that the number of times exceeds 12 times (upper limit number of times), the drive of the payout motor 174 is controlled so as to stop the payout of the game ball until a predetermined initialization operation is performed. As a result, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is completed. Examples of the predetermined initialization operation referred to here include turning on the power again.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpaid items, or the work area of the error information portion without turning on the power again. The work area including one, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

In S507, the payout CPU 301 sets the start state of the payout motor 174 (S507), and shifts the process to S514. In this process, when the determination in S506 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed. Therefore, the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 according to the number of drop requests is set so that the normal game ball is paid out. If the determination in S508 is YES, the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state in order to stop the payout of the game ball.

On the other hand, in S508, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is not greater than 12 (when the determination in S508 is NO), the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value by 4 steps in preparation for the next origin adjustment control. (S509). In this process, four steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when the origin adjustment control is executed.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motors to be operated to one (S510), and sets the number of origin request retries to four (S511). In this process, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is obtained by multiplying the four steps set as the step counter mask value in S509 described above by the four times set as the number of origin request retries. 16 steps are set.

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer and sets it to 0 (S512). Here, the falling ball monitoring timer determines whether or not there is a falling ball and whether or not a stop factor has occurred after driving the payout motor 174 with excitation data for a unit drive amount (4 steps) in the origin adjustment control. It is a timer that measures the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms in the origin adjustment control).

The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is an excitation data retention period (the present embodiment) as a retention period for maintaining the postures of the first and second sprockets 171A and 171B after driving the payout motor 174 for four steps. 30 ms) and a cooling period (100 ms in the origin adjustment control) for cooling the payout motor 174.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to "0" (S513). Next, after the end of S507 or after the end of S513, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S514), and ends the motor start waiting process.

In this process, for example, when the origin adjustment control is performed, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) x 4 times (origin request retry count)). Set the excitation data. Further, in the case of paying out the normal game balls, the excitation data for a predetermined step is set as the driving amount required to pay out the game balls corresponding to the requested number of drops. When the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state so that the payout of the game ball is stopped, the excitation data is set to 0.

[Initial motor start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the motor start initial process performed in S505 during the motor start wait process (see FIG. 109) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start initial processing in the present embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of drop requests from the number of payout requests (S521). In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers are set according to the payout request number (total payout amount). For example, when the number of requested payouts (total amount of payouts) is 20, the number of requested drops is set to 15. On the other hand, when the number of payout requests (total amount of payouts) is 10, the number of drop requests is set to 10 which is the same as the number of payout requests.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a collateral ball monitoring setting process (S522). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of ON detection monitoring times in the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B according to the number of dropped requests.

For example, when the number of dropped requests is 9 to 10, 650 times (650 ms) are set as the number of ON detection monitoring times. Further, the payout CPU 301 sets the monitoring time in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B according to the number of dropped requests. For example, when the number of requested drops is 9 to 10, 850 ms is set as the monitoring time.

Here, the above-mentioned ON detection monitoring number and monitoring time are the initial values of the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, which are set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process of S412 during the power-on processing of FIG. 103. , The initial values of the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B are different.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets "0" in the first and second falling ball confirmation flags, respectively (S523). After that, the payout CPU 301 initializes the number of retries (S524) and sets the origin adjustment completion flag to "1" (S525).

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer and sets it to 0 (S526). The falling ball monitoring timer cleared here drives the payout motor 174 with excitation data for the amount of drive required to pay out the required number of drops in normal payout control in which origin adjustment control or retry control is not executed. This is a timer that measures the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms in normal payout control) for monitoring whether or not there are as many falling balls as the number of falling balls requested and whether or not a stop factor has occurred.

The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) here is composed of an excitation data holding period (30 ms in the present embodiment) and a cooling period of the payout motor 174 (470 ms in normal payout control). This falling ball monitoring time corresponds to a certain period.

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the step counter and sets it to 0 (S527). Here, the step counter is a counter that counts the number of steps of the payout motor 174.

For example, when the number of requested drops is 15, the value of the step counter becomes the value for 240 steps when the drop operation of the 15 game balls, that is, the payout operation is completed. In this process, the payout CPU 301 clears, for example, the values for 240 steps counted as described above.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 16 steps (S528), and ends the motor start initial process. As a result, 16 steps are set as the number of steps of the payout motor 174 required to pay out one game ball.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 111 to 122, a characteristic portion related to payout control in the present embodiment will be described in detail.
FIG. 111 is a time chart showing the excitation method of the payout motor 174 of the present embodiment. The payout motor 174 adopts a two-phase excitation method and a method capable of switching between a high current and a low current.

As shown in FIG. 111, the payout CPU 301 rotates the payout motor 174 in the forward direction by changing the excitation data in the order of t1, t2, t3, and t4. However, in the present embodiment, the payout motor 174 is structurally incapable of reverse rotation.

Here, the position where both "A-" and "B-" of the payout motor 174 are on is set as the origin. In addition, "A + and B + (indicated by" S "in the figure)" of the payout motor 174 represent on / off by software control, and "A- and B- (indicated by" H "in the figure)" are soft. Indicates on / off by logical inversion of the output.

However, since the present embodiment does not have a detection means such as an index sensor as in the conventional case, it is necessary to perform phase matching between the apparent origin (excitation data 0) and the structural origin. Such phase alignment of the origin is origin adjustment, and controlling the payout motor 174 to perform phase alignment is called origin adjustment control.

The origin adjustment control is performed by utilizing the first payout operation when the first payout request is made when the origin adjustment is required (when there is a target factor of the origin adjustment). For example, the origin adjustment control is performed by utilizing the payout operation of the first game ball of the number of drop requests at the time of the first payout request after the power is turned on.

Here, the payout request is made from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300, and specifically, is transmitted to the payout control circuit 300 as prize ball control data including information such as the number of payout requests. .. As shown in FIG. 112, the payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control data from the main control circuit 70 by interrupting reception.

On the other hand, when an error occurs in paying out the game ball, the payout control circuit 300 transmits the payout error information data to the main control circuit 70 as shown in FIG. 112.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 are unilaterally communicated with each other, but as shown in FIG. 114, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit are controlled. The circuit 300 may communicate with each other.

Here, when the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 communicate with each other, a serial communication method is used as the most desirable form, but the method is not limited to the serial communication method, and is not limited to the serial communication method. Various communication methods such as, etc. can be used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115, after the payout control circuit 300 detects an error by self-diagnosis, the payout control circuit 300 uses a serial communication method to transmit error information including the payout control error information described later to the main control circuit 70.

At this time, the minimum transmission interval for error transmission from the payout control circuit 300 is set to a predetermined time (12 ms in the present embodiment), and when the error information changes continuously, it is shown in S437. As shown in FIG. 115, the error information is not transmitted to the main control circuit 70 every time the error information changes by using the command transmission process that can be executed every 1 ms. Synthesize and send error information after the minimum transmission interval or the minimum transmission interval has elapsed.

Further, as a method of synthesizing error information, as shown in FIG. 116, each bit value of parameter 1 and parameter 2 composed of 8 bits is updated or changed, and error information is transmitted.

At this time, when the main control circuit 70 receives the parameter 1 and the parameter 2 as the error information, the main control circuit 70 masks each parameter and acquires the error information (payout control error information).

The management of the error information in the payout control circuit 300, the management of the error information in the main control circuit 70, and the management of the error information in the sub control circuit 200 are as shown in FIG. 117.

FIG. 117 shows an error information notification mode in the payout control circuit 300, an error information notification mode in the main control circuit 70, and an error information notification mode in the sub control circuit 200.

Specifically, the lower plate full tank state in the payout control circuit 300 is recognized by the main control circuit 70 as the lower plate full tank detection, and the sub control circuit 200 receives the error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70. Notify "Please pull out the ball" via the liquid crystal display device 13.

Further, regarding the payout control circuit 300, regarding the ball out 1 state, the ball out 2 state, the motor abnormality state, the VL unconnected state, the CR side communication abnormality, the overpayment abnormality, the payout ball jam, the reception command abnormality, the reception abnormality and the communication error. Is recognized as a payout abnormality detection in the main control circuit 70, and based on the payout error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit notifies "Please call a staff member" via the liquid crystal display device 13.

As described above, the main control circuit 70 manages a plurality of error information related to the payout control to be transmitted by dividing them into two types, "lower plate full error information" and "other information".

By transmitting and receiving such error information, in an environment where the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 are communicating with each other serially, error reports are continuously generated at the minimum transmission interval of the payout control circuit 300. Even if it changes to (it can also be expressed as error information or multiple errors have occurred), it is possible to synthesize error information.

Therefore, the payout control circuit 300 does not transmit the error information after the main control circuit 70 requests the transmission of the error information (or after some transmission request is made), but the minimum transmission of the payout control circuit 300. It is possible to transmit error information at intervals or at predetermined time intervals.

Further, although the error information (payout control error information) has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and various commands can be combined as the command composition.

Next, the prize ball control process in the present embodiment will be described. In this prize ball control process, at least the above-mentioned origin adjustment control, normal payout control, and retry control are performed. First, the origin adjustment control in the prize ball control process will be described.

As described above, the origin adjustment control is executed when the target factor of the origin adjustment occurs. Here, the target factors when performing the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control process are when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped, when the power is turned on, when the power is restored, and when an underpayment occurs after the origin adjustment control is completed. This includes when the suspension factor is canceled, when the payout abnormality factor is canceled, and when overpay occurs.

When the underpayment occurs after the origin adjustment control is completed, for example, when the payout motor 174 is out of step, or a predetermined number of game balls (15 in the present embodiment) are secured in the ball supply passage 171. A case where the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects a game ball and an intermittent state occurs due to a short circuit is mentioned.

The origin adjustment control at the time of releasing the stop factor is performed, for example, as a response to the backflow of the game ball when the lower plate full tank switch 179 is short-circuited. Further, the origin adjustment control at the time of canceling the payout abnormality factor is performed as a response when the origin is physically displaced due to, for example, disconnection, short circuit, or radio wave irradiation. Further, the origin adjustment control when the overpay occurs is performed in consideration of the subsequent step-out of the payout motor 174.

In the origin adjustment control, as described above, when the payout motor 174 is driven by 16 steps, one game ball can be dropped (paid out), so that the unit drive amount is 4 steps x 5 ms. The point at which the falling ball confirmation is completed within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms = excitation data holding period 30 ms + cooling period 100 ms) is regarded as the physical origin (origin adjustment completed). If the falling ball cannot be confirmed within the falling ball monitoring time, the payout motor 174 as described above is driven for 16 steps in units of 4 steps.

However, if the falling ball cannot be detected even if the payout motor 174 is driven for 16 steps, it is judged that normal payout is not performed (or it may be judged that there is a stop factor). The drive of the payout motor 174 in units of 4 steps is repeated for 2 rotations.

Further, "repeating the driving of the payout motor 174 for two rotations" means that the starting point is the state of the payout motor 174 or the position of the sprocket 173 at the time when it is determined that the falling ball cannot be detected even if the payout motor 174 is driven. (Or, as the rotation start position), for example, when 48 steps are required for the motor to make one rotation, it is shown that the drive for 96 steps is performed.

This can be expressed as equivalent to a drive capable of dropping 12 balls, and is a drive (or a rotation drive, or a rotation angle equivalent) of a payout motor 174 or a sprocket 173 capable of dropping a predetermined number of game balls. It can also be expressed as driving).

The origin adjustment control is completed when a falling ball is detected, but if the falling ball is not counted as a paid-out game ball, it will be overpaid. Therefore, it is necessary to count the falling ball when the origin adjustment control is completed as the paid-out game ball.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout CPU 301 subtracts one drop request number to 14 on the condition that the falling ball is detected by the counting switch 181 while the origin adjustment control is being executed. .. As a result, when the origin adjustment control is completed, the remaining number of drop requests (14) excluding one is paid out with respect to the number of drop requests. After that, the normal payout operation is executed.

FIG. 118 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the stop factor is released after the power is turned on again and then a payout request is generated, the origin adjustment control is executed, and the excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms is first executed. The payout motor 174 is driven for 4 steps based on the above. At this time, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched from a low current to a high current when the origin adjustment control is started.

After that, when the driving of the payout motor 174 for four steps is completed, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period). Then, when the excitation data retention period elapses, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a low current, and then the current is maintained at a low current for 100 ms (cooling period).

Further, the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is composed of 30 ms (excitation data retention period) and 100 ms (cooling period). The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) can be calculated based on the free fall theoretical formula.

After that, when a falling ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms), the number of dropped balls requested, which was three at the start of origin adjustment, is updated to two. In addition, the origin adjustment control is completed by detecting the falling ball, and the phase shift from the structural origin is eliminated.

FIG. 119 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed using the prize ball control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 119, if the operation of driving the payout motor 174 for 4 steps (this is called an origin adjustment cycle) based on the excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms described above is performed only once, the falling ball is generated. If it cannot be detected, the same origin adjustment cycle is repeated up to 16 steps. That is, after the origin adjustment control is started, the origin adjustment cycle is repeated a total of four times.

However, if the falling ball cannot be detected even after the four origin adjustment cycles are performed, the four origin adjustment cycles are performed again. Here, the period during which the first four origin adjustment cycles are performed is referred to as a basic retry operation period. The origin adjustment cycle is a unit drive amount (4 steps) × 5 ms, and the basic retry operation period is a unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry count). In FIG. 119, the operation started when the counting switch counting switch 181 falling ball is not detected during the basic retry operation period is defined as the origin adjustment retry, but the origin adjustment retry is not limited to this, and the basic retry operation period is defined. The mode of repeating up to the upper limit number of times may be an origin adjustment retry.

FIG. 120 is a timing chart of the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process, that is, the normal payout operation. Further, FIG. 120 is a timing chart exemplifying a payout operation when paying out 15 game balls.

As shown in FIG. 120, when 15 pieces are first determined as the number of drop requests, the drive amount of the payout motor 174 is determined by the payout CPU 301 based on the determined number of drop requests (15 pieces). Specifically, the excitation data required for paying out 15 game balls is determined. The payout CPU 301 that determines the drive amount of the payout motor 174 constitutes a drive amount determination means.

Next, when the excitation data required for paying out 15 game balls is set, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a high current, and the payout motor 174 is driven based on the set excitation data. The excitation data at this time is set so that the payout motor 174 gradually accelerates to a steady state, and then decelerates and stops.

After that, when the driving of the payout motor 174 based on the set excitation data is completed, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period as a holding period). Then, when the excitation data retention period elapses, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a low current, and then the current is maintained at a low current for 470 ms (cooling period).

Further, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is composed of 30 ms (excitation data retention period) and 470 ms (cooling period). During this falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the drive of the payout motor 174 is stopped. Further, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) at this time is different from the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) during the origin adjustment control.

Then, during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the payout CPU 301 monitors whether or not the fall of the game balls corresponding to the number of requested drops (15) can be confirmed. That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the game balls corresponding to the number of requested drops (15) are detected through the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B during the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms). The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout determination means.

In the payout CPU 301, when it is not possible to confirm that the number of falling balls (15) has fallen during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), that is, the number of game balls corresponding to the requested number of falls (15) is the first. If it is determined that the detection is not detected through the second counting switches 181A and 181B, it is determined that a stop factor has occurred, and the idle state is shifted to stop the subsequent drive of the payout motor 174. As a result, the payout operation cannot be continuously performed.

On the other hand, even if it is confirmed that the number of game balls requested to fall (15) has fallen during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the idle state is entered in preparation for the subsequent payout operation.

Here, the excitation data according to the number of dropped requests in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process is as shown in FIG. 121. For example, when the number of requested drops is 5 to 15, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), the excitation data is obtained by performing the acceleration state and the deceleration state for two game balls, respectively.

121 (b) shows the case where the number of dropped requests is 4, FIG. 121 (c) shows the case where the number of dropped requests is 3, and FIG. 121 (d) shows the case where the number of dropped requests is 2. (E) represents the excitation data when the number of requested drops is one. The above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is provided regardless of the number of dropped balls requested.

FIG. 122 is a timing chart of the payout operation when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process. Further, FIG. 122 is a timing chart exemplifying a payout operation when paying out five game balls.

As shown in FIG. 122, when the payout operation of the requested number of drops (5 pieces) is executed, if the game ball related to the fourth payout is not detected by the second counting switch 181B, it falls. When the ball monitoring time (500 ms) elapses, one is insufficient for the required number of drops (5). As a result, it is determined that the payout CPU 301 cannot confirm the fall of the game balls for the number of fall requests (5) within the fall ball monitoring time (500 ms).

In this way, when the number of game balls paid out is insufficient for the required number of drops (5 pieces), the origin adjustment retry operation similar to the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed shown in FIG. 119 occurs. The operation is performed. Since the content of this origin adjustment retry operation is the same as that shown in FIG. 119, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, error handling in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127.
Examples of errors related to the payout of game balls in the present embodiment include (1) overpayment, (2) jammed payout balls, (3) full lower plate, (4) out of balls, and (5) abnormal payout motor. Be done. When at least one of these errors occurs, the error is notified via the payout status notification display device 178 (see FIG. 41). Each of these errors will be described in detail below.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a payout status notification display device 178. As shown in FIG. 123, the payout status notification display device 178 includes seven segments a to g and an eighth segment DP. Any of these segments a to g and DP is lit according to the error type and the like.

For example, (1) the segment b lights up when notifying an error of overpayment, (2) the segment d lights up when notifying an error of payout ball clogging, and (3) the lower plate. When notifying a full tank error, the segment f lights up, (4) when notifying an error of running out of balls, the segment e lights up, and (5) when notifying a payout motor abnormality. Lights up the segment c.

The DP segment lights up when notifying that the ball is being lent. Therefore, the hall manager can easily determine what kind of error has occurred by visually recognizing the lighting state of the segment of the payout status notification display device 178.

First, (1) overpayment is not a stop factor even if it occurs, and is an error that allows the payout operation to be continued. As shown in FIG. 124, the trigger for notifying this overpayment error is that the number of game balls overpaid after the payout of the requested number of drops is completed is equal to or more than the specified number of overpayments (10 in the present embodiment). It is the timing that became.

In FIG. 124, the payout detection signal A is a signal indicating whether or not the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A, and is turned on when the game ball is detected. Similarly, the payout detection signal B is a signal indicating whether or not the game ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B.

In addition, this overpayment error is cleared when the power is turned on again. That is, the trigger for canceling the overpayment error is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the overpayment error is also canceled.

Next, (2) payout ball clogging is an error based on a stop factor caused by, for example, ball clogging due to backflow of a game ball, adhesion of dust or foreign matter, or disconnection or short circuit of the counting switch 181. As shown in FIG. 125, for example, when the payout detection signal A of the first counting switch 181A is turned on and does not turn off even after 100 ms, the payout ball is clogged, that is, a stop factor occurs. Is judged. When it is determined that this stop factor has occurred, it is used as a trigger for notifying the error of the payout ball clogging.

When the counting switch 181 is short-circuited, the payout control circuit 300 cannot directly determine the presence or absence of the short-circuit, so that it cannot be used as a stop factor until the retry operation of the origin adjustment control for 12 times described above is completed. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined that the stop factor has occurred with the lapse of the falling ball monitoring time after the retry operation of the origin adjustment control for 12 times is completed.

Further, if the payout control circuit 300 can recognize or determine the short circuit of the counting switch 181 by constantly monitoring the change in the voltage that can occur between the payout control circuit 300 and the counting switch 181, an error occurs without performing the retry operation. The notification may be performed, or the retry operation may be started at the same time as the error notification is performed.

Further, the notification of the error of the payout ball clogging is released by removing each factor such as the ball clogging due to the backflow, the adhesion of dust, the mixing of foreign matter, and the disconnection / short circuit of the counting switch 181.

Next, (3) the lower plate is full is an error based on a stop factor generated when the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 are full. As shown in FIG. 126, for example, when the lower plate full tank switch 179 is not turned off even after 1 second has passed since it was turned on, it is determined that a stop factor based on the lower plate full tank has occurred. When it is determined that this stop factor has occurred, it is the trigger for notifying the error that the lower plate is full.

Further, the notification of the error that the lower plate is full is released by discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 in a full state.

Next, (4) the ball out is the ball supply passage 171 when it is detected by the 15-ball collateral switch 172 that the collateral ball is insufficient, or when the game ball is waiting to be replenished to the ball tank 161. This is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when a ball is clogged or the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is disconnected.

Such a ball out error is caused by the first stop factor flag or the second stop factor flag based on the comparison result between the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B described above. It occurs when the stop factor flag of is set to 1.

The trigger for notifying this ball-out error is when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. In addition, this error of ball out is caused by replenishing the ball tank 161 with game balls or removing the game balls causing the ball clogging, so that a predetermined number (15) of game balls are sent to the ball supply passage 171. Is released by being secured. At this time, the notification of the ball out error is also canceled.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127, (5) the payout motor abnormality is caused by executing 12 retry operations based on, for example, the origin adjustment cycle, and the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) in the 12th retry operation has elapsed. Is also an error based on the stopping factor caused by not being able to confirm the falling ball.

Causes of such a stop factor include, for example, when a sticky game ball sticks to the sprocket 173 and does not separate, when a ball bites between the sprocket 173 and the storage ball (motor rotation failure), or a foreign substance. Examples include cases where step-out occurs due to motor non-rotation state (only excitation data is updated) such as mixing.

As shown in FIG. 127, the trigger for notifying the payout motor abnormality is when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. Further, this payout motor abnormality is canceled when the power is turned on again. That is, the trigger for canceling the payout motor abnormality is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the payout motor abnormality is also canceled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the reception process of the payout control circuit 300 at the time of power failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 128, when an XINT interrupt (power interruption) occurs as a non-maskable interrupt prior to the reception interrupt on the payout control circuit 300 side, the received data is polled in the XINT interrupt to 1 byte. Relieve.

Further, assuming that a power failure occurs immediately after writing to the transmission buffer by the main control circuit 70, the payout control circuit 300 side can receive after a delay of the baud rate time even during the processing of the XINT interrupt. As such, it is preferable to consider the elapsed time for receiving within the XINT interrupt. However, it is a condition that the XINT of the power interruption processing of the payout control circuit 300 does not occur electrically before the main control circuit 70.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the values of the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B (first value), respectively, on condition that the payout of the game balls is started. ) And the values (second value) of the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B are updated.

Therefore, if the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B continuously detect the game ball after the payout of the game ball is started, when the first value becomes 0, The second value, which is smaller than the first value, is already 0. In this case, it is guaranteed that the game balls have been replenished according to the payout of the game balls.

On the other hand, if the second value is not 0 when the first value becomes 0, it means that the game balls are not replenished according to the payout of the game balls for some reason.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by comparing the updated first value and the second value, whether or not the gaming balls are correctly replenished according to the payout of the gaming balls. Can be judged.

As a result, as compared with the case where it is determined whether or not the game ball is replenished based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B, for example, the first and second It is possible to accurately manage and guarantee the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passages 171A and 171B.

Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment prohibits the payout of game balls when the first value is 0 and the second value is not 0, the first and second ball supply passages are used. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the supply of game balls to 171A and 171B. As a result, the security regarding the supply and withdrawal of game balls can be further improved.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the second value becomes 0 when the first value is 0 and it is once guaranteed that the game balls have been replenished. After that, before the game balls are paid out, the game balls are excessively paid out due to a defect of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, for example, in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B. When the number of game balls is reduced, the payout of game balls can be prohibited.

As a result, the game balls in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B can be managed more accurately, and the security regarding the supply and withdrawal of the game balls can be further improved.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs retry control for driving the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (4 steps) until the game ball is detected by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. Since it can be executed, for example, a retry operation for eliminating ball biting can be performed without providing a slit sensor or the like for detecting the drive positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B.

Further, when such a retry operation is performed, the drive positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B when the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect the game ball are adjusted as the origin. It is also possible to adjust the origins of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B without using a slit sensor or the like.

In this way, since the retry operation can be used not only when the ball is bitten but also when the origin is adjusted, the retry control can be given versatility, and as a result, the processing by the payout CPU 301 can be simplified. ..

Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not provided with the slit sensor or the like, the pachinko gaming machine can be configured simply and at low cost.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the unit drive amount (4 steps) of the payout motor 174 when the retry control is executed pays out one game ball to the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. Since it is less than the payout drive amount (16 steps) required to pay out the next game ball after being made to pay out, the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B are set a plurality of times in order to pay out one game ball. It can be driven separately. Thereby, for example, when ball biting or the like occurs, it can be eliminated, and when adjusting the origin, it can be adjusted to an accurate origin.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the unit drive amount (4 steps) described above is the drive amount obtained by dividing the payout drive amount (16 steps) into four times, one game ball is paid out. The number of times the payout motor 174 is driven can be divided into a plurality of times.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the driving amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds the upper limit driving amount (192 steps) without detecting the game ball by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. Sometimes the payout means can be stopped until the initialization operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize ball case unit 170 from malfunctioning due to repeated excessive retry operations.

Further, since the payout motor 174 is stopped until the initialization operation is performed, the payout motor 174 is stopped so that, for example, there are no game balls accumulated in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B. It is possible to urge that the prize ball case unit 170 and thus the pachinko game machine 1 need to be returned from the abnormal state.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the origin adjustment control (retry control) when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited, that is, when the stop factor flag is set to 1. After the driving of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B is stopped due to an abnormality, the retry operation can be performed without fail.

In this way, by performing the retry operation in conjunction with the drive stop of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, the process can proceed smoothly as compared with the case where the retry operation is performed alone.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes a retry operation in the origin adjustment control (retry control) until the game ball is detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B, and also operates the motor. Since the number of times the number is updated (the number of retries) is managed as the number of retries, it is certain how many times the retries have been performed regardless of whether or not the game balls are detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B. It can be easily grasped. In addition, the number of retry operations can be reliably and easily grasped even if a slit sensor or the like is not provided. As a result, the retry operation can be smoothly managed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the number of retries exceeds the upper limit number (12 times) without detecting the game ball by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B, the origin adjustment control ( Since the retry control) is terminated, it is possible to prevent the prize ball case unit 170 from malfunctioning due to repeated excessive retry operations.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment compares the total number of game balls actually paid out with the number of requested payouts. As a result of the comparison, the total number of game balls actually paid out and the payout request are made. If there is a difference between the number and the number of balls, it can be grasped as an overpayment of the game balls.

Further, when the above-mentioned difference resulting in overpayment exceeds the allowable value (10), the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are stopped until the initialization operation is performed. Therefore, for example, due to fraudulent activity or the like. When there is an unnatural overpayment, it is possible to prevent further overpayment.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an overpayment occurs, the overpayment is the difference between the total number of game balls actually paid out and the required number of payout amounts until the initialization operation is performed. The number of game balls related to the above can be accumulated.

Thereby, for example, the fact of unnatural overpayment caused by fraudulent acts and the amount of unnecessary game balls paid out (number of prize balls and number of rented balls) caused by the overpayment can be reliably detected.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the falling ball monitoring time after driving the payout motor 174, the gaming balls corresponding to the number of requested drops are the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B. Since it is determined whether or not it has been detected by, the payout motor 174 can be cooled during the fall ball monitoring time, and at the same time, it is confirmed whether or not the game balls corresponding to the number of fall requests have been paid out. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently manage the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of rented balls) while ensuring a sufficient cooling period of the payout motor 174.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time after driving the payout motor 174 is a holding period for holding the postures of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B and the payout motor. Since it is composed of a cooling period of 174, the postures of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be maintained after the payout motor 174 is stopped, and the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B have inertial forces. Therefore, it is possible to prevent over-rotation. Further, the payout motor 174 can be cooled by providing the cooling period.

Further, if the number of game balls corresponding to the required number of drops is not detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B during the holding period and the cooling period, the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped. The drive of the payout motor 174 can be efficiently managed by utilizing the cooling period.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 134.

It should be noted that the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment of the present invention in that the payout destination (movement destination) of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be switched, but other configurations are different. It is configured in much the same way. Therefore, in the following, the description of the configuration similar to that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in particular.

As shown in FIG. 129, the prize ball case unit 170 of the present embodiment has a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B as in the first embodiment, and each of these passages has. Since it has a two-row structure, it has the same configuration. Therefore, the configuration will be described by taking the first payout passage 180A as an example.

The first payout passage 180A of the present embodiment is a first ball passage for paying out (or guiding, supplying, circulating) the game ball to the inside of the pachinko gaming machine (for example, the upper plate 21 or the like). The 401A and the second ball passage 402A for guiding (moving) (or paying out, supplying, and circulating) the game ball to the outside of the pachinko game machine (for example, the ball circulation path of the island management facility). Have.

Here, the island management facility is a device that can be connected to a plurality of or a single gaming machine and a gaming device (for example, a sand, a counter for each machine, a data display, etc.) provided for the gaming machine. It is a management device for managing the state of a game ball or a game machine, and is connected to a facility (for example, a computer or a data management device) that manages a game hall, which is usually called a hall computer. Information about the game machine is aggregated and data is transmitted.

Here, the ball circulation path is a device provided in the island management device that enables sharing of game balls between a plurality of or a single game machine, and the ball circulation path can be independently driven as a ball circulation device. It may be a device, it is not essential that the island management device is provided, it may be provided in the game machine, or it may be a device that circulates the game balls in the game machine.

The second payout passage 180B also has a first ball passage 401B and a second ball passage 402B. Hereinafter, the first ball passage 401A and the first ball passage 401B are collectively referred to as "first ball passage 401", and the second ball passage 402A and the second ball passage 402B are collectively referred to as "first ball passage 401". There is a case of "2 ball passage 402".

Further, the first ball passage 401A is provided with a first counting switch 491A as a first detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through the first ball passage 401A, and the second ball passage 402A is provided with a first counting switch 491A. , A first ball removal switch 492A is provided as a second detection means that passes through the second ball passage 402A.

Similarly, the second counting switch 491B and the second ball removing switch 492B are provided for the first ball passage 401B and the second ball passage 402B. The first counting switch 491A and the second counting switch 491B are collectively referred to as "counting switch 491", and the first ball removing switch 492A and the second ball removing switch 492B are collectively referred to as "ball removing switch 492". There is a case.

Further, between the payout passage 180, more specifically, the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is set to the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage. First and second flappers 400A and 400B are provided as passage switching means controlled by the payout CPU 301 so as to switch to either one of 402. These first and second flappers 400A and 400B may be collectively referred to as "flapper 400".

The flapper 400 has a flapper drive device 410 (see FIG. 130), and the payout CPU 301 controls the drive of the flapper drive device 410 so that the flapper 400 can rotate in the direction of the arrow in the drawing.

Specifically, the flapper 400 has a position where the payout destination of the game ball is on the second ball passage 402 side (position shown by a broken line in the figure) and a position where the payout destination of the game ball is on the first ball passage 401 side. It is designed to rotate between the position (the position indicated by the solid line in the figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 130, in the payout control circuit 300 of the present embodiment, the first counting switch 491A, the second counting switch 491B, the first ball removal switch 492A, and the second ball described above are used. The pull-out switch 492B and the flapper drive device 410 are connected. Although the flapper drive device 410 is common to the first flapper 400A and the second flapper 400B, it may be provided separately.

Further, when the payout CPU 301 of the present embodiment executes the above-described retry operation without the number of prize balls and the number of loaned balls (payout amount) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300, the game ball The flapper 400 is switched via the flapper drive device 410 so that the payout destination is the second ball passage 402.

Further, when the payout CPU 301 of the present embodiment executes the retry operation in a state where the flapper 400 is switched so that the payout destination of the game ball is the second ball passage 402, the ball removal switch 492 is used to perform the game ball. The retry operation is terminated on the condition that is detected.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described, in particular, only the processes including steps different from those of the first embodiment.

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
First, the system timer interrupt processing by the payout CPU 301 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131.

As shown in FIG. 131, in the system timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment, each step of S531 to S535 is the same as S431 to S435 in the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 105) in the first embodiment. Therefore, the description of these steps will be omitted.

After the process of S535 is completed, the payout CPU 301 executes the motor drive process described later (S536) and executes the origin adjustment excitation data setting process (S537). After that, the payout CPU 301 executes the command transmission process (S538) and ends the system timer interrupt process. The command transmission process (S538) of the present embodiment is the same as the command transmission process (S437) of the first embodiment.

[Counting switch detection process]
First, the counting switch detection process performed in S535 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 131) of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132.

As shown in FIG. 132, in the counting switch detection process in the present embodiment, each step of S581 to S590 is the same as S481 to S490 in the counting switch detection process (see FIG. 108) in the first embodiment. Therefore, the description of these steps will be omitted.

When S581 is a NO determination, S587 is a NO determination, S589 is a NO determination, or after the end of S590, the payout CPU 301 has the first ball removal switch 492A or the second ball removal switch 492B as a game ball. It is determined whether or not the passage of is detected (S591).

In S591, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball pulling switch 492A or the second ball pulling switch 492B has not detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S591 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines. The counting switch detection process is terminated.

On the other hand, in S591, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball pulling switch 492A or the second ball pulling switch 492B has detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S591 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines. It is determined whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S592).

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S592 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1, (when the determination in S592 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

On the other hand, in S592, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when the determination in S592 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S593).

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S594). After that, the payout CPU 301 controls the flapper drive device 410 to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A and 400B to the first ball passages 401A and 401B (payout side) (S595), and the counting switch. End the detection process.

[Motor drive processing]
First, the motor drive process performed in S536 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 131) of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 133.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (S601).

In S601, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S601 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and drives the motor. End the process.

On the other hand, in S601, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S601 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S602).

In S602, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S602 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no collateral ball and the motor. The drive process ends.

On the other hand, in S602, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S602 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and pays out. It is determined whether or not the requested number is greater than 0 (S603).

If the payout CPU 301 determines in S603 that the number of payout requests is not greater than 0 (NO in S603), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request and ends the motor drive process.

On the other hand, in S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is larger than 0 (when the determination in S603 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request and executes the motor start initial process (the motor start initial process). S604). Since the motor start initial process is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a start state setting process of the payout motor 174 (S605). In this process, since the payout CPU 301 does not perform the origin adjustment control, the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 and the like are set according to the number of drop requests so that the normal game ball is paid out.

After that, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S606). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data for a predetermined step as the drive amount required to pay out the game balls corresponding to the number of requested drops, assuming that the normal game balls are paid out.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout control flag to "1" (S607), and ends the motor drive process. Here, the payout control flag is a flag in which "0" or "1" is set depending on whether or not the flapper 400 is switched, and is set to "1" when the flapper 400 is switched. This is a flag set to "0" when the flapper 400 is not switched.

[Origin adjustment excitation data setting process]
First, with reference to FIG. 134, the origin adjustment excitation data setting process performed in S537 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 131) of the present embodiment will be described.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S611). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S611 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S611), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for origin adjustment control and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting process. To do. Therefore, when S611 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

On the other hand, in S611, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when the determination in S611 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for origin adjustment control, and the number of retries is 12 or more. It is determined whether or not it is large, that is, whether or not the origin adjustment control is performed 12 times (S612). Therefore, when the determination in S611 is YES, the origin adjustment control is performed.

In S612, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is larger than 12 (when the determination in S612 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit (12 times). Then, the processing is transferred to S613.

In S613, the payout CPU 301 sets the start state of the payout motor 174 (S613), and shifts the process to S623. In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout motor 174 to an idle state in order to stop the payout of the game ball.

On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S612 that the number of retries is not greater than 12 (NO in S612), the payout CPU 301 resets the activated state of the payout motor 174 (S614).

Next, the payout CPU 301 resets the excitation data (S615) and determines whether or not the payout control flag is 1 (S616). In S616, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is not 1 (when the payout control flag is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that switching between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is unnecessary. Then, the process is transferred to S618. In this case, the first and second flappers 400A and 400B are not switched, and the payout destination of the game ball is maintained on the first ball passages 401A and 401B side (payout side).

On the other hand, in S616, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is 1 (when the determination in S616 is YES), the payout CPU 301 needs to switch between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B. It is determined that the flagper drive device 410 is controlled to automatically switch the first and second flagpers 400A and 400B to the second ball passages 402A and 402B (ball removal side) (S617).

Next, when the determination in S616 is NO, or after the end of S617, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to four steps in preparation for the origin adjustment control (S618). In this process, four steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when the origin adjustment control is executed.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motors to be operated to one (S619), and sets the number of origin request retries to four (S620). In this process, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is obtained by multiplying the four steps set as the step counter mask value in S618 described above by the four times set as the number of origin request retries. 16 steps are set.

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer and sets it to 0 (S621). The falling ball monitoring timer is the same as that of the first embodiment. Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to "0" (S622).

Next, after the end of S613 or after the end of S622, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S623), and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting process. In this process, for example, when performing origin adjustment control, excitation data for 16 steps is set as a payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball.

Further, in the case of paying out the normal game balls, the excitation data for a predetermined step is set as the driving amount required to pay out the game balls corresponding to the requested number of drops. When the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state so that the payout of the game ball is stopped, the excitation data is set to 0.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment exerts the following actions and effects in addition to the actions and effects in the first embodiment.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the payout destination of the game ball is set to either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402 in each of the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B, respectively. Since the flapper 400 for switching to one of the two is provided, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed when the game ball is paid out to the outside of the game machine, for example, when the game ball is rented or when the prize ball is paid out. At that time, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be switched to the first ball passage 401 by the flapper 400.

On the other hand, when the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without paying out the game ball to the outside of the game machine, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is switched to the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400. Can be done. As a result, overpayment of the game ball by the origin adjustment control (retry control) is prevented.

Therefore, by switching to either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed regardless of whether or not the game ball is paid out to the outside of the game machine. be able to.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the origin adjustment control (retry control) in a state where there is no payout amount (number of prize balls and number of rented balls) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. Since the flapper 400 is switched so that the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is the second ball passage 402, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without paying the game ball to the outside of the game machine. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the sprocket 173 from overpaying the game ball.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment ends the origin adjustment control (retry control) on the condition that the ball removal switch 492 detects the game ball, so that the payout amount (the number of prize balls) stored in the RAM 303 is stored. And even if the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without the number of rented balls), the game ball is not detected by the counting switch 491.

Therefore, the game balls paid out from the sprocket 173 are paid out to the outside of the game machine by the origin adjustment control (retry control) executed without the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of rented balls) stored in the RAM 303. It is possible to prevent the ball from being detected as a game ball. As a result, the range of operations of origin adjustment control (retry control) can be expanded.

(Third Embodiment)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137.

In the present embodiment, the first embodiment of the present invention is particularly different from the remaining number of drop requests obtained by subtracting one ball from the number of drop requests after the completion of the origin adjustment control (for example, 15 before the subtraction). The remaining number of drop requests is 14), which is different in that the game balls are paid out, but the other configurations are substantially the same.

Therefore, in the following, the description of the configuration similar to that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in particular. Specifically, only the processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The processing other than the processing described below (for example, system timer interrupt processing and the like) is the same as the processing in the first embodiment.

[Counting switch detection process]
First, with reference to FIG. 135, the counting switch detection process performed in S435 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) similar to that of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting switch detection process in the present embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (S681). In S681, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has not detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S681 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is the counting switch. End the detection process. Here, when the origin adjustment control is in progress, the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, so S681 is determined as NO.

On the other hand, in S681, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S681 is YES), the payout CPU 301 requests a drop. The number is subtracted by "1" (S682).

That is, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of dropped requests on condition that the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B. The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a delimited payout amount update means.

Here, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the number of payout requests is not subtracted in the counting switch detection process. When the number of drop requests is determined (set) in S727 in the initial motor start processing (see FIG. 137) described later, the number of payout requests is equal to the number of game balls corresponding to the determined (set) number of drop requests. It has been subtracted.

In other words, when the number of drop requests is determined (set), the payout CPU 301 subtracts the number of game balls corresponding to the determined (set) number of drop requests from the number of payout requests. There is. The payout CPU 301 that subtracts the game ball constitutes the subtraction means.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S683). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S683 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1, (when the determination in S683 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

On the other hand, in S683, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when the determination in S683 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S684).

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S685). After that, the payout CPU 301 sets the flag to 1 after the origin adjustment is executed (S686), and ends the counting switch detection process.

Here, the post-origin adjustment flag is a flag in which "0" or "1" is set depending on whether the origin adjustment control has been executed or before (not executed), and the origin adjustment control This is a flag that is set to "1" when it is after the execution of, and is set to "0" when it is before the execution of the origin adjustment control.

[Motor start waiting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the motor start waiting process performed in S436 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 105) similar to that of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start waiting process in the present embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S701). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S701 that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (NO in S701), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is in progress and shifts the process to S705.

On the other hand, in S701, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (when the determination in S701 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, and the first Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S702).

In S702, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S702 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. End the wait process.

On the other hand, in S702, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S702 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S703).

In S703, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S703 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no collateral ball and the motor. Ends the startup waiting process.

On the other hand, in S703, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S703 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball, which will be described later. The initial process for starting the motor (see FIG. 41) is executed (S704). In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, it is not determined whether or not the number of requested payouts is larger than 0.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout request flag described later is set, and whether or not there is a payout request from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300 is determined by the payout request flag. This payout request flag is transmitted at the same time when the information on the number of payout requests is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300, for example. The payout request flag is set to "1" when there is a payout request, and is set to "0" when there is no payout request.

Here, since the processing of S705 to S713 is the same as the processing of S506 to S514 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Initial motor start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the motor start initial process performed in S704 during the motor start wait process (see FIG. 136) of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start initial processing in the present embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the flag after the origin adjustment is executed is 1 (S721). In S721, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the flag after the origin adjustment execution is not 1 (when the determination in S721 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has not been executed (or has not been executed). , The process is transferred to S723.

On the other hand, in S721, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the flag after the origin adjustment is executed is 1 (when the determination in S721 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been executed and falls. It is determined whether or not the requested number is 0 or less (S722).

In S722, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of drop requests is not 0 or less (when the determination in S722 is NO), the payout CPU 301 keeps the number of drop requests as it is, that is, in the counting switch detection process (see FIG. 135). The process is transferred to S728 with the number of dropped requests after subtracting "1" in S682.

On the other hand, in S722, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of drop requests is 0 or less (when the determination in S722 is YES), the payout CPU 301 resets (or initially sets) the number of drop requests. , The value of the drop request number is reduced to the payout request number (S723).

For example, when the value of the number of drop requests becomes "-1" due to overpayment of the game ball, the payout CPU 301 subtracts "1" from the number of payout requests that have already been subtracted by the number of drop requests.

That is, the payout CPU 301 reflects the number of drop requests (“-1” in the case of overpayment) after subtracting “1” in S682 of the above-mentioned counting switch detection process (see FIG. 135) in the payout request number. The payout CPU 301 that performs such reflection constitutes a reflection means. When the process of S723 is performed for the first time (first time), both the number of requests for payout and the number of requests for drop are "0".

Here, in the payout CPU 301, when all the game balls corresponding to the number of payout requests are paid out, the number of drop requests after "1" is subtracted in S682 of the above-mentioned counting switch detection process (see FIG. 135) is ". If it is not "0", it is determined that a payout error has occurred. The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout error determination means.

For example, when the number of game balls requested to be paid out is greater than the number of dropped requests after subtraction described above when the number of game balls requested to be paid out is greater than "0", it can be determined that a payout error due to underpayment has occurred.

On the other hand, when the number of falling requests after subtraction is smaller than "0" when the number of game balls requested to be paid out is paid out, it can be determined that a payout error due to overpayment has occurred.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the number of payout requests is smaller than "-10" (S724). That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of overpaid items is 10 or more.

In S724, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the number of payout requests is smaller than "-10" (when the determination in S724 is YES), the payout CPU 301 does not have the number of game balls related to overpayment within the permissible range. It is determined that the overpay flag is set to 1 (S725), and the motor start initial processing is completed.

On the other hand, in S724, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the number of payout requests is not smaller than "-10" (when the determination in S724 is NO), the payout CPU 301 allows the number of game balls related to overpayment. It is determined that it is within the range, and it is determined whether or not the payout request flag is 1. (S726).

In S726, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request flag is not 1 (when the payout request flag is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request for the game ball from the main control circuit 70. Motor start Initial processing is completed.

On the other hand, in S726, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request flag is 1 (when the determination in S726 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the number of drop requests from the number of payout requests (S727).

In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers are set according to the payout request number (total payout amount). At this time, at the same time as setting the number of drop requests, the number of payout requests is subtracted by the set number of drop requests.

Here, since the processing of S728 to S734 is the same as the processing of S522 to S528 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment exerts the following actions and effects in addition to the actions and effects in the first embodiment.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of dropped requests is updated on condition that the gaming balls are detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B. That is, the drop request number is updated every time a game ball is detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B.

As a result, for example, when the payout motor 174 is driven to pay out the game balls according to the number of fall requests, if the payout exceeds the drop request number (overpayment), the overpaid amount of the game balls The number of drops required can be updated by adding the number.

On the other hand, the payout request number is subtracted by the number of game balls corresponding to the drop request number when the drop request number is determined, and then the updated drop request number is reflected. As a result, even if the above-mentioned overpayment occurs by driving the payout motor 174 once, the number of game balls subtracted from the number of payout requests and the number of game balls actually paid out can be obtained. Can be matched.

As a result, it is not necessary to stop the payout motor 174 every time an overpayment occurs by driving the payout motor 174 once, so that the payout of the game ball can be continued. Therefore, smooth payout can be performed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is an enclosed gaming machine, in which a launching means for launching a gaming ball is installed on the upper part of the gaming machine, and the launched gaming ball passes through a gaming area provided on the gaming board. (The game board itself may be the game area), and it is also applied to the enclosed game machine collected by the ball polishing device or the lifting device provided in the game machine.

When the game machine according to the present invention is applied to such a game machine, a means (for example, a screw or the like) for lifting a game ball provided in a lifting device by a sprocket, a payout motor, etc. Even if the driving means for driving the means for lifting (for example, a lifting motor) and the counting switch are the discharge detecting means from the lifting device (for example, a sensor for managing the circulation of a game ball). Good.

According to the present embodiment, the game ball passes through the payout passage 180, is paid out to the upper plate 21 provided on the front surface of the game machine, and moves from the upper plate 21 to the launching device 15, as described above. The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to a device such as a device for lifting to a launching device 15.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sprocket 173, and the payout passage 180 may be integrally formed. The term "integrally" expressed here includes a state in which it is integrally formed by welding, die cutting, screwing, caulking, or the like.

Further, from the four configurations exemplified in the case where the ball tank lower passage 162 and the ball supply passage 171 are integrally formed, and the case where the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sub rocket 173 are integrally formed. The two configurations may be extracted and integrally formed by the different configurations.

Similarly, the case where the ball passage near the sprocket 173 and the payout passage 180 are integrally formed, and the case where the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sprocket 173 are integrally formed are exemplified. Three configurations may be extracted from the four configurations to be formed, and the body may be formed by the different configurations.

Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided in a game member (for example, a decorative unit or a ball polishing device of an enclosed game machine) constituting the game machine. This means that the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied even when the device provided with the member corresponding to the sprocket 173 is connected to the gaming member acting as the ball supply passage 171.

Further, the ball supply bribe 171 may be provided with a configuration in which the game ball can be moved like the sub rocket 173, and generally, the game existing in the ball supply passage 171 in conjunction with and in synchronization with the sprocket 173. If the ball is movable, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied.

Further, in the embodiment of the present embodiment, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period), and when the excitation data holding period elapses, the current of the payout motor 174 becomes a low current. It is switched and then maintained at a low current for 470 ms (cooling period). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data retention period) and 470 ms (cooling period), but the present invention is not limited to this, and 30 ms (excitation data). The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) may be configured by the holding period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period).

By having such a configuration, the position of the sprocket 173 can be finely adjusted during the sprocket adjustment period, and forward rotation and reverse rotation assuming ball biting may be repeated. Further, when a heat detecting means capable of detecting the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is provided and the payout control circuit 300 can determine an abnormality of the payout motor 174 when the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value and a predetermined range. May continue to use the sprocket adjustment period as the cooling period.

Further, even if the heat detecting means is not provided, when the payout of a predetermined value or more (for example, when paying out a maximum of 16 balls, the payout of 10 or more balls) continues for a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 3 times or more). The sprocket adjustment period may be set to a specific value (for example, 50 ms). At this time, the set sprocket adjustment period may be a predetermined value or a constant value. Normally, it is not necessary to set a sprocket adjustment period for cooling because a sufficient cooling period is provided, but since the environment differs depending on the game venue where the game machine is installed, the payout motor is used in the original cooling period. Cooling of 174 may be inadequate. Therefore, by assuming such a case and adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to take care of the cooling period of the payout motor 174 when the payout is continuous. As a result, it becomes possible to pay out more safely.

As described above, when the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data retention period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period), the ball falls. It can be expressed that the cooling period of the payout motor 174 is extended based on the extension of the ball monitoring time, and it can also be expressed that the falling ball monitoring time is extended based on the extension of the cooling period. Is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the flapper 400 is controlled by the payout CPU 301 to switch to either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402, the shape, material, and driving method are particularly limited. It's not something. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, it may be plate-shaped, or it may be moved horizontally by being cured by a game ball falling from the upper part of the ball passage so that the game ball cannot pass through one of the ball passages. As a result, the mechanism may be such that the game balls can be distributed, or the mechanism is provided like the sprocket 173, and the game balls are once received and then guided in an arbitrary direction. There may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, 5 ms × 4 steps are defined as excitation data corresponding to the unit drive amount, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the unit drive amount is not set and the number of retries is one time. As the excitation data in, the payout motor 174 of 5 ms × 16 steps is driven, and the excitation data retention period 30 ms + cooling period 470 ms = 500 ms after the drive of the payout motor 174 of 5 ms × 16 steps is stopped is set. Set to 5000 ms (basic retry operation period), and subtract the excitation data retention period, cooling period, and time required for one retry (5 ms x 16 = 80 ms) from the basic retry operation period to subtract the time required for the falling ball. It may be set as a monitoring time, and when a stop factor occurs or a specified number of retries (240 times) are completed within the falling ball monitoring time, the state may be shifted to the idle state. At this time, the maximum number of retries is 240, and the time required for one retry is set as the basic retry operation period. As a result, a sufficient monitoring time is set as the falling ball monitoring time, so that the falling ball monitoring time can be used as the time to be stored for intermittent prevention when the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is disconnected. It will be possible to pay out more safely.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be moved by one drive of the payout motor 174 is subtracted based on the number of game balls detected by the counting switch 181 in the retry control to request the number of drops (separation). Although the payout amount) is set, the term "setting the drop request number (separate payout amount)" here can include contents such as determination, update, and change.

Further, the payout in the present embodiment is premised on paying out the game ball as the game medium, but is not limited to this, and the game medium includes medals, credits, the number of electronically managed game media, and the like. It is considered to pay out various media such as pseudo media that are treated in monetary terms.

The "movement" described in the claims of the present application includes a case where the position of the game ball is moved by the game ball control means such as payout, lending, retry control, and lifting. Therefore, the present invention can be applied to any case as long as the position of the game ball is moved by the above-mentioned game ball control means.

In addition, "the game ball moves" means that the game ball is free when the game ball is directly pushed or pulled by the game ball control means, or when the lock of the game ball is released. The indirect movement of the game ball, which is assumed when one or more game balls move indirectly as a result of starting the fall or moving one game ball by the game ball control means. Including the case.

Further, the "accessory" in the present invention may include a general gimmick, a movable member (movable body), a decorative member, and the like, and may or may not be driven. You may. Further, although a plurality of movable bodies may be collectively referred to as "roles", in the present invention, they may be a single movable body or a general term for a plurality of movable bodies. Further, in the case of a "role" formed by a plurality of movable bodies, it is conceivable that the plurality of movable bodies are interlocked, close to each other, and united.

[Application example]
In each of the above-described embodiments and the above-mentioned various modifications, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other game machines, for example, to various game machines such as ball game machines, gaming machines, enclosed game machines, slot machines and pachislot game machines. You can also.

(Appendix 1)
In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 described above, one motor is provided for each door, and three pairs of left and right doors are provided in the front-rear direction of the display area. It is necessary to install the door by reducing the gap in the front-rear direction of the door so that the distance in the front-rear direction does not become long.

For this reason, if a situation occurs in which the guide rail bends in the front-rear direction due to some external force, the distance in the front-rear direction of the door member cannot be kept constant, and the door member may not move smoothly in the left-right direction. is there.

In particular, when another accessory that moves outside the game area and inside the game area is installed behind the door member, the other accessory is blocked by the second door member and the game is played from outside the game area. It may not move smoothly into the area.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and can keep the distance between the first moving member and the second moving member in the front-rear direction constant, and the first moving member and the second moving member can be kept constant. An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of smoothly moving a moving member.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a first moving member movably provided so as to be located at a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position). (Right gold door 421, left gold door 422, right silver door 423, left silver door 424) and a second moving member (right lightning bolt 81, left lightning bolt) movably provided from the standby position to the drive position. A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) having a thing 86) and a guide member (guide rail 425) that movably supports the first moving member, and the guide member is fixed to the game machine. The second moving member is fixed to the installed fixing member (lower panel base 450), the second moving member is supported by a base member (base plate 93) different from the fixing member, and the first moving member is the second moving member. The guide member has a predetermined distance from the moving member of the above, the guide member is provided between the fixing member and the second moving member, and the first moving member has a first position and a first position. A first movable member (right gold door 421, left gold door 422) movably provided so as to be located at the second position, and a first position located behind the first movable member. It is configured to include a second movable member (, right silver door 423, left silver door 424) provided so as to be movable so as to be located at the second position, and the first movable member and the second movable member. A pair of long members (upper guide shaft 426, lower guide shaft 427) provided on the opposite side of the movable member and movably supporting the first movable member and the second movable member. ), And the first movable member is provided as a pair so as to be located at the first position and the second position, and the second movable member is positioned at the first position and the second position. One of the pair of first movable members (right metal door 421) is movably attached to one of the pair of long members (upper guide shaft 426), and the pair of first movable members is movably attached to the pair. The other of the movable members 1 (left gold door 422) is movably attached to the other of the pair of long members (lower guide shaft), and one of the pair of second movable members (right silver door 423). Is movably attached to the other of the pair of long members (lower guide shaft), and the other of the pair of second movable members (left silver door 424) is one of the pair of long members (upper). A first movable member driving means (gold door drive motor 60E) movably attached to the guide shaft 426) and provided on one side of the pair of long members in the extending direction, and the first movable member driving. Driven by means, said first A first movable member moving mechanism (451) for moving the movable member 1 between a first position and a second position, and a second movable member moving mechanism (451) provided on the other side of the pair of long members in the extending direction. The movable member driving means (silver door drive motor 60F) and the first movable member moving mechanism are separated from each other in the front-rear direction and driven by the second movable member driving means. It is configured to include a second movable member moving mechanism (452) that moves the second movable member between the first position and the second position.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the guide member is fixed to the fixing member fixedly installed on the gaming machine, and the second moving member is supported by a base member different from the fixing member. The moving member of the above has a predetermined distance from the second moving member, and the guide member is provided between the fixing member and the second moving member.

As a result, the guide member can be fixed so as to be attracted to the fixing member side, and the rigidity of the guide member can be increased. Therefore, when some external force is applied to the guide member, the guide member can be prevented from bending in the front-rear direction, and the gap between the first moving member and the second moving member in the front-rear direction can be kept constant. .. Therefore, the first moving member and the second moving member can be smoothly moved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, one of the pair of first movable members is attached to one of the pair of long members, and the other of the pair of first movable members is attached to the other of the pair of long members. One of the pair of second movable members is attached to the other of the pair of elongated members, and the other of the pair of second movable members is movably attached to one of the pair of elongated members. It has a first movable member driving means provided on one side in the extending direction of the long member and a second movable member driving means provided on the other side in the extending direction of the pair of long members.

As a result, the first movable member driving means and the second movable member driving means can be installed so as to reduce the gap between the first movable member and the second movable member in the front-rear direction, and the first movable member and the first movable member can be installed. It is possible to realize an effective effect using the movable member of 2.

Further, since the gap between the first movable member and the second movable member in the front-rear direction can be reduced, for example, when the first movable member moves from the second position to the first position, the second movable member can be moved. An effect that the member moves from the first position to the second position, that is, the first movable member and the second movable member so that the open / closed states of the first movable member and the second movable member are switched. When the effect of moving the and the player is performed, the effect can be visually effective for the player by the amount that the gap between the first movable member and the second movable member can be reduced.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the visual effect of the production of the door accessory, improve the interest in the production, and improve the interest in the game of the player.

Further, since the gap between the first movable member and the second movable member in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the length of the game machine in the front-rear direction can be shortened. As a result, the installation space of the game machine can be reduced.

(Appendix 2)
The present invention relates to a game machine, and more particularly to a game machine including a first moving member and a second moving member provided so as to be movable.

For example, a so-called pachinko gaming machine is known as a gaming machine that plays a game using a gaming ball. It is known that such a pachinko gaming machine enhances the effect of production by providing a door accessory that moves in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming area.

Conventionally, as a game machine provided with a door accessory, for example, the one described in Patent Document 1 is known. In Patent Document 1, three sets of a pair of door members are installed in front of a display area for displaying an image on both left and right sides of the display area in the front-rear direction of the display area in a slot machine. The lower part of the door member is supported by a guide rail so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

A shielding portion is formed on each door member, and a guide member is integrally provided. By engaging a pinion gear driven by a motor with a rack formed on the guide member and rotating the motor in the forward and reverse directions. , The door member that moves in the left-right direction is configured to shield or open the display area.

Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 described above, one motor is provided for each door, and three pairs of left and right doors are provided in the front-rear direction of the display area. The distance in the front-rear direction of the game machine becomes long.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of shortening the length of the game machine in the front-rear direction.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a first moving member movably provided so as to be located at a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position). (Right gold door 421, left gold door 422, right silver door 423, left silver door 424) and a second moving member (right lightning bolt 81, left lightning bolt) movably provided from the standby position to the drive position. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an object 86), wherein the first moving member has a predetermined distance from the second moving member, and the first moving member is , The first movable member (right gold door 421, left gold door 422) and the second movable member (right silver door 423, left silver door 424) located behind the first movable member. A long member (upper guide shaft 426, lower guide shaft 427) that includes and supports the first movable member and the second movable member, and the long member are provided on one side in the extending direction. A first movable member driving means (gold door driving motor 60E) and a second movable member driving means (silver door driving motor 60F) provided on the other side in the extending direction of the long member are provided. The first movable member driving means moves the first movable member, and the second movable member driving means is provided so as to be separated from the first movable member driving means in the front-rear direction. It is composed of one that moves the second movable member.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can reduce the gap between the first movable member and the second movable member in the front-rear direction, and is therefore necessary for installing the first movable member and the second movable member. Space can be reduced, and as a result, the length of the game machine in the front-rear direction can be shortened. As a result, the installation space of the game machine can be reduced.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first movable member driving means is provided on one side in the extending direction of the long member, and the second movable member driving means is provided on the other side in the extending direction of the long member. Has been done. As a result, the first movable member driving means and the second movable member driving means can be installed so as to reduce the gap between the first movable member and the second movable member in the front-rear direction, and the first movable member and the first movable member can be installed. It is possible to realize an effective effect using the movable member of 2.

Further, since the gap between the first movable member and the second movable member in the front-rear direction can be reduced, for example, when the first movable member moves, the second movable member moves, that is, When the first movable member and the second movable member are moved so as to switch the open / closed states of the first movable member and the second movable member, the first movable member and the second movable member are movable. As the gap between the members can be reduced, it is possible to produce a visually effective effect for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visual effect of the production of the door accessory, improve the interest in the production, and improve the interest in the game of the player.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of shortening the length of the gaming machine in the front-rear direction.

1 Pachinko game machine 4 Glass door (frame)
12 Game board 13a Display area 58A to 58D Decorative member (frame side decorative member)
58E-58H Decorative member (Game board side decorative member)
59p, 59r light emitting element 60A motor (third driving means, third moving mechanism)
60B motor (first driving means, driving means, first moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
60C motor (second drive means, drive means, second movement mechanism, movement mechanism)
60D motor (decorative accessory driving means)
60E gold door drive motor (first movable member driving means)
60e, 60f motor shaft (output shaft)
60F silver door drive motor (second movable member drive means)
81 Right lightning accessory (first accessory, accessory, second moving member)
85A protruding part (first accessory side engaging part)
86 Left lightning accessory (second accessory, accessory, second moving member)
90A protruding part (second accessory side engaging part)
91 Right lightning accessory arm (third rocking member, third moving mechanism)
91C tooth part (first base end engaging part)
91D protruding part (third rocking member side engaging part)
92 Left lightning accessory arm (4th rocking member, 3rd moving mechanism)
92C tooth part (second base end engaging part)
92D protruding part (fourth rocking member side engaging part)
93 Base plate (support plate, base member)
93A guide groove (third support plate side guide)
93B guide groove (fourth support plate side guide)
93C guide groove (first support plate side guide)
93D guide groove (second support plate side guide)
94 gear (third moving mechanism)
95 gear (third moving mechanism)
96 Right lightning accessory arm (first swing member, first moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
96A pin (first swing shaft)
96B guide groove (first swing member side guide portion)
96D protruding part (first swinging member side engaging part)
98 Cam gear (first moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
99 gears (first moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
100 gears (first moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
101 Left lightning accessory arm (second swing member, second moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
101A pin (second swing shaft)
101B guide groove (second swing member side guide)
101D protruding part (second swinging member side engaging part)
102 Cam gear (second moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
103 gear (second moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
106 1st moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
107 Second moving mechanism, moving mechanism)
108 Third movement mechanism 210 Logo accessory (decorative accessory)
211A Right character part (decorative part, first decorative part)
211B Left character part (decorative part, second decorative part)
211C Chinese character part (decorative part)
220 Base lens (decorative member)
225 base plate (holding plate)
225A guide groove (first holding plate side guide portion)
225B guide groove (second holding plate side guide)
225C guide pin (first swing fulcrum)
225D guide pin (second swing fulcrum)
226 Moving mechanism 227 Support member 228 Cam gear (moving mechanism)
229 Main arm (main rocking member, moving mechanism)
229D guide groove (first main swing member side guide portion)
229E Guide groove (second main rocking member side guide)
231 Logo link (movement mechanism)
232 compression spring (movement mechanism)
233 Sub-arm (sub-swing member, moving mechanism)
233B Engagement hole 234 Support plate (support)
234A Engagement protrusion (first engagement protrusion)
234B Engagement protrusion (second engagement protrusion)
234C Engagement protrusion (third engagement protrusion)
235 Right gear (second power transmission member)
236 Left gear (third power transmission member)
237 Middle gear (first power transmission member)
238 Right rack member (first engaging member)
238A rack teeth (engagement part)
239 Left rack member (second engaging member)
239A rack teeth (engagement part)
421 Right metal door (first movable member, first moving member)
422 Left metal door (first movable member, first moving member)
423 Right silver door (second movable member, first moving member)
424 Left silver door (second movable member, first moving member)
425 Lower guide rail (guide member)
426 Upper guide shaft (long member)
427 Lower guide shaft (long member)
428 Right metal door rack member (first mounting part, right metal door, first movable member)
428a, 428b rack teeth (first movable member moving mechanism)
429 Left metal door rack member (second mounting part, left metal door, first movable member)
429a Rack teeth (first movable member moving mechanism)
430 Right silver door rack member (third mounting part, right silver door, second movable member)
430a rack teeth (second movable member moving mechanism)
431 Left silver door rack member (4th mounting part, left silver door, 2nd movable member)
431a, 431b rack teeth (second movable member moving mechanism)
435 gears (first power output member, first movable member moving mechanism)
436 to 439 gears (first movable member moving mechanism)
441 gears (second power output member, second movable member moving mechanism)
442-445 gears (second movable member moving mechanism)
450 Lower panel base (fixing member)
451 First movable member moving mechanism 452 Second movable member moving mechanism 461A, 461B Thread groove (groove)
462A, 462B Screw holes (holes)
463 Pan head screw (fastening member)
471 Decorative member 475 Panel board (board)
476 Display member 477 Pedestal 477C Support frame (mounting part)
477c tip (tip of support frame)
480 Table reflector (first light guide member)
480C, 480D through hole (first through hole)
Rear end surface of 480a and 480b (opposing surface of the first light guide member and the second light guide member)
481 Back reflector (second light guide member)
481a, 481b Tip surface (opposite surface between the first light guide member and the second light guide member)
481C through hole (second through hole)
481c Open end (open end of the second through hole)

Claims (2)

A game board with a game area where the game ball rolls,
A starting area provided on the game board and capable of detecting the passage of a game ball,
A variable winning device provided on the game board, which is in one of a first state in which the game ball is easily accepted and a second state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted than the first state.
When the starting area detects a game ball, a lottery is made as to whether or not the variable winning device shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player by repeating the first state and the second state. And lottery means to do
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, and then the identification information is stopped and displayed.
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the effect control means for controlling the effect performed during the variable display period of the identification information, and the effect control means.
An effect display means for displaying an effect when the effect is executed,
When the starting region detects the passage of a game ball during the variable display period of the identification information, the holding ball storage means for storing the result of the lottery by the lottery means performed at the time of the detection as a holding ball is provided.
The effect control means
Prior to executing the variable display of the identification information based on the predetermined holding ball, a pre-effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the pre-effect based on the content of the predetermined holding ball.
As the pre-effect, the first pre-effect control means for executing at least one of the first effect having a predetermined effect form and the second effect having an effect form different from the first effect by using the effect display means. ,
In the pre-effect, when the first effect and the second effect of the same system are executed by the first pre-effect control means during the variation display period of the identification information based on the reserved ball, the same system After the execution of the first effect and the second effect, in the variable display period of the identification information based on the predetermined holding ball, the third effect having a different effect form from the first effect and the second effect is performed. It has a second pre-effect control means, which is executed by using the effect display means.
The expected degree of transition of the gaming state to the special gaming state at the time of executing the third effect is higher than the expected degree of transition of the gaming state to the special gaming state at the time of executing the first effect or the second effect. high,
When the third effect is not executed and the variable display period is the first period, the first effect is not executed in a mode in which both the first effect and the second effect are executed. Alternatively, one of the second effects is executed, and a plurality of periods are provided as a period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period, and in a part of the plurality of periods, the first effect or the above. A gaming machine characterized in that the first effect and the second effect are executed without executing the effect in a mode in which any of the second effects is executed. It is equipped with a decorative accessory that can be moved from the standby position to the operating position by the driving means.
The decorative accessory is
With at least one decoration
A decorative member that displays an effect in which the lens guides the light emitted from the light emitting means provided behind the decorative portion.
Have,
Claim 1 is characterized in that when the decorative accessory is moved from the standby position to the operating position, the decorative member provided behind the decorative portion can be visually recognized in a state where the decorative portion is moved. The gaming machine described in.

Images